Basket 2

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 264

Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.

com

Coaching
Youth
Basketball
F IFTH EDITION

American Sport Education Program


with Don Showalter
USA Basketball Head Coach
Men’s Developmental National Team

Human Kinetics

www.Ebook777.com
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Coaching youth basketball / American Sport Education Program


with Don Showalter. -- 5th ed.
p. cm.
ISBN-13: 978-1-4504-1972-7 (soft cover)
ISBN-10: 1-4504-1972-0 (soft cover)
1. Basketball for children--Coaching. 2. Basketball--Coaching.
I. Showalter, Don. II. American Sport Education Program.
GV885.3.C63 2012
796.323083--dc23
2012007721

ISBN-10: 1-4504-1972-0 (print)


ISBN-13: 978-1-4504-1972-7 (print)

Copyright © 2012, 2007, 2001, 1996, 1991 by Human Kinetics, Inc.

All rights reserved. Except for use in a review, the reproduction or utilization of this work in any form or by any electronic,
mechanical, or other means, now known or hereafter invented, including xerography, photocopying, and recording, and in any
information storage and retrieval system, is forbidden without the written permission of the publisher.

Notice: Permission to reproduce the following material is granted to instructors and agencies who have purchased Coaching
Youth Basketball, Fifth Edition: pp. 247-251. The reproduction of other parts of this book is expressly forbidden by the above
copyright notice. Persons or agencies who have not purchased Coaching Youth Basketball, Fifth Edition, may not reproduce
any material.

The web addresses cited in this text were current as of March 2012, unless otherwise noted.

Acquisitions Editor: Justin Klug; Developmental Editor: Laura E. Podeschi; Assistant Editor: Tyler Wolpert; Copyedi-
tor: Patrick Connolly; Permissions Manager: Martha Gullo; Graphic Designer: Nancy Rasmus; Graphic Artist: Tara
Welsch; Cover Designer: Keith Blomberg; Photographer (cover): Dale Garvey; Photographer (interior): Neil Bernstein;
Visual Production Assistant: Joyce Brumfield; Photo Production Manager: Jason Allen; Art Manager: Kelly Hendren;
Associate Art Manager: Alan L. Wilborn; Illustrations: © Human Kinetics, unless otherwise noted; Printer: Versa Press

We thank Next Generation School in Champaign, Illinois, for assistance in providing the location for the photo shoot for
this book.

Copies of this book are available at special discounts for bulk purchase for sales promotions, premiums, fund-raising, or
educational use. Special editions or book excerpts can also be created to specifications. For details, contact the Special Sales
Manager at Human Kinetics.

Printed in the United States of America 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

The paper in this book is certified under a sustainable forestry program.

Human Kinetics
Website: www.HumanKinetics.com

United States: Human Kinetics Australia: Human Kinetics


P.O. Box 5076 57A Price Avenue
Champaign, IL 61825-5076 Lower Mitcham, South Australia 5062
800-747-4457 08 8372 0999
e-mail: humank@hkusa.com e-mail: info@hkaustralia.com
Canada: Human Kinetics New Zealand: Human Kinetics
475 Devonshire Road Unit 100 P.O. Box 80
Windsor, ON N8Y 2L5 Torrens Park, South Australia 5062
800-465-7301 (in Canada only) 0800 222 062
e-mail: info@hkcanada.com e-mail: info@hknewzealand.com
Europe: Human Kinetics
107 Bradford Road
Stanningley
Leeds LS28 6AT, United Kingdom
+44 (0) 113 255 5665
e-mail: hk@hkeurope.com E5585

www.Ebook777.com
Coaching
Youth
Basketball
F IFTH EDITION
Contents

Foreword vii
Welcome From USA Basketball viii
Acknowledgments ix
Drill Finder x
Key to Diagrams xii

Part I Managing 1

1 Responsibilities 6

2 Preparations 15

3 Game Days 38

Part II Teaching 45

4 Offensive Skills 54

5 Offensive Tactics 78

6 Offensive Drills 90

iv
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

7 Defensive Skills 106

8 Defensive Tactics 114

9 Defensive Drills 126

Part III Practicing 141

10 Practices for Ages 5 and 6 146

11 Practices for Ages 7 and 8 163

12 Practices for Ages 9 and 10 183

13 Practices for Ages 11 and 12 204

14 Practices for Ages 13 and 14 225

Appendix: Checklists and Forms 246


About the Authors 252

www.Ebook777.com
This page intentionally left blank.
Foreword

When you watch a college, WNBA, or NBA basketball game, it looks so simple.
Two teams take the court looking to accomplish the same goal—win. The athletes
make the game look simple, but many viewers don’t have a clue about just how much
hard work and practice the players had to put in to make the game seem so basic.
When players are recruited for college basketball, you hear all about what they were
able to accomplish in high school. But where do you think they first learned how to
play? For a very select few, high school was the first time they’d ever played organized
basketball. But the majority began learning the game and the skills at the youth level.
From local YMCA to community recreational leagues, youth basketball remains
one of the most popular sports for young kids. It’s a way to teach kids about the game
as well as the importance of living a healthy, active lifestyle and other critical life les-
sons such as teamwork, respect, and dedication. But aside from those key lessons,
kids learn how to have fun!
Throughout my coaching career I have had the honor and privilege of coaching
young men who share my passion for this great game. But all that is seen on televi-
sion, read in the papers, or discussed by media is the outcome of games. You never
hear about how they are able to use the sport to develop into productive citizens,
respectful people, and future leaders. That is truly a shame, because the game is so
much more—and it all begins at the youth level. In Coaching Youth Basketball, USA
Basketball’s Don Showalter teams with the American Sport Education Program to
show you the proper way to develop skills, communicate with young players, and help
kids get everything possible out of the game. This resource will give you everything
you need from the first practice through the final game, and it will do so by teaching
you how to keep kids engaged and excited to play and learn the game.
I’ve been fortunate to coach almost every level of the game over the years, and it
becomes more and more rewarding every single day. Working with young kids is both
a challenge and a joy. Remember that although you might not coach the next LeBron
James or Derrick Rose, you have the ability to affect a child’s life both on and off the
court. I encourage you to treat every moment as if it could be your very last time inter-
acting with your young players. Always remember that whether you are in a paid posi-
tion or working as a volunteer coach, you’re still a coach, and the young kids look up
to you. Most important, have fun—it’s the only way to ensure that the kids will, too!
Best wishes.
Roy Williams
Head men’s basketball coach, University of North Carolina
vii
Welcome From
USA Basketball

Welcome to the fifth edition of Coaching Youth Basketball. Being a


coach is truly one of the most important professions—whether it is a volunteer or
compensated position—that a person can undertake. The rewards of coaching young
people are great, and you make an impact on each of the players you coach. We have
included a great deal of information related to managing, teaching, and practicing
at the youth level.
The information provided in the following pages will help guide you as you coach
your team. I have used much of this information to coach the USA Basketball Devel-
opmental Teams (U16 and U17) to gold medals in international competition. I have
also used this information to coach players at the elementary and junior high levels.
I hope this source helps you as you begin your own coaching endeavor. Have fun!
Don Showalter
Head coach of the USA Basketball Men’s Developmental National Team
Varsity boys’ basketball coach—City High School, Iowa City, Iowa

viii
Acknowledgments

Many people had much to do with editing this edition. The USA Basketball
staff are unbelievable and have provided me with tremendous opportunities most
high school coaches only dream about in their career; Jim Tooley, Sean Ford, and BJ
Johnson are great people. Thanks to Annie Byrne for her help in writing the Con-
siderations When Coaching Females sidebars in this edition. Laura Podeschi from
Human Kinetics was outstanding to work with and provided great guidance through-
out the project. My longtime assistant coaches—Chris Kern, Kelby Bender, and Bud
Bender—also deserve recognition because they have been a huge part of my success
and have done much during our summer development so I could work with USA
Basketball. Coaches who have had a great impact on my coaching career are John
Wooden, Coach K (Mike Krzyzewski), Roy Williams, and Tates Locke, to name just a
few. Finally, the support of a family is crucial in a coach’s success, and my wife of 39
years, Vicky Showalter, has been a rock.
Don Showalter

ix
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

Drill Finder
Offensive drills Page
Offensive skills Four-line jump stops 91
Dribble–pivot–pass 91
Jab stepping 92
Partner passing 92
Target two-line passing 92
Dribbling lines 93
Two-ball shooting 94
Two-ball cutting 95
Offensive rebounding 96
On the line 96
Full-court layups 96
Full-court jumpers 97
Five ball 98
Perfect layups 99
Offensive tactics Two-steppin’ 100
Drive-through 100
In my dust 101
Passing contest 101
Cleaning the glass 101
Bucketmania 102
Room to move 102
Life in the fast lane 103
Screen door 103
Pickin’ for points 104
Return to sender 104
Seconds to go 105
Cutthroat 105

www.Ebook777.com
Defensive drills Page
Defensive skills Defensive slide, sideline to sideline 127
Defending shots 127
Defending the dribble 128
Defensive rebounding 129
Four-on-four blockout 129
Three-player run and slide 130
Four-player run and trap 131
Champions 132
Defensive tactics One-on-one controlled 134
One-on-one live 134
One-on-one live from closeout 134
One-on-one live from closeout in help position 135
Two-on-two 135
Three-on-three 136
Four-on-four 138
Helping hands 139
Cutting off 139
No passing zone 140
Picking pockets 140
Scramble 140

xi
Key to Diagrams

Offensive player

Offensive player with ball

Defensive player

Player movement

Pass

Dribble

Screen (offense), trap or cut off (defense)

E5585/ASEP/fig 0.1/429594/pulled/R3-alw

xii
Part I
Managing

1
2 Coaching Youth Basketball

Have you purchased the traditional coaching tools such as a whistle, coach-
ing attire, sport shoes, and a clipboard? They’ll help you in the act of coaching, but
to be successful, you’ll need five other tools that cannot be bought. These tools are
available only through self-examination and hard work; they’re easy to remember
with the acronym COACH:
C Comprehension
O Outlook
A Affection
C Character
H Humor

Comprehension
Comprehension of the rules and skills of basketball is required. You must understand
the elements of the sport. To improve your comprehension of basketball, take the
following steps:
• Read about the rules of basketball beginning on page 27 in chapter 2 of this
book.
• Read about the fundamental skills of basketball in chapters 4 and 7.
• Read additional basketball coaching books, including those available from the
American Sport Education Program (ASEP).
• Contact youth basketball organizations.
• Attend basketball coaching clinics.
• Talk with more experienced coaches.
• Observe local college, high school, and youth basketball games.
• Watch basketball games on television.
In addition to having basketball knowledge, you must implement proper train-
ing and safety methods so that your players can participate with little risk of injury.
Even then, injuries may occur. And more often than not, you’ll be the first person
responding to your players’ injuries, so be sure you understand the basic emergency
care procedures described in chapter 2. Also, read in that chapter how to handle more
serious sport injury situations.

Outlook
This coaching tool refers to your perspective and goals—what you seek as a coach. The
most common coaching objectives are to (a) have fun; (b) help players develop their
physical, mental, and social skills; and (c) strive to win. Thus, your outlook involves
Managing 3

your priorities, your planning, and your vision for the future. See the Assessing Your
Priorities sidebar (page 4) to learn more about the priorities you set for yourself as
a coach.
ASEP has a motto that will help you keep your outlook in line with the best inter-
ests of the kids on your team. It summarizes in four words all you need to remember
when establishing your coaching priorities:
Athletes First, Winning Second
This motto recognizes that striving to win is an important, even vital, part of sports.
Instilling a competitive nature in your players is very important because they will
need this competitive mind-set in the job world as well. But the motto emphatically
states that no efforts in striving to win should be made at the expense of the players’
well-being, development, and enjoyment. Take the following actions to better define
your outlook:
• With the members of your coaching staff, determine your priorities for the
season.
• Prepare for situations that may challenge your priorities.
• Set goals for yourself and your players that are consistent with your priorities.
• Plan how you and your players can best attain your goals.
• Review your goals frequently to be sure that you are staying on track.

Affection
Another vital tool you will want to have in your coaching kit is a genuine concern
for the young people you coach. This requires having a passion for kids, a desire to
share with them your enjoyment and knowledge of basketball, and the patience and
understanding that allow all your players to grow from their involvement in sport. You
can demonstrate your affection and patience in many ways, including the following:
• Make an effort to get to know each player on your team.
• Treat each player as an individual.
• Empathize with players trying to learn new and difficult skills.
• Treat players as you would like to be treated under similar circumstances.
• Control your emotions.
• Show your enthusiasm for being involved with your team.
• Keep an upbeat tempo and positive tone in all of your communications.
• Strive to get to know your players off the court, and plan ways for them to get
to know each other and the coaches in a noncompetitive environment (e.g.,
pizza parties, bowling, watching college games together, or movie nights).
Assessing Your Priorities
Even though all coaches focus on competition, we want you to focus on positive
competition—keeping the pursuit of victory in perspective by making decisions that,
first, are in the best interest of the players, and second, will help to win the game.
So, how do you know if your outlook and priorities are in order? Here’s a little test:
1. Which situation would you be most proud of?
a. knowing that each participant enjoyed playing basketball
b. seeing that all players improved their basketball skills
c. winning the league championship
2. Which statement best reflects your thoughts about sport?
a. If it isn’t fun, don’t do it.
b. Everyone should learn something every day.
c. Sport isn’t fun if you don’t win.
3. How would you like your players to remember you?
a. as a coach who was fun to play for
b. as a coach who provided a good base of fundamental skills
c. as a coach who had a winning record
4. Which would you most like to hear a parent of a player on your team say?
a. Mike really had a good time playing basketball this year.
b. Nicole learned some important lessons playing basketball this year.
c. Willie played on the first-place basketball team this year.
5. Which of the following would be the most rewarding moment of your season?
a. having your team want to continue playing, even after practice is over
b. seeing one of your players finally master the skill of dribbling
c. winning the league championship
Look over your answers. If you most often selected a responses, then having fun
is most important to you. A majority of b answers suggests that skill development is
what attracts you to coaching. And if c was your most frequent response, winning
is tops on your list of coaching priorities. If your priorities are in order, your play-
ers’ well-being will take precedence over your team’s win–loss record every time.

4
Managing 5

Character
The fact that you have decided to coach young basketball players probably means that
you think participation in sport is important. But whether that participation develops
character in your players depends as much on you as it does on the sport itself. How
can you help your players build character?
Having good character means modeling appropriate behaviors for sport and life.
That means more than just saying the right things. What you say and what you do
must match. There is no place in coaching for the “Do as I say, not as I do” philoso-
phy. Challenge, support, encourage, and reward every youngster, and your players
will be more likely to accept—even celebrate—their differences. Be in control before,
during, and after all practices and games. And don’t be afraid to admit that you were
wrong. No one is perfect!
Each member of your coaching staff should consider the following steps to becom-
ing a good role model:
• Take stock of your strengths and weaknesses.
• Build on your strengths.
• Set goals for yourself to improve on areas that are not as strong.
• If you slip up, apologize to your team and to yourself. You’ll do better next time.

Humor
Humor is an often-overlooked coaching tool. It means having the ability to laugh at
yourself and with your players during practices and games. Nothing helps balance
the seriousness of a skill session like a chuckle or two. And a sense of humor puts in
perspective the many mistakes your players will make. So don’t get upset over each
miscue or respond negatively to erring players. Allow yourself and your players to
enjoy the ups, and don’t dwell on the downs.
Here are some tips for injecting humor and fun into your practices:
• Make practices fun by including a variety of activities.
• Keep all players involved in games and skill practices.
• Consider laughter by your players to be a sign of enjoyment, not of waning
discipline.
• Do not use sarcasm aimed at any player as a means of humor.
• Be able to laugh at yourself first.
• Smile!
1 Responsibilities

Coaching at all levels involves much more than designing offensive plays
or drawing up defenses. Coaching involves accepting the tremendous responsibility
you face when parents put their children into your care. As a basketball coach, you’ll
be called on to do the following:
1. Provide a safe physical environment. Playing basketball holds inherent risks,
but as a coach you’re responsible for regularly inspecting the courts and equipment
used for practice and competition (see the Facilities and Equipment Checklist in the
appendix on page 247).
2. Communicate in a positive way. As you can already see, you have a lot to
communicate. You’ll communicate not only with your players and their parents but
also with the coaching staff, officials, administrators, and others. Communicate in
a way that is positive and that demonstrates that you have the best interests of the
players at heart.

COACHING TIP Set a goal for yourself to make at least two positive com-
ments to each player during each practice.

3. Teach the fundamental skills of basketball. When teaching the fundamental


skills of basketball, keep in mind that basketball is a game, and therefore, you want
to be sure that your players have fun while they are learning the skills. We ask that
you help all players be the best they can be by creating a fun, yet productive, practice
environment in which players learn and practice the needed skills in a manner that they
enjoy (see part II for more information). Additionally, to help your players improve
their skills, you need to have a sound understanding of offensive and defensive skills.
We’ll provide information to assist you in gaining that understanding (see chapters
4 and 7).

6
Responsibilities 7

4. Teach the rules of basketball. You need to introduce the rules of basketball
and incorporate them into individual instruction (see page 27 in chapter 2 for more
information). Many rules can be taught in practice, including offensive rules (such as
double dribble, traveling, the three-second rule, over-and-back violations, and free-
throw violations) as well as defensive rules (such as fouling and the five-second rule
on closely guarding an opponent). You should also plan to go over the rules with
your players any time an opportunity naturally arises in practices.
5. Direct players in competition. Your responsibilities include determining start-
ing lineups and a substitution plan, relating appropriately to officials and to opposing
coaches and players, and making sound tactical decisions during games (see chapter
3 for more information on coaching during games). Remember that the focus is not
on winning at all costs, but on coaching your kids to compete well, do their best,
improve their basketball skills, and strive to win within the rules.
6. Help your players become fit and value fitness for a lifetime. We want you
to help your players be fit so they can play basketball safely and successfully. We also
want your players to learn to become fit on their own, understand the value of fitness,
and enjoy training. Thus, we ask you not to make them do push-ups or run laps for
punishment. Make it fun to get fit for basketball, and make it fun to play basketball
so that they’ll stay fit for a lifetime.
7. Help young people develop character. Character development includes learn-
ing, caring, being honest and respectful, taking responsibility, and demonstrating good
sporting behavior during practices and games. Teaching these intangible qualities to
your players is no less important than teaching them the skill of shooting the basket-
ball. We ask you to teach these values to players by demonstrating and encouraging
behaviors that express these values at all times. For example, in teaching good team
defense, stress to young players the importance of learning their assignments, helping
their teammates, playing within the rules, showing respect for their opponents, and
understanding that they are responsible for winning the individual battle on every
play—even though they may not always be recognized individually for their efforts.
These are your responsibilities as a coach. Remember that every player is an indi-
vidual. You must provide a wholesome environment in which every player has the
opportunity to learn how to play the game without fear while having fun and enjoying
the overall basketball experience.

Safety
One of your players appears to break free downcourt, dribbling the ball toward the
basket for an apparent layup. Out of nowhere races a defender who catches up with
and accidentally undercuts your player. You see that your player is not getting up and
seems to be in pain. What do you do?
No coach wants to see players get hurt. But injury remains a reality of sport partici-
pation; consequently, you must be prepared to provide first aid when injuries occur
and to protect yourself against unjustified lawsuits. Fortunately, coaches can institute
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

8 Coaching Youth Basketball

many preventive measures to reduce the risk. In this section, we describe steps you
can take to prevent injuries, chapter 2 covers first aid and emergency responses for
when injuries occur, and your legal responsibilities as a coach.
You can’t prevent all injuries from happening, but you can take preventive measures
that give your players the best possible chance for injury-free participation. To help
you create the safest possible environment for your players, we’ll explore what you
can do in these areas:
• Preseason physical examination
• Physical conditioning
• Player matchups and inherent risks
• Proper supervision and record keeping
• Environmental conditions

Preseason Physical Examination


We recommend that your players have a physical examination before participating
in basketball. The exam should address the most likely areas of medical concern and
identify youngsters at high risk. We also suggest that you have players’ parents or
guardians sign a participation agreement form (this will be discussed in more detail
later in this chapter) and an informed consent form to allow their children to be
treated in case of an emergency. For a sample form, please see the Informed Consent
Form on page 248 of the appendix.

Physical Conditioning
Players need to be in shape (or get in shape) to play the game at the level expected.
They must have adequate cardiorespiratory fitness and muscular fitness.
Cardiorespiratory fitness involves the body’s ability to use oxygen and fuels effi-
ciently to power muscle contractions. As players get in better shape, their bodies are
able to more efficiently deliver oxygen to fuel muscles and carry off carbon dioxides
and other wastes. Basketball requires lots of running and exertion; most players will
be moving nearly continuously and making short bursts throughout a game. Young-
sters who aren’t as fit as their peers often overextend in trying to keep up, which can
result in light-headedness, nausea, fatigue, and potential injury.
Try to remember that the players’ goals are to participate, to learn, and to have
fun. Therefore, you must keep the players active, attentive, and involved with every
phase of practice. If you do, the players will attain higher levels of cardiorespira-
tory fitness as the season progresses simply by taking part in practice. However, you
should watch closely for signs of low cardiorespiratory fitness; don’t let your players
do much until they’re fit. You might privately counsel youngsters who appear overly
winded, suggesting that they train outside of practice (under proper supervision) to
increase their fitness.
Muscular fitness encompasses strength, muscular endurance, power, speed, and
flexibility. This type of fitness is affected by physical maturity, as well as strength

www.Ebook777.com
Responsibilities 9

training and other types of training. Your players will likely exhibit a relatively wide
range of muscular fitness. Those who have greater muscular fitness will be able to
run faster and jump higher. They will also sustain fewer muscular injuries, and any
injuries that do occur will tend to be minor. And in case of injury, recovery is faster
for those with higher levels of muscular fitness.
Two other components of fitness and injury prevention are the warm-up and the
cool-down. Although young bodies are generally very limber, they can become tight
through inactivity. The warm-up should address each muscle group and elevate
the heart rate in preparation for strenuous activity. Players should warm up for
5 to 10 minutes using a combination of light running, jumping, and stretching.
As practice winds down, slow players’ heart rates with an easy jog or walk. Then
have the players stretch for 5 minutes to help prevent tight muscles before the
next practice or game.

Player Matchups and Inherent Risks


We recommend that you group teams in 2-year age increments if possible. You’ll
encounter fewer mismatches in physical maturation with narrow age ranges. Even
so, two 12-year-old boys might differ by 90 pounds in weight, a foot in height, and
3 or 4 years in emotional and intellectual maturity. This presents dangers for the less
mature. Whenever possible, you should match players against opponents of similar
size and physical maturity. Such an approach gives smaller, less mature youngsters a
better chance to succeed and avoid injury while providing more mature players with
a greater challenge. Closely supervise games so that the more mature do not put the
less mature at undue risk.

COACHING TIP If your players vary largely in size, you should consider
installing a rule that does not allow players to double-team or steal the ball
from a dribbler during practices. This may help prevent bigger players from
overpowering smaller players and stealing the ball at every opportunity.

Although proper matching helps protect you from certain liability concerns, you
must also warn players of the inherent risks involved in playing basketball, because
“failure to warn” is one of the most successful arguments in lawsuits against coaches.
So, thoroughly explain the inherent risks of basketball, and make sure each player
knows, understands, and appreciates those risks. You can learn more about these risks
by talking with your league administrators.
The preseason parent-orientation meeting is a good opportunity to explain the
risks of the sport to both parents and players. It is also a good time to have both the
players and their parents sign a participation agreement form or waiver releasing
you from liability should an injury occur. You should work with your league when
creating these forms or waivers, and the forms should be reviewed by legal counsel
before presentation. These forms or waivers do not relieve you of responsibility for
your players’ well-being, but they are recommended by lawyers and may help you in
the event of a lawsuit.
10 Coaching Youth Basketball

Proper Supervision and Record Keeping


To ensure players’ safety, you must provide both general supervision and specific
supervision. General supervision means that you are in the area of activity so that you
can see and hear what is happening. You should be
• on the court and in position to supervise the players even before the formal
practice or game begins,
• immediately accessible to the activity and able to oversee the entire activity,
• alert to conditions that may be dangerous to players and ready to take action
to protect players,
• able to react immediately and appropriately to emergencies, and
• present on the court until the last player has been picked up after the practice
or game.
Specific supervision is the direct supervision of an activity at practice. For example, you
should provide specific supervision when you teach new skills and should continue
it until your players understand the requirements of the activity, the risks involved,
and their own ability to perform in light of these risks. You must also provide specific
supervision when you notice players breaking rules or a change in the condition of
your players. As a general rule, the more dangerous the activity, the more specific the
supervision required. This suggests that more specific supervision is required with
younger and less experienced players.

COACHING TIP Supervision is very important to ensure that the basketball


skills you teach are performed in a consistent manner. The more adults that
can help supervise the skills, the better the players can learn and perform
those skills.

As part of your supervisory duties, you are expected to foresee potentially dangerous
situations and to be positioned to help prevent them. This requires that you know
basketball well, especially the rules that are intended to provide for safety. Prohibit
dangerous horseplay, and hold training sessions only under safe weather conditions
(as discussed in Environmental Conditions). These specific supervisory activities,
applied consistently, will make the play environment safer for your players and will
help protect you from liability if a mishap occurs.
For further protection, keep records of your season plans, practice plans, and
players’ injuries. Season and practice plans come in handy when you need evidence
that players have been taught certain skills, whereas accurate, detailed injury report
forms offer protection against unfounded lawsuits. Ask for these forms from your
sponsoring organization (see page 249 in the appendix for the Injury Report Form),
and hold onto these records for several years so that an “old basketball injury” of a
former player doesn’t come back to haunt you.
Responsibilities 11

Environmental Conditions
Even though basketball is a game that is typically played indoors, the versatility of the
game allows it to be played outside as well. Many players will practice on their own
at outside courts, and many camps and youth practices are held outside because gym
space is often not available. Most health problems caused by environmental factors
are related to excessive heat or cold, although you should also consider other envi-
ronmental factors such as severe weather and air pollution. A little thought about the
potential problems and a little effort to ensure adequate protection for your players
will prevent most serious emergencies related to environmental conditions.

COACHING TIP Encourage players to drink plenty of water before, during,


and after training. Water makes up 45 to 65 percent of a youngster’s body
weight, and losing even a small amount of water can cause severe conse-
quences in the body’s systems. It doesn’t have to be hot and humid for play-
ers to become dehydrated, nor is thirst an accurate indicator. In fact, by the
time players are aware of their thirst, they are long overdue for a drink.
Heat
On hot and humid days, the body has difficulty cooling itself. Because the air is already
saturated with water vapor (humidity), sweat doesn’t evaporate as easily. Therefore,
body sweat is a less effective cooling agent, and the body retains extra heat. Hot,
humid environments put players at risk of heat exhaustion and heatstroke (see more
on these in chapter 2 on page 26). And if you think it’s hot or humid, it’s worse for
the kids, not only because they’re more active, but also because kids under the age of
12 have more difficulty regulating their body temperature than adults do. To provide
for players’ safety in hot or humid conditions, take the following preventive measures:
• Monitor weather conditions and adjust training sessions accordingly. Table 1.1
lists some warm-weather precautions for various temperatures.
• Acclimatize players to exercising in high heat and humidity. Athletes can adjust
to high heat and humidity in 7 to 10 days. During this period, hold practices
at low to moderate activity levels and give the players fluid breaks every 20
minutes or less.
• Switch to light clothing. Players should wear shorts and white T-shirts.

TABLE 1.1 Warm-Weather Precautions


Temperature (°F) Humidity Precautions
80-90 <70% Monitoring of athletes prone to heat illness
≥70% 5 min rest after 30 min of practice
90-100 <70% 5 min rest after 30 min of practice
≥70% Short practices in evening or early morning
12 Coaching Youth Basketball

• Identify and monitor players who are prone to heat illness. This would include
players who are overweight, heavily muscled, or out of shape and players who
work excessively hard or have suffered previous heat illness. Closely monitor
these players and give them fluid breaks every 15 to 20 minutes.
• Make sure players replace fluids lost through sweat. Encourage players to drink
17 to 20 ounces of fluid 2 to 3 hours before each practice or game, to drink 7
to 10 ounces every 20 minutes during and after each practice and game, and to
drink 16 to 24 ounces of fluid for every pound lost. Fluids such as water and
sports drinks are preferable during games and practices (suggested intakes are
based on NATA [National Athletic Trainers’ Association] recommendations).
The amount of fluid is generally the same for each age group; however, prepu-
bescent players should drink more water than sports drinks.
• Encourage players to replenish electrolytes, such as sodium (salt) and potassium,
that are lost through sweat. The best way to replace these nutrients—as well as
others such as carbohydrates (energy) and protein (muscle building)—is by
eating a balanced diet. Experts say that additional salt intake may be helpful
during the most intense training periods in the heat.
Cold
When a person is exposed to cold weather, the body temperature starts to drop below
normal. To counteract this, the body shivers to create heat and reduces blood flow to
the extremities to conserve heat in the core of the body. But no matter how effective
the body’s natural heating mechanism is, the body will better withstand cold tem-
peratures if it is prepared to handle them. To reduce the risk of cold-related illnesses,
make sure players wear appropriate protective clothing, and keep the players active
to maintain body heat. Also monitor the windchill factor because it can drastically
affect the severity of players’ responses to the weather. The windchill factor index is
shown in figure 1.1.
Temperature (˚F)

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Flesh may freeze within one minute
40 -29 -22 -15 -8 -1 6 13 20 27
35 -27 -21 -14 -7 0 7 14 21 28
Wind speed (mph)

30 -26 -19 -12 -5 1 8 15 22 28


25 -24 -17 -11 -4 3 9 16 23 29
20 -22 -15 -9 -2 4 11 17 24 30

15 -19 -13 -7 0 6 13 19 25 32

10 -16 -10 -4 3 9 15 21 27 34
5 -11 -5 1 7 13 19 25 31 36

Windchill temperature (˚F)

FIGURE 1.1 Windchill factor index.


Adapted from National Weather Service, 2009, NWS windchill chart. [Online]. Available: www.nws.noaa.gov/om/windchill/
index.shtml [February 3, 2012].
E5585/ASEP/fig 1.1/429445/pulled/R1
Responsibilities 13

Severe Weather
Severe weather refers to a host of potential dangers, including lightning storms, tor-
nadoes, hail storms, and heavy rains. When people are playing basketball outside,
lightning is of special concern because it can come up quickly and can cause great
harm or even kill. For each 5-second count from the flash of lightning to the bang
of thunder, lightning is one mile away. A flash–bang of 10 seconds means lightning
is two miles away; a flash–bang of 15 seconds indicates that lightning is three miles
away. A practice or competition should be stopped for the day if lightning is six miles
away or closer (30 seconds or fewer from flash to bang). In addition to these sugges-
tions, your school, league, or state association may also have rules that you will want
to consider in severe weather.
Safe places to take cover when lightning strikes include fully enclosed metal vehicles
with the windows up, enclosed buildings, and low ground (under cover of bushes, if
possible). It’s not safe to be near metal objects such as flag poles, fences, light poles,
and metal bleachers. Also avoid trees, water, and open fields.
You should cancel practice when under either a tornado watch or warning. If you
are practicing or competing when a tornado is nearby, you should get inside a build-
ing if possible. If you cannot get into a building, lie in a ditch or other low-lying area
or crouch near a strong building, using your arms to protect your head and neck.
The keys to handling severe weather are caution and prudence. Don’t try to get
that last 10 minutes of practice in if lightning is on the horizon. Don’t continue to
play in heavy rain. Many storms can strike both quickly and ferociously. Respect the
weather and play it safe.
Air Pollution
Poor air quality and smog can present real dangers to your players. Both short- and
long-term lung damage are possible from breathing polluted air. Although it’s true
that participating in clean air is not possible in many areas, restricting activity is rec-
ommended when the air quality ratings are lower than moderate or when there is
a smog alert in your area. Your local health department or air quality control board
can inform you of the air quality ratings for your area and when restricting activities
is recommended.

Teaching
In coaching, teaching involves teaching skills to players. When teaching a basketball
skill, you should demonstrate the skill in a simple form so the players can understand
the hows and whys of the skill (see part II for more details). This may vary depending
on the age and development of your players. In addition to teaching basketball skills,
you should teach your players how to demonstrate good sporting behavior on and
off the court and how to develop friendships with teammates, opponents, officials,
and coaches. The goal is for players to learn life skills that will have benefits long after
the basketball season is done.
14 Coaching Youth Basketball

Organization
Organization should be a top priority for every coach. As you continue to coach
young players, you should keep a good record of what you have done, identifying
what worked well and what can be improved on for next season.
Here are some ideas that will help you to be more organized:
• Keep a daily journal of what worked well in practice and what did not work well.
• Organize your notes into a notebook for easy reference during future seasons.
• Keep all your practice plans from one year to the next in a binder. This will be
a great reference when you are planning practices in upcoming seasons.
• Keep all the player information in a file or on your computer. You may have the
same players from one year to the next, so this will be handy for your reference.
• Keep a log of your games. Write a short scouting report on the teams you
played. These scouting reports will be helpful when you play the team in the
next season, especially if the team has the same coach.
• Keep a record of your meetings with parents, players, and other people associ-
ated with your program. This will be of value in future seasons; if necessary,
you can refer back to this record to see what has been discussed previously.

Fun
Regardless of where you are in your season, you must create an environment that
welcomes learning and promotes teamwork while still allowing players to have fun.
Following are seven tips that will help you and your coaching staff get the most out
of your practices:
1. Stick to the practice times agreed on as a staff.
2. Start and end each practice as a team.
3. Keep the practice routine as consistent as possible so that the players can feel
comfortable.
4. Be organized in your approach by moving quickly from one drill to another
and from one period to another.
5. Tell your players what the practice will include before the practice starts.
6. Allow the players to take water breaks whenever possible.
7. Focus on providing positive feedback.
You may also want to consider using games to make practices more fun. In chapters
6 and 9, you will find 47 gamelike drills. During your season, it may be fun to use
the games toward the end of the week to add variety to your practices.
Preparations
2

You’ve learned about the tools you need for coaching—comprehension,


outlook, affection, character, and humor—as well as your responsibilities as a coach,
some ways to provide safety for your players, techniques for teaching, and how to make
basketball fun. These are essentials for effective coaching; without them, you’d have a
difficult time managing your team. But you must also be sure to take the appropriate
steps to prepare for your season. This chapter examines how to develop a season plan
and practice plans. In addition, the chapter provides you with the knowledge you’ll
need as a coach, including information on how the game is played, descriptions of
the rules of basketball, and details on how to handle injuries.

Season Planning
Your season plan acts as a snapshot of the entire season. Before the first practice with
your players, you must sit down as a coaching staff and develop a season plan. To do
this, simply write down each practice and game date on a calendar, and then go back
and number your practices. These practice numbers will become the foundation of
your season plan. Now you can work through the season plan, moving from practice
to practice, to create a quick overview of what you hope to cover in each practice. You
should note the purpose of the practice, the skills you will cover, and the activities
you will use for that particular practice.

15
Parent Preseason Meeting
A player’s parents need to be assured that their son or daughter is under the
direction of a coach who is both knowledgeable about the sport and concerned
about the youngster’s well-being. You can put their worries to rest by holding a
preseason parent-orientation meeting in which you describe your background and
your approach to coaching.
Preseason Meeting Outline
1. Outline the paperwork that is needed:
• Copy of the player’s birth certificate
• Completed player’s application and payment record
• Report card from the previous year
• Informed consent form (see page 248 of the appendix)
2. Go over the inherent risks of basketball and other safety issues.
3. Inform parents of the date and time that uniforms and equipment will be
handed out.
4. Review the season practice schedule, including the date, location, and time
of each practice.
5. Go over the proper gear and attire that should be worn at each practice
session.
6. Discuss nutrition, hydration, and rest for players.
7. Explain the goals for the team.
8. Cover methods of communication: e-mail list, emergency phone numbers,
interactive website, and so on.
9. Discuss ways that parents can help with the team.
10. Discuss standards of conduct for coaches, players, and parents.
11. Provide time for questions and answers.
If parents contact you with comments or concerns during the season, you should
listen to them closely and try to offer positive responses or solutions. If you need
to communicate with parents, the best plan is to catch them after a practice, give
them a phone call, or send a note through e-mail or the U.S. mail. Messages sent
to parents through young players are too often lost, misinterpreted, or forgotten.
Remember, it is better to communicate with parents too much rather than too little.

16
Preparations 17

Following is more detailed information about season plans for each particular age
group—ages 5 and 6, 7 and 8, 9 and 10, 11 and 12, and 13 and 14.

COACHING TIP While developing your season plan, keep in mind that you
will want to incorporate gamelike activities into your practices. These activi-
ties focus on replicating the game environment. Using gamelike activities
better develops the players both physically and mentally to the demands
of the game.

Season Plan for Ages 5 and 6


The players in this age group will be new to playing basketball, and you will be
required to thoroughly explain and demonstrate basketball terms to your players. The
recommended ball-to-player ratio is 1:1, so you should plan for individual activities
in your practices. You must also plan to take time to review skills learned in previous
practices. For the 5- and 6-year age group, the following concepts and skills should
be covered during the season:
• Psychology. Sharing, fair play, parental involvement, “how to play,” emotional
management
• Fitness. Balance, running, jumping, warm-up (introduce the idea of how to
warm up), movement education
• Technical skills. Moving with and without the ball, footwork, dribbling, shoot-
ing, passing
• Tactical skills. Which basket to shoot at

Season Plan for Ages 7 and 8


Most of the players in this age group have had exposure to basketball, but some may
still be newer to the sport. The season plan for this age group builds on the season plan
for ages 5 and 6 as players refine fundamental skills. The recommended ball-to-player
ratio is 1:5, so you can plan for individual, pairs, and both small- and larger-group
activities. For the 7- and 8-year age group, the following concepts and skills should
be covered during the season:
• Psychology. Teamwork, confidence, desire, mental rehearsal, intrinsic motiva-
tion, handling distress, how to learn from each game, good sporting behavior,
parental involvement, emotional management
• Fitness. Speed, strength, aerobic exercise
• Technical skills. Passing (chest, bounce, overhead, and one-handed push
passes), dribbling (speed, control, crossover, and backup dribbles), shooting
(layups, set and jump shots, and free throws), offensive and defensive footwork
(slides, pivots, jump stops, and cuts)
18 Coaching Youth Basketball

• Tactical skills. Playing on and off the ball, passing around defensive players,
fast break (two-on-one, three-on-two, and four-on-three drills; filling lanes;
and outletting the ball), communication, halftime analysis, offensive sets and
specific plays, defensive principles including man-to-man and zone defense

Season Plan for Ages 9 and 10


The season plan for this age group is similar to the season plan for ages 7 and 8 as
players continue to refine fundamental skills. The recommended ball-to-player ratio
is again 1:5, so you can plan for individual, pair, and both small- and larger-group
activities. For the 9- and 10-year age group, the same concepts and skills covered with
ages 7 and 8 above should be covered during the season.

Season Plan for Ages 11 and 12


At this stage, players are refining the skills they have learned from past years. This
season plan builds on the plans for previous age groups and adds a few new skills.
Many of the skills are the same as those presented in younger age groups, but in the
11- and 12-year age group, emphasis will be placed on different aspects of the game.
For the 11- and 12-year age group, the following concepts and skills should be covered
during the season:
• Psychology. Teamwork, confidence, desire, mental rehearsal, intrinsic motiva-
tion, handling distress, how to learn from each game, good sporting behavior,
parental involvement, emotional management
• Fitness. Speed, strength, aerobic exercise
• Technical skills. Passing (overhead passes and passing off the dribble), shooting
(set shots, power shots, and jump shots off the pass and dribble), post moves,
defensive slides
• Tactical skills. Set plays for man-to-man and zone offenses, full-court defense
for man-to-man and zone, fast break (lanes and secondary break), full-court
press break on offense, inbounds plays, passing around the defense, jump ball
situations

Season Plan for Ages 13 and 14


As in the previous age group, at this stage, players are refining the skills they have learned
from past years. The skills are the same as those presented in younger age groups, but
like the 11- and 12-year age group, emphasis in the 13- and 14-year age group will be
placed on different aspects of the game. For the 13- and 14-year age group, the same
concepts and skills covered with ages 11 and 12 above should be covered during the
season.
Preparations 19

Practice Planning
Coaches rarely believe they have enough time to practice everything they want to
cover. To help organize your thoughts and help you stay on track toward your practice
objectives, you should create practice plans. These plans help you better visualize and
prepare so that you can run your practices effectively.
First and foremost, your practice plans should be age appropriate for the age group
you are coaching. The plans should incorporate all of the skills and concepts presented
in the particular age group’s season plan and should include activities that move from
simple to more complex.
The practice plans for ages 5 and 6 should focus mostly on individual skill develop-
ment. Games (such as those where players play 2v2 and 3v3) should be incorporated
to help develop these skills.
The practice plans for the 7- and 8-year age group will be much the same as in
the 5- and 6-year age group. Practice plans will still focus mostly on individual skill
development, though more advanced skills relating to team offense and defense will
be introduced throughout the season.
The practice plans for ages 9 and 10 will be more advanced while still focusing on
individual skill development. The advanced skills introduced at this level will focus
on the basics of team offense and defense, as well as on team skills such as fast break
transition and coordinated screens and cuts on offense.
The practice plans for ages 11 and 12 will begin to shift focus from individual
skill development to further developing team offenses and defenses. Most drills will
involve working on multiple skills at one time. The advanced skills introduced at this
level will focus on additional aspects of team offense and defense, the fast break, and
out-of-bounds plays.
The practice plans for the 13- and 14-year age group will continue to focus on the
development of team offenses and defenses. In addition to working on advanced
skills related to team offense and defense, the fast break, and out-of-bounds plays,
this age group should focus on the skills that the players will need for their positions,
such as post and perimeter play.
For sample practice plans for each age group, refer to part III.

Facilities and Equipment


Be sure to regularly examine the court on which your players practice and play.
Remove hazards, report conditions you cannot remedy, and request maintenance
as necessary. If unsafe conditions exist, you should either make adaptations to pre-
vent risk to your players’ safety or stop the practice or game until safe conditions
have been restored. You can also prevent injuries by checking the quality and fit
of uniforms, practice attire, and any protective equipment used by your players.
Refer to the Facilities and Equipment Checklist in the appendix (page 247) to help
guide you in verifying that facilities and equipment are safe.
20 Coaching Youth Basketball

First Response
No matter how good your prevention program and planning are, injuries most likely
will occur. When injury does strike, chances are you will be the one in charge. The
severity and nature of the injury will determine how actively involved you’ll be in
treating it. But regardless of how seriously a player is hurt, it is your responsibility to
know what steps to take. Therefore, you must be prepared to take appropriate action
and provide basic emergency care when an injury occurs.

Being Prepared
Being prepared to provide basic emergency care involves many things, including being
trained in cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) and first aid, having a first aid kit on
hand, and having an emergency plan.
CPR and First Aid Training
We recommend that all coaches receive CPR and first aid training from a nationally
recognized organization such as the National Safety Council, the American Heart Asso-
ciation, the American Red Cross, or the American Sport Education Program (ASEP).
You should be certified based on a practical test and a written test of knowledge.
Training in CPR should include obstructed airway procedures and basic life support
for both children and adults.
Emergency Plan
An emergency plan is the final tool in being prepared to take appropriate action for
severe or serious injuries. The plan calls for three steps:
1. Evaluate the injured player. Use your CPR and first aid training to guide you.
Be sure to keep these certifications up to date. Practice your skills frequently to keep
them fresh and ready to use if and when you need them.
2. Call the appropriate medical personnel. If possible, delegate the responsibil-
ity of seeking medical help to another calm and responsible adult who attends all
practices and games. Write out a list of emergency phone numbers and keep it with
you at practices and games. Include the following phone numbers:
• Rescue unit
• Hospital
• Physician
• Police
• Fire department
Take each player’s emergency information to every practice and game (see the Emer-
gency Information Card in the appendix on page 250). This information includes
the person to contact in case of an emergency, what types of medications the player
is using, what types of drugs the player is allergic to, and so on.
Give an emergency response card (see the Emergency Response Card in the appen-
dix on page 251) to the contact person calling for emergency assistance. Having
Preparations 21

First Aid Kit


A well-stocked first aid kit should include the following:
• Antibacterial soap or wipes • Oral thermometer (to deter-
• Arm sling mine if a player has a fever
caused by illness)
• Athletic tape (one and a half
inches wide) • Penlight
• Bandage scissors • Petroleum jelly
• Bandage strips (assorted sizes) • Plastic bags for crushed ice
• Blood spill kit • Prewrap (underwrap for tape)
• Cell phone • Rescue breathing or CPR face
mask
• Contact lens case
• Safety glasses (for assistance
• Cotton swabs
in first aid)
• Elastic wraps (three inches, four
• Safety pins
inches, and six inches)
• Saline solution for eyes
• Emergency blanket
• Sterile gauze pads (three-inch
• Examination gloves (latex free)
and four-inch squares; prefer-
• Eye patch ably nonstick)
• Foam rubber (one-eighth inch, • Sterile gauze rolls
one-fourth inch, and one-half
• Sunscreen (sun protection
inch)
factor, or SPF, of 30 or greater)
• Insect sting kit
• Tape adherent
• List of emergency phone and tape remover
numbers
• Tongue depressors
• Mirror
• Tooth saver kit
• Moleskin
• Triangular bandages
• Nail clippers
• Tweezers

Adapted, by permission, from M. Flegel, 2008, Sport first aid, 4th ed. (Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics), 20.

this information ready should help the contact person remain calm. You must also
complete an injury report form (see page 249 in the appendix) and keep it on file
for any injury that occurs.
3. Provide first aid. If medical personnel are not on hand at the time of the injury,
you should provide first aid care to the extent of your qualifications. Again, although
your CPR and first aid training will guide you, you must remember the following:
• Do not move the injured player if the injury is to the head, neck, or back; if
a large joint (ankle, knee, elbow, or shoulder) is dislocated; or if the pelvis,
a rib, or an arm or leg is fractured.
22 Coaching Youth Basketball

• Calm the injured player and keep others away from her as much as possible.
• Evaluate whether the player’s breathing has stopped or is irregular, and if
necessary, clear the airway with your fingers.
• Administer CPR as directed in the CPR certification course recommended
by your school, league, or state association.
• Remain with the player until medical personnel arrive.

Emergency Steps
You must have a clear, well-rehearsed emergency action plan. You want to be sure
you are prepared in case of an emergency because every second counts. Your
emergency plan should follow this sequence:
1. Check the player’s level of consciousness.
2. Send a contact person to call the appropriate medical personnel and to call
the player’s parents.
3. Send someone to wait for the rescue team and direct them to the injured
player.
4. Assess the injury.
5. Administer first aid.
6. Assist emergency medical personnel in preparing the player for transporta-
tion to a medical facility.
7. Appoint someone to go with the player if the parents are not available. This
person should be responsible, calm, and familiar with the player. Assistant
coaches or parents are best for this job.
8. Complete an injury report form while the incident is fresh in your mind (see
page 249 in the appendix).

Taking Appropriate Action


Proper CPR and first aid training, a well-stocked first aid kit, and an emergency plan
help prepare you to take appropriate action when an injury occurs. In the previous
section, we mentioned the importance of providing first aid to the extent of your
qualifications. Don’t “play doctor” with injuries; sort out minor injuries that you can
treat from those that need medical attention. Now let’s look at taking the appropriate
action for minor injuries and more serious injuries.
Minor Injuries
Although no injury seems minor to the person experiencing it, most injuries are nei-
ther life threatening nor severe enough to restrict participation. When these injuries
occur, you can take an active role in their initial treatment.
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

Preparations 23

Scrapes and Cuts When one of your players has an open wound, the first thing
you should do is put on a pair of disposable latex-free examination gloves or some
other effective blood barrier. Then follow these four steps:
1. Stop the bleeding by applying direct pressure with a clean dressing to the
wound and elevating the injured area if possible. The player may be able to
apply this pressure while you put on your gloves. Do not remove the dressing
if it becomes soaked with blood. Instead, place an additional dressing on top
of the one already in place. If bleeding continues, keep elevating the injured
area above the heart and maintain pressure.
2. Cleanse the wound thoroughly once the bleeding is controlled. A good rinsing
with a forceful stream of water, and perhaps light scrubbing with soap, will
help prevent infection.
3. Protect the wound with sterile gauze or a bandage strip. If the player continues
to participate, apply protective padding over the injured area.
4. Remove and dispose of gloves carefully to prevent you or anyone else from
coming into contact with blood.
For bloody noses not associated with serious facial injury, have the player sit and lean
slightly forward. Then pinch the player’s nostrils shut. If the bleeding continues after
several minutes, or if the player has a history of nosebleeds, seek medical assistance.

COACHING TIP You shouldn’t let a fear of acquired immune deficiency


syndrome (AIDS) and other communicable diseases stop you from helping a
player. You are only at risk if you allow contaminated blood to come in contact
with an open wound on your body, so the examination gloves that you wear
will protect you from AIDS if one of your players carries this disease. Check
with your sport director, your league, or the Centers for Disease Control
and Prevention (CDC) for more information about protecting yourself and
your participants from AIDS.
Strains and Sprains The physical demands of playing basketball often result in
injury to the muscles or tendons (strains) or to the ligaments (sprains). When your
players suffer minor strains or sprains, you should immediately apply the PRICE
method of injury care:
P Protect the player and the injured body part from further danger or trauma.
R Rest the injured area to avoid further damage and foster healing.
I Ice the area to reduce swelling and pain.
C Compress the area by securing an ice bag in place with an elastic wrap.
E Elevate the injury above heart level to keep blood from pooling in the area.

Bumps and Bruises Inevitably, basketball players make contact with each other and
with the ground. If the force applied to a body part at impact is great enough, a bump

www.Ebook777.com
24 Coaching Youth Basketball

or bruise will result. Many players continue playing with such sore spots, but if the
bump or bruise is large and painful, you should take appropriate action. Again, use
the PRICE method for injury care and monitor the injury. If swelling, discoloration,
and pain have lessened, the player may resume participation with protective padding;
if not, the player should be examined by a physician.
Serious Injuries
Head, neck, and back injuries; fractures; and injuries that cause a player to lose con-
sciousness are among a class of injuries that you cannot and should not try to treat
yourself. In these cases, you should follow the emergency plan outlined on pages 20
to 22.
If you suspect that a player has received a blow to the head, no matter how mild
the symptoms, you should view it as a serious injury. If the player has only mild
symptoms, such as a headache, call the parents and have them take the player to a
doctor immediately. You should alert emergency medical services (EMS) immediately
if the player has lost consciousness or has impaired memory, dizziness, ringing in
the ears, blood or fluid draining from the nose or ears, or blurry vision. For more
information, see the Heads Up: Concussion in Youth Sports fact sheet that follows
(this fact sheet is provided by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention; www.
cdc.gov). If you suspect that a player has a spine injury, joint dislocation, or bone
fracture, do not remove any of the player’s equipment unless you have to do so to
provide lifesaving CPR.

Heads Up: Concussion in Youth Sports

What Is a Concussion?
A concussion is a brain injury. Concussions are caused by a bump or blow to the head.
Even a “ding,” “getting your bell rung,” or what seems to be a mild bump or blow to
the head can be serious.
You can’t see a concussion. Signs and symptoms of concussion can show up right
after the injury or may not appear or be noticed until days or weeks after the injury. If
a player reports any symptoms of concussion, or if you notice the symptoms yourself,
seek medical attention right away.

What Are the Signs and Symptoms of a Concussion?


SIGNS OBSERVED BY COACHES, PARENTS, OR GUARDIANS
If a player has experienced a bump or blow to the head during a game or practice, look
for any of the following signs and symptoms of a concussion:
• Appears dazed or stunned
• Is confused about assignment or position
• Forgets an instruction
• Is unsure of game, score, or opponent
• Moves clumsily
• Answers questions slowly
• Loses consciousness (even briefly)
• Shows behavior or personality changes
• Can’t recall events before hit or fall
• Can’t recall events after hit or fall
SYMPTOMS REPORTED BY ATHLETE
• Headache or “pressure” in head
• Nausea or vomiting
• Balance problems or dizziness
• Double or blurry vision
• Sensitivity to light
• Sensitivity to noise
• Feeling sluggish, hazy, foggy, or groggy
• Concentration or memory problems
• Confusion
• Does not “feel right”

How Can You Help Players Prevent a Concussion?


Every sport is different, but all coaches can take steps to help protect their players from
concussion.
• Ensure that the players follow their coach’s rules for safety and the rules of the
sport.
• Encourage players to practice good sporting behavior at all times.
• Make sure the players wear the right protective equipment for their activity.
Protective equipment should fit properly, be well maintained, and be worn con-
sistently and correctly.
• Learn the signs and symptoms of a concussion.

What Should You Do if You Think a Player Has a Concussion?


1. Seek medical attention right away. A health care professional will be able to
decide how serious the concussion is and when it is safe for the player to return
to sports.
2. Keep the player out of play. Concussions take time to heal. Don’t let the player
return to play until a health care professional says it’s OK. Athletes who return to
play too soon—while the brain is still healing—risk a greater chance of having
a second concussion. Repeat concussions can be very serious. They can cause
permanent brain damage, affecting the person for a lifetime.
3. Tell other coaches about any recent concussion. All coaches should know if a
player has had a recent concussion in any sport. Other coaches might not know
about a concussion that the player suffered in another sport or activity unless you
tell them.

Adapted from Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 2007, Heads up: Concussion in youth sports: A fact sheet for parents.
[Online]. Available: www.cdc.gov/concussion/pdf/parents_Eng.pdf [February 3, 2012].

25
26 Coaching Youth Basketball

In the following sections, we examine more closely your role in preventing heat
cramps, heat exhaustion, and heatstroke. Additionally, please refer to table 2.1 for
an illustrative example of the signs and symptoms associated with heat exhaustion
and heatstroke.
Heat Cramps Tough practices combined with heat stress and substantial fluid
loss from sweating can provoke muscle cramps commonly known as heat cramps.
Cramping is most common during the early part of the season when the weather
is the hottest and the players may be the least adapted to heat. The cramp, a severe
tightening of the muscle, can drop players and prevent continued play. Dehydration,
electrolyte loss, and fatigue are the contributing factors. The immediate treatment is
to have the player cool off and slowly stretch the contracted muscle. The player may
return to play later that same day or the next day provided the cramp doesn’t cause
a muscle strain.
Heat Exhaustion Heat exhaustion is a shocklike condition caused by dehydration
and electrolyte depletion. Symptoms include headache, nausea, dizziness, chills,
fatigue, and extreme thirst. Profuse sweating is a key sign of heat exhaustion. Other
signs include pale, cool, and clammy skin; rapid, weak pulse; loss of coordination;
and dilated pupils.
A player suffering from heat exhaustion should rest in a cool, shaded area; drink
cool fluids, particularly those containing electrolytes; and apply ice to the neck, back,
or abdomen to help cool the body. If you believe a player has heat exhaustion, seek
medical attention. Under no conditions should the player return to activity that day or
before he regains all the weight lost through sweat. If the player has to see a physician,
the player shouldn’t return to the team until he has a written release from the physician.
Heatstroke Heatstroke is a life-threatening condition in which the body stops
sweating and body temperature rises dangerously high. It occurs when dehydration
causes a malfunction in the body’s temperature control center in the brain. Symptoms
include the feeling of being extremely hot, nausea, confusion, irritability, and fatigue.
Signs include hot, dry, and flushed or red skin (this is a key sign); lack of sweat; rapid
pulse; rapid breathing; constricted pupils; vomiting; diarrhea; and possibly seizures,
unconsciousness, or respiratory or cardiac arrest.

TABLE 2.1 Signs and Symptoms of Heat Exhaustion and Heatstroke


Heat exhaustion Heatstroke
Dizziness Dizziness
Headache Headache
Fatigue Disoriented, combative, or unconscious
Dehydration Dehydration
Profuse sweating Hot and wet or dry skin
Mildly increased body temperature Markedly increased body temperature
Nausea or vomiting Nausea or vomiting
Diarrhea Diarrhea
Rapid, weak pulse
Muscle cramps
Preparations 27

If you suspect that a player is suffering from heatstroke, send for emergency medi-
cal assistance immediately and cool the player as quickly as possible. Remove excess
clothing and equipment from the player, and lower her body temperature by using
cool, wet towels; by pouring cool water over her; or by placing her in a cold bath.
Apply ice packs to the armpits, neck, back, abdomen, and between the legs. If the
player is conscious, give her cool fluids to drink. If the player is unconscious, place
the player on her side to allow fluids and vomit to drain from the mouth. A player
who has suffered heatstroke may not return to the team until she has a written release
from a physician.

Knowledge of Rules
The game is governed by a thick rule book. This introduction to the basic rules of
basketball won’t cover every rule of the game but instead will give you what you need
to work with players who are 5 to 14 years old. Here, we cover specifics about some
of the basics of the game, such as the number of players, ball and court size, and
game length, depending on your team’s age group. We also describe specifics such
as equipment, player positions, scoring, fouls, and how to start and restart games.

How the Game Is Played


Basketball is a fast-paced game where the objective is to put the ball into the basket.
Although the concept is simple, specific offensive and defensive aspects of the game
are executed differently based on the level of play and the game situation. Addition-
ally, the court that the game is played on may vary depending on the age level of your
players and the facility where the game is played. Figure 2.1 shows the court markings
for a standard basketball court.

Sideline
Baseline

Three-point line Three-point line

Blocks Top of the Top of the Blocks


key key
Center
circle
Basket Basket

Free-throw Free-throw
Free-throw Free-throw
line line
lane/key lane/key
Baseline

Midcourt
line

Sideline

FIGURE 2.1 Standard basketball court markings.


E5585/ASEP/fig 2.1/429453/pulled/R3-alw
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

28 Coaching Youth Basketball

Age Modifications for Basketball


Before we begin, let’s consider some of the modifications that can be made to
accommodate different age groups. Things such as the size of the court, the size of
the ball, the number of players on the court, and the duration of the game can be
adjusted for the various age groups to help accommodate players’ development
and skill levels. Suggested adjustments are as follows:

5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 11 and 12 13 and 14


years years years years years
Players 5 5 5 5 5
on team
Players 5v5 5v5 5v5 5v5 5v5
on court
Ball size Junior Women’s Women’s Regulation Regulation
(#5) (#6) (#6) (#7, or #6 in (#7, or #6 in
some states) some states)
Court size Short Short Short Full Full
court court court court court
Free-throw 9 ft 9 ft 9 ft 12 to 15 ft 12 to 15 ft
distance
Game length 24 min 24 min 24 min 32 min 32 min
Time-outs 4 4 4 4 4
Basket 7 ft 8 ft 8 ft 9 to 10 ft 9 to 10 ft
height

Several areas of the court shown in figure 2.1 on page 27 are referred to with special
basketball terminology. Here are a few definitions:
• Frontcourt. Refers to the half of the court where your team’s offensive basket
is located.
• Backcourt. Includes the midcourt line and the half of the court where your
opponent’s basket is located.
• Blocks. Square markings 6 feet from the baseline on each side of the lane.
• Perimeter. The area outside the three-second lane area.
• Three-point line. A semicircle that is 19 feet, 9 inches from the basket at all
points. Shots that are made from behind this line count for three points instead
of two.
• Free-throw lane or key. The area that extends from the baseline under the
basket to the free-throw line; it’s also called the three-second lane.
• Top of the key. The semicircle that extends beyond the free-throw line.

www.Ebook777.com
Preparations 29

Player Equipment
Basketball requires very little player equipment. Players should wear basketball shoes
so they have proper traction on the court. They should wear clothing such as athletic
shorts and tank tops or loose-fitting shirts so they have the freedom of movement
needed to run, jump, and shoot. Players may choose to wear safety glasses or goggles
to protect their eyes from injury. Also, players who have conditions affecting the knees
or elbows may want to wear soft pads to protect them. Players may not wear jewelry
during games.
You must examine the condition of each item you distribute to players. Also make
sure that the pieces of equipment they furnish themselves meet acceptable standards.

COACHING TIP You should ensure that each player on your team is out-
fitted properly and correctly. Early in the season, before games begin, take
time out of practice to demonstrate how uniforms and equipment should
be handled and worn.

Player Positions
Young players should be given a chance to play a variety of positions, on both offense
and defense. By playing different positions, they’ll have a better all-around playing
experience and may stay more interested in the sport. Furthermore, they’ll gain a better
understanding of the many technical and tactical skills used in the game. This will also
help them appreciate the efforts of their teammates who play positions they find difficult.

COACHING TIP For younger players, especially those who are 5 to 8 years
old, you may want to avoid labeling your players by positions. These players
should be allowed to experiment with all positions.

Player positions in basketball are typically given a number (1 through 5) for each
player on the court. Following are descriptions of these positions.
• Guards. A basketball team usually has two guards in the game at all times.
The guards play farthest from the basket, on the perimeter. The point guard (the 1
position) is played by the team’s best dribbler and passer. The off-guard (the 2 posi-
tion) is often played by the best long-range shooter and second-best dribbler. Guards
are usually the best ball handlers and outside shooters on the team. They tend to be
shorter and quicker than the other players and have good dribbling and passing skills.
• Forwards. A team usually plays with two forwards in its lineup. Forwards are
typically taller than guards, and they play closer to the basket. The smaller forward (the
3 position) is also referred to as the wing, and this position is often filled by the most
versatile and athletic member of the team. This forward must be able to play in the
lane and on the perimeter on offense, and on defense, he must be able to guard small
and quick or big and strong opponents. The other forward position (the 4 position)
is filled by a bigger player; this forward should be able to shoot the ball accurately
from within 12 feet of the basket and rebound the ball when shots are missed. This
is a good spot to assign to one of your bigger players and better rebounders—one
who can also shoot the ball from anywhere in the lane area.
30 Coaching Youth Basketball

• Center. Most basketball teams designate one player on the court as their center.
The center (the 5 position, which is also called the post position) is frequently the
tallest or biggest player on the team. That extra size is helpful in maneuvering for shots
or rebounds around the basket. A tall center can also make it difficult for opposing
teams to shoot near the basket. A center should have “soft” hands to catch the passes
thrown into the lane area by guards and forwards.

Rules of Play
Basketball rules are designed to make the game run smoothly and safely and to prevent
either team from gaining an unfair advantage. Throw out the rules and a basketball
game can quickly turn chaotic. Following is an overview of some of the basic rules
in basketball.
Starts and Restarts
In regulation play, a jump ball at center court is used to start games and overtime
periods, which are played when teams are tied at the end of regulation time. During
jump balls, the official tosses up the ball between two players, usually each team’s
center or best leaper. Each player attempts to tip the ball to a teammate (who must
be outside of the center circle) to gain possession of the ball. Another jump ball situ-
ation is simultaneous possession of the ball by players from opposing teams. In this
case, teams alternate possession; the team that did not win the first jump ball takes
the ball out of bounds in the next jump ball situation.
Play stops during intermissions and time-outs, but also when the ball goes out
of bounds and when an official calls a violation or a foul (as discussed later in this
chapter). The clock restarts when the ball is touched following an inbounds pass or
a missed free throw.
Scoring
In regulation play, teams are awarded two points for every shot made from inside
the three-point line, and they are given three points for shots made from beyond the
three-point stripe. A successful free throw is worth one point. (Players may not enter
the lane until the free throw has hit the rim. If the free throw doesn’t hit the rim, the
ball is awarded to the opposing team out of bounds.) The team that scores the most
points over the course of the game is the winner.
Fouls
Basketball is a contact sport, with players in close proximity and in constant motion.
The rules of the game discourage rough play or tactics that allow a team to gain an
advantage through brute force. Therefore, fouls are called when officials see illegal
physical contact between two or more players based on these principles:
• The first player to establish position (to become stationary or set) on the court
has priority rights to that position.
• A body part cannot be extended into the path of an opponent.
Preparations 31

• The player who moves into the path of an opponent—especially an airborne


opponent—when contact occurs is responsible for the contact.
• All players have the right to the space extending straight up from their feet on
the floor. This is called the principle of verticality.
A team that fouls too much pays for it, because fouls carry with them increasingly
severe penalties. A player who has five fouls must sit out for the remainder of the
game. In regulation play, a team that has more than a specified number of fouls in a
quarter or half gives the opposing team a bonus situation: The member of the team
who was fouled is allowed to shoot free throws. If the foul is a nonshooting—or per-
sonal—foul, the player shoots one free throw and, if she makes it, shoots a second
one (this is called one-and-one). Table 2.2 lists the most common personal fouls
and their penalties.
If the foul is a shooting foul—in other words, a foul in which a defender makes
contact with a player who is shooting the basketball—the player shoots two free throws.

TABLE 2.2 Personal Fouls and Penalties


Type of foul Description of foul Penalty
Blocking Physically impeding the progress of Foul
another player who is still moving.
Charging Running into or pushing a defender Foul
who is stationary.
Hand-checking Using the hands to check the progress Foul
of an offensive player when that player
is in front of the defender who is using
the hands.
Holding Restricting the movement of an oppo- Foul
nent.
Illegal screen A form of blocking in which the player Don’t call except for
setting the screen is still moving when the older age groups
the defender makes contact. (11 and 12, 13 and 14)
Over-the-back Infringing on the vertical plane of, and Don’t call except for
making contact with, a player who is in the older age groups
position and attempting to rebound. (11 and 12, 13 and 14)
Pushing Impeding the progress or otherwise Foul
moving a player by pushing or shoving.
Reaching in Extending an arm and making contact Foul
with a ball handler in an attempt to
steal the ball.
Tripping Extending a leg or foot and causing an Foul
opponent to lose balance or fall.
32 Coaching Youth Basketball

Emphasize to your players the importance of keeping their hands off the shooter,
establishing position, using the feet to maintain position (rather than reaching in
with the hands), and not attempting to rebound over an opponent who has estab-
lished position.
Other types of fouls exist, such as a technical foul; this is a foul that does not involve
contact with the opponent while the ball is alive (e.g., use of profanity, delay of game,
unsporting conduct). Intentional and flagrant fouls relate to extreme behaviors and
should not (we hope) come up with your players. If they do, players who are guilty
of unsporting conduct during a game are usually ejected and assessed a technical
foul, and they should be counseled by the coach. In such a case, the opposing team
is awarded two free throws and possession of the ball.
Violations
Violations are mistakes made by the offensive team that will result in the ball being
given to the defensive team. Turnovers—the loss of the ball to the defense—caused
by violations will be one of your continuing frustrations as a basketball coach. Vio-
lations are categorized as either ballhandling or clock violations. Table 2.3 shows
our recommendations for modifying the rules for these violations based on the age
group of your team.

TABLE 2.3 Rule Modifications for Violations


Age group
5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 11 and 13 and
Violation Description years years years 12 years 14 years
Ballhandling violations
Double Resuming Allow one Allow one Allow one Call. Call.
dribble dribbling violation violation violation
after having per player per player per player
stopped posses- posses- posses-
(when no sion; sion; sion;
defender gradually gradually gradually
interrupts the tighten tighten tighten
player’s pos- up this up this up this
session of allow- allow- allow-
the ball) or ance. ance. ance.
dribbling with
both hands
at the same
time.
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

Age group
5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 11 and 13 and
Violation Description years years years 12 years 14 years
Ballhandling violations (continued)
Over-and- The return Don’t Don’t Don’t Don’t Don’t
back of the ball to call. call. call. call. call.
the backcourt
when last
touched by
an offensive
player in the
frontcourt.
Traveling Taking more Give an Give an Give an Call. Call.
than one extra step extra step extra step
step without for start- for start- for start-
dribbling; ing and ing and ing and
also called stopping; stopping; stopping;
carrying the gradually gradually gradually
ball or palm- tighten tighten tighten
ing the ball up this up this up this
when a player allow- allow- allow-
turns the ball ance. ance. ance.
a complete
rotation in the
hand between
dribbles.
Clock violations
Inbounds On any Don’t Don’t Give Call. Call.
inbounds play, call. call. warnings
the player early in the
throwing the season;
ball in has 5 call after
seconds to midsea-
release the son.
ball.
Lane An offensive Don’t Don’t Give Call. Call.
player cannot call. call. warnings
be in the lane early in the
(in the key) for season;
more than 3 call after
seconds at a midsea-
time. son.
(continued)

33

www.Ebook777.com
34 Coaching Youth Basketball

TABLE 2.3 Rule Modifications for Violations (continued)


Age group
5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 11 and 13 and
Violation Description years years years 12 years 14 years
Clock violations (continued)
Backcourt A team must Don’t Don’t Give Call. Call.
advance the call. call. warnings
ball into its early in the
frontcourt season;
within 10 call after
seconds after midsea-
gaining pos- son.
session in the
backcourt.
Shot clock The ball must Don’t Don’t Don’t Don’t Don’t
leave an offen- use. use. use. use. use.
sive player’s
hands before
the shot clock
expires. The
ball must sub-
sequently hit
the rim on that
shot or it will
be a violation.

Substitutions
A substitution is when a player who is out of the game takes the place of a player
who is on the playing floor. Players coming into the game must go to the scorer’s
table and give the scorekeeper their number and the number of the player they are
replacing so that this information can be recorded. The substitute must then wait at
the scorer’s table until the referee motions for him to enter the game. Any number of
players (ranging from one to five players) can be substituted at a time; substitutions
are allowed at any time during stopped-clock situations.
Time-Outs
When a time-out is called, play stops so that the coaches can visit with their team
off the playing floor. A time-out may be called by a player or a coach by giving the
proper signal to the official during any dead-ball situation or if your team has pos-
session of the ball. A time-out is designated as a 30-second time-out or a 1-minute
time-out by the coach of the team that called it. Each team is allowed five time-outs
(three 1-minute time-outs and two 30-second time-outs) per game; an extra 1-minute
time-out is allowed for each overtime.
Preparations 35

Officiating
Basketball rules are enforced by officials. In youth basketball, there are typically two
officials overseeing the game. Officials have many responsibilities during a game,
including effectively communicating their calls to other members of the staff (such
as the scorers and timers) and to the players, coaches, and spectators. Figure 2.2, a
through u, shows some common officiating signals.
If you have a concern about how a game is being officiated, you should address the
officials respectfully. Do so immediately if at any time you think that the officiating
jeopardizes the safety of your players.

a b c

d e f

(continued)

FIGURE 2.2 Officiating signals: (a) starting the clock, (b) stopping the clock for a jump
ball, (c) beckoning a sub in on a dead ball, (d) stopping the clock for a foul, (e) scoring one
point (two fingers for scoring two points), and (f) scoring three points.
g h i

j k l

m n o

FIGURE 2.2 (continued) Officiating signals: (g) blocking, (h) charging, (i) bonus situation,
(j) over-and-back or carrying the ball, (k) pushing, (l) illegal use of hands, (m) technical foul,
(n) three-second violation, and (o) designating out-of-bounds spot.

36
p q r

s t u

FIGURE 2.2 (continued) Officiating signals: (p) traveling, (q) holding, (r) kicking, (s) no
score, (t) illegal dribble, and (u) hand check.

37
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

3 Game Days

Games provide the opportunity for your players to show what they’ve
learned in practice. Just as your players’ focus shifts on game days from learning and
practicing to competing, your focus shifts from teaching skills to coaching players
as they perform those skills in games. Of course, the game is a teaching opportunity
as well, but the focus is on performing what has been learned, participating, and
having fun.
In the previous chapter, you learned how to prepare for your season and practices.
In this chapter, you will learn how to coach your players on game day. We provide
important coaching principles that will guide you before, during, and after the game.

Game Strategy
Some coaches burn the midnight oil as they devise a complex plan of attack. Team
tactics at this level, however, don’t need to be complex—especially for the younger
age groups. The focus should be on consistent execution, moving the ball on offense,
and playing good team defense. You should emphasize the importance of teamwork,
of every player fulfilling her role on offense and defense, and of every player knowing
her assignments. This should be done during each practice so the players know their
roles during the game well before the game starts. As you become more familiar with
your team’s tendencies and abilities, you can help them focus on specific tactics that
will help them play better.

38

www.Ebook777.com
Creating a Game Plan
Just as you need a practice plan for what you will cover at each practice, you also
need a game plan for game day. As a coach for youth basketball, your game plan
will vary depending on the age group you are working with. As you begin planning
and mapping out how your game days will progress, you should keep the following
age-related points in mind.

Ages 5 • Encourage players to try their best.


and 6 • Focus on helping players develop their individual skills for team
competition.
• Although the use of games is important, do not spend too much time
just playing games without time for proper skill instruction.
Ages 7 • Focus on helping players develop their individual skills as well as
and 8 more general team concepts, both offensive and defensive.
• Encourage players to evaluate their skills and to work on these skills
on their own time.
Ages 9 • The strengths and weaknesses of the opposition are of little concern
and 10 at this age; the focus should be on helping your team execute the
skills they have learned.
• Use simple team offenses that make it easy for your players to exe-
cute the techniques and skills learned in practice.
• Remind players of one offensive and one defensive aspect that they
have learned, and have them focus on these aspects for the game.
• Give players a starting lineup before the first game.
Ages 11 • Begin to use team drills that emphasize several skills at the same time.
and 12 • Start to use full-court drills that include passing and shooting so the
players use these skills in full-court work.
• Begin to implement some team strategy related to defenses and
offenses that can be played in games.
Ages 13 • Players should begin to focus on one or two of the opponent’s
and 14 strengths and weaknesses, and they should be able to take advantage
of this while the game is being played.
• Teams will sometimes adjust their play based on the opponent, but
the main focus is still the proper execution of the techniques and skills
learned in practice.
• Use more complex team offenses and defenses that will take advan-
tage of the opponent’s weaknesses.

39
40 Coaching Youth Basketball

COACHING TIP When developing your game plan, keep in mind that your
players need to understand what you expect of them both offensively and
defensively during the game. Be clear about this in the days leading up to
a game. Take time at the beginning or end of each practice to discuss these
expectations.

During the week before a game, you should inform players of the tactics that you
think will work and that you plan to use in the game. Pick out several offensive sets
and plays and the main defense that you want to use in the game. Try to practice these
at every practice, and make certain that every player understands the plays and that
the team can run them without error. Limiting the number of plays allows you to
repeat them during practice and instill in your players the confidence that they can
execute the plays that will be called during the game.
Depending on the age level, experience, and knowledge of your players, you may
want to let them help you determine the first offensive play or set and the defense
that you will call in the game. It is the coach’s role to help youngsters grow through
the sport experience. Allowing player input helps your players learn the game and
involves them at a planning level often reserved solely for the coach. It also gives
them a feeling of ownership. Rather than just carrying out orders for the coach, they’re
executing the plan of attack that they helped create. Youngsters who have a say in
how they approach a task often respond with more enthusiasm and motivation. This
technique also builds trust between the players and coach.

Pregame Warm-Ups
Players need to both physically and mentally prepare for a game once they arrive,
and physical preparation involves warming up. We suggest that players arrive 30 to
45 minutes before the game to warm up. You should arrive at the game site 45 to 60
minutes before the game so you can check the facility (see the Facilities and Equip-
ment Checklist in the appendix on page 247), check in with the site coordinator and
officials, and greet your players as they arrive to warm up. You will want to conduct
the pregame warm-up similar to practice warm-ups. Before game day, you should walk
the players through the steps for how they will enter and where they will line up on
the court for the warm-up. The warm-up should consist of a few brief games or drills
that focus on skill practice, stretching, and exercises or activities that involve a range
of motion, such as passing drills that get the players running while catching the ball.
You should refrain from delivering a long-winded pep talk (2 to 3 minutes is fine,
but do not go over 5 minutes), but you can help players mentally prepare for the
game by reminding them of the skills they’ve been working on in recent practices and
by focusing their attention on their strengths and what they’ve been doing well. Also
take time to remind players that they should work as a team, play hard and smart,
and have fun!
Game Days 41

COACHING TIP You should have a preset plan or routine that is used
before every game. This can help alleviate nerves and build confidence in
your players, especially those in younger age groups. A pregame routine will
also help players forget outside concerns and get into the frame of mind to
focus on the game.

Game Time
Although you won’t need to create a complex game strategy, as mentioned before, you
will need to make tactical decisions in several areas throughout a game. You’ll make
decisions about who starts the game and when to enter substitutes, about making slight
adjustments to your team’s tactics, and about dealing with players’ performance errors.

Lineup and Substitutions


When considering playing time, make sure that everyone on the team gets to play at
least half of each game. This should be your guiding principle as you consider start-
ing and substitution patterns. It is also nice if each player has a chance to start one
game during your season. Realize that some players may play better in a starting role
than when coming off the bench. We suggest you consider two options in substitut-
ing players:
1. Substituting individually. Replace one player with another. This offers you a
lot of latitude in deciding who goes in when, and it gives you the greatest combina-
tion of players throughout the game. Keeping track of playing time can be difficult,
but this task could be made easier by assigning it to an assistant or a parent.
You may want to try substituting players by time left in the quarter, especially when
working with younger age groups. For example, you can let a substitute know that
she will play the last four minutes of each quarter, or that she will replace a player at
the six-minute mark of the quarter. This will let the player know when she can expect
to get into the game and will help the player be more prepared for her playing time.
In addition, if a player plays so hard that she asks to be taken out of a game, you
should allow her to go back in when she is ready. This will let your players know that
they can play hard without worrying that another individual will sub in for them and
they will not get back in the game.
2. Substituting by quarters. The advantage of substituting players after each
quarter is that you can easily track playing time, and players know how long they will
be in before they might be replaced. When substituting by quarters, you should still
keep track of the actual number of minutes that each player is on the court.
42 Coaching Youth Basketball

Time-Outs and Intermissions


At the younger age levels (5 and 6, 7 and 8, or 9 and 10), you probably won’t adjust
your team tactics, or plays, too significantly during a game. Rather, you’ll focus on the
basic tactics, and during breaks in the game, you’ll emphasize the specific tactics your
team needs to work on. However, coaches of 11- to 14-year-olds might have reason
to make tactical adjustments to improve their team’s chances of performing well and
winning. As games progress, assess your opponents’ style of play and tactics, and
make adjustments that are appropriate—that is, those that your players are prepared
for. You may want to consider the following examples when adjusting team tactics:
• How does your opponent usually initiate their attack? Do they aim to get
around, over, or through your defense? This can help you make defensive
adjustments.
• Who are the strongest players on the opposing team? The weakest players? As
you identify strong players, you’ll want to assign more skilled players to defend
them.
• Are the opponent’s forwards fast and powerful? Do they come to the ball, or
do they try to run behind the defense and receive passes? Their mode of attack
should influence how you instruct your players to defend them.
• On defense, does your opponent play a high-pressure game, or do they retreat
once you’ve gained possession of the ball? Either type of defense could call for
a different strategy from you.
• Ask your players, “What does the player you are guarding do well?” Then ask,
“Do you think you can stop the player from doing that?” This will help players
adjust their game to what the opponent does best.
Knowing the answers to such questions can help you formulate an effective game
plan and make proper adjustments during a game. However, don’t stress tactics too
much during a game. Doing so can take the fun out of the game for the players. If you
don’t trust your memory, carry a pen and pad to note which team tactics and individual
skills need attention at the next practice. This is also a good job for your assistant.

Interaction With Opposing Coaches and Officials


You must respect the opponents and officials you encounter in your competitions.
Without them, there wouldn’t be a competition. Opponents provide opportunities
for your team to test itself, improve, and excel. Officials help provide a fair and safe
experience for players and, as appropriate, help them learn the rules of the game.
You and your team should show respect for opponents and officials by giving your
best efforts and being civil. Don’t allow your players to “trash talk” or taunt an oppo-
nent or an official. Such behavior is disrespectful to the spirit of the competition, and
you should immediately remove a player from a game if that player disobeys your
team rules in this area.
Remember, too, that officials at this level are quite often teenagers—in many cases
not much older than the players themselves—and the level of officiating should be
Game Days 43

Communicating With Parents


The groundwork for your communication with parents will have been laid in the
parent preseason meeting (page 16), where the parents learned the best ways to
support their kids’—and the whole team’s—efforts on the court. You should encour-
age parents to judge success based not just on the outcome of the game, but also
on how the kids are improving their performances.
If parents yell at the kids for mistakes made during the game, make disparaging
remarks about the officials or opponents, or shout instructions on which tactics to
use, you should ask them to refrain and to instead support team members through
their comments and actions. These standards of conduct should all be covered in
the parent preseason meeting.
When time permits, as parents gather before a game (and before the team
has entered), you can let them know in a general sense what the team has been
focusing on during the past week and what your goals are for the game. However,
your players must come first during this time, so focus on your players during the
pregame warm-up.
After a game, quickly come together as a coaching staff and decide what to say
to the team. Then, if the opportunity arises, you can informally assess with parents
how the team did based not on the outcome, but on meeting performance goals
and playing to the best of their abilities. Help parents see the game as a process,
not solely as a test that is pass or fail, or win or lose. Encourage parents to reinforce
that concept at home. Always remove yourself from parents who have a complaint
directly after a game. Give yourself and the parents 24 hours before you address
any issue.

commensurate to the level of play. In other words, don’t expect perfection from offi-
cials any more than you do from your own players. Especially at younger levels, the
officials won’t make every call, because to do so would stop the game too frequently.
You may find that officials at younger levels only call the most flagrant violations—
those directly affecting the outcome of the game. As long as the calls are being made
consistently on both sides and the violations are being addressed, most of your offi-
ciating concerns will be alleviated.
If you yell at or disagree with the officials constantly, you are giving your team an
excuse for not playing well or losing the game. Don’t give your players an excuse for
losing or playing poorly by blaming the officials.

Postgame Conduct
When the game is over, join your team in congratulating the coaches and players
of the opposing team, then be sure to thank the officials. Remember to check on
any injuries players sustained during the game, and instruct players on how to care
for them at home. Be prepared to speak with the officials about any problems that
44 Coaching Youth Basketball

occurred during the game. Then, hold a brief postgame meeting to ensure that your
players are on an even keel, whether they won or lost.
Your first concern after a game should be your players’ attitudes and mental well-
being. You don’t want them to be too high after a win or too low after a loss. This
is the time you can be most influential in keeping the outcome in perspective and
keeping the players on an even keel.

COACHING TIP To keep your players on an even keel after a game, you
may want to bring up the next opponent. This works extremely well after
a big win; the players are left thinking about the next game as opposed to
only the game they just played.

When celebrating a victory, make sure your team does so in a way that doesn’t show
disrespect for the opponents. It’s okay and appropriate to be happy and celebrate a
win, but don’t allow your players to taunt the opponents or boast about their victory.
If your team was defeated, your players will naturally be disappointed. But, if your
team has made a winning effort, let them know this. After a loss, help the players
keep their chins up and maintain a positive attitude that will carry over into the next
practice and game. Winning and losing are a part of life, not just a part of sport. If
players can handle both equally well, they’ll be successful in whatever they do.
After the game, gather your team in a designated area for a short postgame meeting.
Before this meeting, decide as a coaching staff what you will say and who will say it.
Be sure that the staff speaks with one voice following the game.
If your players have performed well in a game, you should be sure to compliment
and congratulate them. Tell them specifically what they did well, whether they won
or lost. This will reinforce their desire to repeat their good performances. Don’t use
this time after a game to criticize individual players for poor performances in front
of teammates or attempt to go over tactical problems and adjustments. You should
help players improve their skills, but do so at the next practice. Immediately after a
game, players won’t absorb much tactical information.
Finally, make sure your players have transportation home. Be the last one to leave
in order to ensure full supervision of your players.

Keeping a Proper Perspective


Winning games is the short-term goal of your basketball program. The long-term
goal is helping your players learn the techniques and tactics and rules of basketball,
how to become fit, and how to be good sports in basketball and in life. Your young
players are “winning” when they are becoming better human beings through their
participation in basketball. Keep that perspective in mind when you coach. You
have the privilege of setting the tone for how your team approaches the game.
Keep winning and all aspects of the competition in proper perspective, and your
young players will likely follow suit.
Part II
Teaching

45
46 Coaching Youth Basketball

Coaching basketball is about teaching kids how to play the game by


teaching them skills, fitness, and values. It’s also about “coaching” players before,
during, and after games. Teaching and coaching are closely related, but there are
important differences. In the following sections, we focus on principles of teaching,
especially on teaching technical and tactical skills. These principles apply to teaching
values and fitness concepts as well. Armed with these principles, you will be able to
design effective and efficient practices. Then you will be able to teach the skills and
plays necessary to be successful in basketball (which are outlined in chapters 4, 5,
7, and 8).

Teaching Basketball Skills


Many people believe that the only qualification needed for teaching a skill is to have
performed it. Although it’s helpful to have performed it, teaching it successfully
requires much more than that. And even if you haven’t performed the skill before,
you can still learn to teach successfully with the useful acronym IDEA:
I Introduce the skill.
D Demonstrate the skill.
E Explain the skill.
A Attend to players practicing the skill.

Introduce the Skill


Players, especially those who are young and inexperienced, need to know what skill
they are learning and why they are learning it. You should therefore follow these three
steps every time you introduce a skill to your players:
1. Get your players’ attention.
2. Name the skill.
3. Explain the importance of the skill.
Get Your Players’ Attention
Because youngsters are easily distracted, you should do something to get their atten-
tion. Some coaches use interesting news items or stories. Others use jokes. And still
others simply project enthusiasm to get their players to listen. Whatever method you
use, speak slightly above your normal volume and look your players in the eye when
you speak.
Also, position players so they can see and hear you. Arrange the players in two or
three evenly spaced rows, facing you. (Make sure they aren’t looking into the sun or
at a distracting activity.) Then ask whether all of them can see you before you begin
to speak.
Teaching 47

Name the Skill


More than one common name may exist for the skill you are introducing, but you
should decide as a staff before the start of the season which one you’ll use (and then
stick with it). This will help prevent confusion and enhance communication among
your players. When you introduce the new skill, call it by name several times so that
the players automatically correlate the name with the skill in later discussions.
Explain the Importance of the Skill
As Rainer Martens, the founder of the American Sport Education Program (ASEP),
has said, “The most difficult aspect of coaching is this: Coaches must learn to let
athletes learn. Sport skills should be taught so they have meaning to the child, not
just meaning to the coach.” Although the importance of a skill may be apparent to
you, your players may be less able to see how the skill will help them become better
basketball players. Offer them a reason for learning the skill, and describe how the
skill relates to more advanced skills.

Demonstrate the Skill


The demonstration step is the most important part of teaching sport skills to players
who may never have done anything closely resembling the skill. They need a picture,
not just words. They need to see how the skill is performed. If you are unable to per-
form the skill correctly, ask an assistant coach, one of your players, or someone more
skilled to perform the demonstration.

COACHING TIP You may want to write out in detail each skill you will
teach. This can clarify what you will say and how you will demonstrate and
teach each skill to your players.

These tips will help make your demonstrations more effective:


• Use correct form.
• Demonstrate the skill several times.
• Slow the action, if possible, during one or two performances so players can see
every movement involved in the skill.
• Perform the skill at different angles so your players can get a full perspective of it.
• Demonstrate the skill with both the right and left arms and legs.

Explain the Skill


Players learn more effectively when they’re given a brief explanation of the skill along
with the demonstration. You should use simple terms and, if possible, relate the skill
to previously learned skills. Ask your players whether they understand your descrip-
tion. A good technique is to ask the team to repeat your explanation. Ask questions
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

48 Coaching Youth Basketball

such as “What are you going to do first?” and “Then what?” If players look confused
or uncertain, you should repeat your explanation and demonstration. If possible,
use different words so your players get a chance to try to understand the skill from a
different perspective.
Complex skills are often better understood when they are explained in more
manageable parts. For instance, if you want to teach your players how to perform the
crossover dribble, you might take the following steps:
1. Show them a correct performance of the entire skill, and explain its function
in basketball.
2. Break down the skill and point out its component parts (such as controlling
the dribble at knee level, dribbling with the head up to see the rim, and pro-
tecting the ball with the body and the nondribbling hand) to your players.
3. Have players perform each of the component parts you have already taught
them.
4. After players have demonstrated their ability to perform the separate parts of
the skill in sequence, reexplain the entire skill.
5. Have players practice the skill in gamelike conditions.
Young players have short attention spans, and a long demonstration or explanation
of a skill may cause them to lose focus. Therefore, you should spend no more than a
few minutes altogether on the introduction, demonstration, and explanation phases.
Then involve the players in drills or games that call on them to perform the skill.

Attend to Players Practicing the Skill


If the skill you selected was within your players’ capabilities and you have done an
effective job of introducing, demonstrating, and explaining it, your players should be

How to Properly Run Your Drills


Before running a drill that teaches technique, you should do the following:
• Name the drill.
• Explain the skill or skills to be practiced.
• Position the players correctly.
• Explain what the drill will accomplish.
• State the command that will start the drill.
• Identify the signal that will end the drill, such as a whistle.
Once the drill has been introduced and repeated a few times in this manner, you
will find that merely calling out the name of the drill is sufficient; your players will
automatically line up in the proper position to run the drill and practice the skill.

www.Ebook777.com
Teaching 49

ready to attempt the skill. Some players, especially those in younger age groups, may
need to be physically guided through the movements during their first few attempts.
Walking unsure players through the skill in this way will help them gain confidence
to perform the skill on their own.
You should look at the entire skill and then break it down into components. For
example, when teaching the skill of shooting the basketball, you can use the acronym
“BEEF” to break down the skill into components that will help your players learn the
proper technique for shooting the ball:
B Balance (position the shooting foot slightly ahead of the other foot
for balance)
E Elbow (the elbow should be in a straight line with the shooting foot
and knee)
E Eyes (the eyes should be focused on the rim and never watch the ball
in flight)
F Follow-through (after the release, the thumb of the shooting hand
should be pointed down)
Your teaching duties, though, don’t end when all your players have demonstrated
that they understand how to perform a skill. In fact, your teaching role is just begin-
ning as you help your players improve their skills. A significant part of your teaching
consists of closely observing the hit-and-miss trial performances of your players. You
will shape players’ skills by detecting errors and correcting them using positive feed-
back. Keep in mind that your positive feedback will have a great influence on your
players’ motivation to practice and improve their performances.
Remember, too, that some players may need individual instruction. So set aside a
time before, during, or after practice to give individual help.

Helping Players Improve Skills


After you have successfully taught your players the fundamentals of a skill, your focus
will be on helping them improve the skill. Players learn skills and improve on them
at different rates, so don’t get frustrated if progress seems slow. Instead, help them
improve by shaping their skills and detecting and correcting errors.

Shaping Players’ Skills


One of your principal teaching duties is to reward positive effort or behavior—in
terms of successful skill execution—when you see it. A player makes a good pass in
practice, and you immediately say, “That’s the way to extend! Good follow-through!”
This, plus a smile and a thumbs-up gesture, go a long way toward reinforcing that
technique in that player. However, sometimes you may have a long dry spell before
you see correct techniques to reinforce. It’s difficult to reward players when they don’t
execute skills correctly. How can you shape their skills if this is the case?
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

50 Coaching Youth Basketball

Shaping skills takes practice on your players’ part and patience on yours. Expect
your players to make errors. Telling the player who made the great pass that she did
a good job doesn’t ensure that she’ll have the same success next time. Seeing incon-
sistency in your players’ technique can be frustrating. It’s even more challenging to
stay positive when your players repeatedly perform a skill incorrectly or have a lack of
enthusiasm for learning. It can certainly be frustrating to see players who seemingly
don’t heed your advice and continue to make the same mistakes.
Although it is normal to get frustrated sometimes when teaching skills, part of
successful coaching is controlling this frustration. Instead of getting upset, use these
six guidelines for shaping skills:
1. Think small initially. Reward the first signs of behavior that approximate what
you want. Then reward closer and closer approximations of the desired behavior. In
short, use your reward power to shape the behavior you seek.
2. Break skills into small steps. For instance, in learning to dribble, one of your
players does well in keeping the ball close to his body, but he’s bouncing the ball too
high and doesn’t effectively shield it from defenders. Reinforce the correct technique
of keeping the ball close, and teach him how to dribble at knee level. Once he masters
this, you can focus on getting him to shield the ball from defenders.
3. Develop one component of a skill at a time. Don’t try to shape two com-
ponents of a skill at once. For example, in rebounding, players must first block their
opponents out, then go for the ball. Players should focus first on one aspect (blocking
out by putting their back against their opponent’s chest and creating a wide base),
then on the other (putting their hands up and going for the ball). Players who have
problems mastering a skill often do so because they’re trying to improve two or more
components at once. You should help these players to isolate a single component.
4. Use reinforcement only occasionally, for the best examples. By focusing
only on the best examples, you will help players continue to improve once they’ve
mastered the basics. When the coach uses occasional reinforcement during practice,
this allows players to have more contact time with the ball rather than having to con-
stantly stop and listen to the coach. Basketball skills are best learned through a lot of
repetition, such as drills, and the coach needs to make the best use of team practice
time by allowing the players as much time with the ball as possible.

COACHING TIP For older age groups or players with advanced skills,
coaches can ask players to “self-coach.” With the proper guidance and a
positive team environment, young players can think about how they perform
a skill and how they might be able to perform it better. Self-coaching is best
done at practice, where a player can experiment with learning new skills.

5. Relax your standards. As players focus on mastering a new skill or attempt to


integrate it with other skills, their old, well-learned skills may temporarily degener-
ate, and you may need to relax your expectations. For example, a player has learned
how to shoot the ball and is now learning how to combine that skill with the dribble.

www.Ebook777.com
Teaching 51

While learning to combine the two skills and getting the timing down, the player’s
shooting may be poor. A similar degeneration of ball skills may occur during growth
spurts while the coordination of muscles, tendons, and ligaments catches up to the
growth of bones.
6. Go back to the basics. If, however, a well-learned skill degenerates for long,
you may need to restore it by going back to the basics. For example, you may need
to go back to the “BEEF” method of shooting technique to help restore the player’s
skill.

Detecting and Correcting Errors


Good coaches recognize that players make two types of errors: learning errors and
performance errors. Learning errors are ones that occur because players don’t know
how to perform a skill; that is, they have not yet developed the correct motor pattern
in the brain to perform a particular skill. Performance errors are made not because
players don’t know how to execute the skill, but because they have made a mistake
in executing what they do know. There is no easy way to know whether a player is
making learning or performance errors; part of the art of coaching is being able to
sort out which type of error each mistake is.
The process of helping your players correct errors begins with you observing and
evaluating their performances to determine if the mistakes are learning or performance
errors. You should carefully watch your players to see if they routinely make the errors
in both practice and game settings, or if the errors tend to occur only in game set-
tings. If the latter is the case, then your players are making performance errors. For
performance errors, you need to look for the reasons your players are not performing
as well as they know how; perhaps they are nervous, or maybe they get distracted by
the game setting. If the mistakes are learning errors, then you need to help them learn
the skill, which is the focus of this section.
When correcting learning errors, there is no substitute for knowledge of the skills.
The better you understand a skill—not only how it is performed correctly but also
what causes learning errors—the more helpful you will be in correcting your players’
mistakes.

COACHING TIP Correcting errors is part of what coaching is all about, but
don’t get caught up in correcting errors all the time. Give positive feedback
when a player makes small steps toward progress, but give players some
freedom to figure it out on their own.

One of the most common coaching mistakes is to provide inaccurate feedback and
advice on how to correct errors. Don’t rush into error correction; wrong feedback or
poor advice will hurt the learning process more than no feedback or advice at all. If
you are uncertain about the cause of the problem or how to correct it, you should
continue to observe and analyze until you are more sure. As a rule, you should see
the error repeated several times before attempting to correct it.
52 Coaching Youth Basketball

Correct One Error at a Time


Suppose Jill, one of your forwards, is having trouble with her shooting. She’s doing
some things well, but you notice that she’s extending her arm on too flat a trajectory,
resulting in too low an arc, and she’s not squaring up to face the basket on all of her
shots. What do you do?
First, decide which error to correct first, because players learn more effectively when
they attempt to correct one error at a time. Determine whether one error is causing
the other; if so, have the player correct that error first, because it may eliminate the
other error. In Jill’s case, however, neither error is causing the other. In such cases,
players should correct the error that is easiest to correct and will bring the greatest
improvement when remedied. For Jill, this probably means squaring up to the basket.
Correcting this error will likely motivate her to correct the other error.
Use Positive Feedback to Correct Errors
The positive approach to correcting errors includes emphasizing what to do instead
of what not to do. Use compliments, praise, rewards, and encouragement to correct
errors. Acknowledge correct performance as well as efforts to improve. By using posi-
tive feedback, you can help your players feel good about themselves and promote a
strong desire to achieve.
When you’re working with one player at a time, the positive approach to correcting
errors includes four steps:
1. Praise effort and correct performance. Praise the player for trying to perform
a skill correctly and for performing any parts of it correctly. Praise the player immedi-
ately after he performs the skill, if possible. Keep the praise simple: “Good try,” “Way
to hustle,” “Good extension,” or “That’s the way to follow through.” You can also
use nonverbal feedback, such as smiling, clapping your hands, or any facial or body
expression that shows approval.
Make sure you’re sincere with your praise. Don’t indicate that a player’s effort was
good when it wasn’t. Usually a player knows when he has made a sincere effort to
perform the skill correctly and perceives undeserved praise for what it is—untruthful
feedback to make him feel good. Likewise, don’t indicate that a player’s performance
was correct when it wasn’t.

COACHING TIP Set a goal for yourself to make at least two positive com-
ments to each player during each practice.

2. Give simple and precise feedback to correct errors. Don’t burden a player with
a long or detailed explanation of how to correct an error. Give just enough feedback
so that the player can correct one error at a time. Before giving feedback, recognize
that some players readily accept it immediately after the error; others will respond
better if you slightly delay the correction.
For errors that are complicated to explain and difficult to correct, you should try
the following:
Teaching 53

• Explain and demonstrate what the player should have done. Do not dem-
onstrate what the player did wrong.
• Explain the causes of the error (if the causes aren’t already obvious).
• Explain why you are recommending the correction you have selected (if
it’s not obvious).
3. Make sure the player understands your feedback. If the player doesn’t under-
stand your feedback, she won’t be able to correct the error. Ask the player to repeat
the feedback and to explain and demonstrate how it will be used. If the player can’t
do this, you should be patient and present your feedback again. Then have the player
repeat the feedback after you’re finished.
4. Provide an environment that motivates the player to improve. Your players
won’t always be able to correct their errors immediately, even if they do understand
your feedback. Encourage them to “hang tough” and stick with it when corrections are
difficult or when players seem discouraged. For more difficult corrections, you should
remind players that it will take time, and that the improvement will happen only if
they work at it. Encourage those players with little self-confidence. Saying something
like, “You were dribbling at a much better speed today; with practice, you’ll be able
to keep the ball closer to you and shield it from defenders,” can motivate a player to
continue to refine his dribbling skills.
Other players may be very self-motivated and need little help from you in this
area; with them you can practically ignore step 4 when correcting an error. Although
motivation comes from within, you should try to provide an environment of positive
instruction and encouragement to help your players improve.

A final note on correcting errors: Team sports such as basketball provide unique
challenges in this endeavor. How do you provide individual feedback in a group set-
ting using a positive approach? Instead of yelling across the court to correct an error
(and embarrassing the player), you can pull the player aside to make the correction.
This type of feedback has several advantages:
• The player will be more receptive to the one-on-one feedback.
• The other players are still active and still practicing skills, and they are unable
to hear your discussion.
• Because the rest of the team is still playing, you’ll feel compelled to make your
comments simple and concise—which is more helpful to the player.
This doesn’t mean you can’t use the team setting to give specific, positive feedback.
You can do so to emphasize correct group and individual performances. Use this team
feedback approach only for positive statements, though. Keep any negative feedback
for individual discussions.
4 Offensive Skills

This chapter focuses on the offensive techniques that players need to learn in
order to perform effectively in youth basketball games. Remember to use the IDEA
approach to teaching skills: introduce, demonstrate, and explain the skill, and attend
to players as they practice the skill. This chapter also ties directly into the practice plans
in chapters 10 to 14, describing the technical skills that you’ll teach at the practices
outlined there. If you aren’t familiar with basketball skills, you may find it helpful to
watch a video so you can see the skills performed correctly. Also, the Coaching Youth
Basketball Online Course offered by the American Sport Education Program (ASEP)
can help you further understand these skills (you can take this course by going to
www.ASEP.com).
The information in this book is limited to basketball basics. As your players advance
in their skills, you will need to advance your knowledge as a coach. You can do this by
learning from your experiences, watching and talking with more experienced coaches,
and studying resources on advanced skills.
The offensive technical skills you will teach your players include positioning and
footwork, dribbling, passing and catching, shooting, and rebounding. Mastering these
skills will allow your players to better execute your offensive tactics—or plays—during
the game (see chapter 5). These basic technical skills serve as the foundation for play-
ing basketball well at all levels. Basketball players practice these techniques at every
practice, from youth basketball to the pros.

Offensive Positioning
When on the offensive side of play, the player must always try to maintain a good
offensive position. This position is often called the ready position; when the player
has the ball, the position can be referred to as the triple-threat position.

54
Offensive Skills 55

Ready Position
The ready position—sometimes called basketball
position—is the position from which all offen-
sive moves should be made. From this ready
position, the offensive player can perform any
offensive skill—shooting, running, passing,
dribbling, screening, pivoting, or jumping—in
a very efficient manner because the player is
ready to move quickly in any direction. In the
ready position, the feet are shoulder-width apart
or wider, and the knees are bent and out from
the body (see figure 4.1). The hands and arms
are above the waist to make the player seem as
big as possible.
The coach should emphasize the ready posi-
tion in all drills so that it becomes a habit for
the players when performing all skills.
FIGURE 4.1 Ready position.

Triple-Threat Position
Whenever a player receives the ball, she should
assume the triple-threat position. The triple-
threat position is a version of the ready position
in which the player squares up to the basket. This
position allows the offensive player to see the
entire court. It also puts the player in a position
where she can make one of three choices—to
shoot, pass, or dribble—without letting the
defense know which option she is going to use.
When assuming the triple-threat position,
the player should be square to the basket with
her body facing the basket and the defender so
that she is in a good position to shoot, pass, or
drive to the right or left. The player should hold
the ball to the side toward the hip, with elbows
out; the player’s hands should always remain in
shooting position, with one hand behind the
ball and the other hand on the side, allowing
her to shoot the ball quickly and in rhythm, if FIGURE 4.2 Triple-threat position.
necessary. The shooting foot, which is the foot
on the same side as the shooting hand, should be positioned slightly ahead of the
other foot so that the player is in balance to take a shot if she chooses to do so (see
figure 4.2). To keep a defender off guard, a player in the triple-threat position should
move the ball, keeping the ball close to the chest and never lower than the waist.
56 Coaching Youth Basketball

Offensive Footwork
Good footwork is important for both offense and defense, but offensive players have
an advantage over defenders because they know what moves they are going to make
and when. Offensive players use footwork to fake defenders off balance, to move off
screens, to cut to the basket, to avoid charging into a defender, and to elude a blockout
when going for a rebound. We’ll explore four types of basic footwork—cuts, jump
stops, pivots, and jab steps.
When executing basic footwork correctly, a team’s offense will continue to improve;
therefore, the coach should take special note of footwork and make corrections when
necessary.

Cuts
Offensive players use cuts to change direction quickly (while staying in balance) and
“lose” their opponents in order to get open for passes or shots. Defenders will find it
difficult to keep up if they are unable to respond correctly to the cut.
A player executes a cut by planting one foot on the court at the end of a slightly
shortened stride, then pushing off that foot to shift his momentum in another direc-
tion. For example, if a player wants to cut to the right, he will first plant the left foot
(see figure 4.3a) and then push off of it. Then, he will turn the unplanted foot in the
direction he wants to go and will lead with that leg as he bursts in the new direction
(see figure 4.3b). When cutting, a player should bend the knees to lower his center of
gravity and provide explosiveness from the legs. After cutting, he should always strive
to get his lead hand up as a target for a pass. If a player is off balance when making a
cut, it is usually because of two things: The player is not low enough, and the player’s
head is not over his feet.
Three types of cuts that offensive players use to get open are V-cuts, L-cuts, and
backdoor cuts.

a b

FIGURE 4.3 Proper body positioning for a cut to the right.


Offensive Skills 57

V-Cut
A V-cut is used by an offensive player to get
open at the wing when the defensive player
has a foot and hand in the passing lane
and is trying to deny a pass to the offensive
player. The ideal place for the offensive
player to receive the ball is at the wing posi-
tion, which is even with the free-throw line
halfway between the free-throw lane and the
sideline. The V-cut should be the offensive
player’s first option in getting to this posi-
tion because it is the easiest cut to use and
the quickest method to get open. To execute
a V-cut, the offensive player moves from the
wing position and takes her defender to the
basket. She then plants the foot closest to FIGURE 4.4 V-cut.
the basket and pushes off toward the wing
position to receive the ball (see figure 4.4). The offensive player should come out
on a different line than the one she used when making her cut to
E5585/ASEP/fig the basket (hence
4.4/429487/TammyP/R1
the V-cut).

COACHING TIP Younger players commonly take an arced path when


cutting, or they slow down, taking short steps before the cut. You should
teach your players that cuts must be hard, sharp, and explosive in order to
be most effective and to keep the defense on edge.

L-Cut
An L-cut is also used by an offensive player
to get open at the wing when a defender has
a foot and hand in the passing lane, trying
to deny the pass. Again, the ideal place for
the offensive player to receive the ball is at
the wing position. The L-cut is used when
the V-cut will not get the offensive player
open to catch the ball. To execute an L-cut,
the offensive player should first be in the
ready position. He moves to a spot just out-
side the free-throw lane (about even with
the middle of the lane) and then takes the
defensive player slowly to the elbow of the
free-throw line. He plants his inside foot and
crosses over with the outside foot to move
straight out to the wing to receive the ball FIGURE 4.5 L-cut.
(see figure 4.5).

E5585/ASEP/fig 4.5/429488/TammyP/R1
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

58 Coaching Youth Basketball

Backdoor Cut
A backdoor cut is used by an offensive player
when a defender has a foot and hand in the
passing lane to deny a pass from the outside
into the wing position. This cut is used to
reduce the pressure at the wing. Because the
defender is denying the pass to the wing, the
offensive player must execute a backdoor cut
toward the basket to get open. To execute a
backdoor cut, the player should move to the
outside by taking her defensive player a step
above the three-point line. She then plants
the foot closest to the half-court line and
quickly cuts behind her defender and toward
the basket (see figure 4.6).
FIGURE 4.6 Backdoor cut.
Jump Stops
A jump stop is used to stop quickly when on the run, with or without
E5585/ASEP/fig the ball. It is a
4.6/429489/TammyP/R1
necessary maneuver almost any time a pass is received at any position on the floor.
The jump stop is particularly advantageous when a player receives a pass while facing
away from the basket in the low-post area, which is anywhere within eight feet of the
basket, because it will allow the player to use either foot as her pivot foot; this gives
the offensive player an advantage.
To jump stop, a player
on the run (see figure 4.7a)
quickly stops her body
under control by allowing
both feet to hit the floor at
the same time and assuming
the ready position, with the
feet about shoulder-width
apart, the knees flexed, and
her weight shifted slightly
forward to the balls of the
feet (see figure 4.7b). The
player’s arms should be in
a position above the waist,
ready to receive the ball,
and the head should be up
and positioned over the

a b
FIGURE 4.7 Jump stop.

www.Ebook777.com
Offensive Skills 59

waist. If a player tends to lose her balance when making the jump stop, you should
teach her to shift her weight to the back of the feet, with the head back and in line
with the body (loss of balance is commonly a result of the player’s head being posi-
tioned too far forward in front of the feet).
After completing the jump stop, the player can then choose either foot as a pivot
foot, but she may not change that pivot foot while in possession of the ball (see Pivots
for more information).

Pivots
A pivot takes place when one foot is lifted off the floor while the other foot is used to
turn the body. When players receive the ball, they can use either a front or back pivot
to protect the ball from the defense, to pass to a teammate, or to make a move to the
basket. A pivot can be made while on the run with or without the ball, for example,
when performing a crossover dribble or a V-cut. A pivot can also be made when a
player is stationary, such as when a player uses it to gain an advantage.
Front Pivot
A front pivot is when the turn of the pivot moves forward. Players should use a front
pivot in situations where they are facing the basket. When a player is facing the basket,
a front pivot will allow him to keep his eyes on the basket and not turn his back to
his teammates. To execute a front pivot, the player must assume a ready position—
with the feet about shoulder-width apart and the knees bent (see figure 4.8a)—and
maintain this position throughout the pivot. The player then turns his body by lifting
one foot and moving his body forward (see figure 4.8b). The player should keep his
weight on the ball of the pivot foot; that is, the foot that remains on the court.

a b

FIGURE 4.8 Front pivot.


60 Coaching Youth Basketball

Back Pivot
A back pivot is when the turn of the pivot moves backward. Players use a back pivot
when a defender is guarding them very closely and they cannot make the front pivot
without committing a violation or foul. Players will often use the back pivot in an
effort to avoid contact with the defensive player. To execute a back pivot, the player
must assume a ready position—with the feet about shoulder-width apart and the knees
bent (see figure 4.9a)—and maintain this position throughout the pivot. The player
takes a drop step, also called a reverse turn, by allowing his back to lead the way and
lifting one foot and then dropping it back (see figure 4.9b). The player should keep
his weight on the ball of the pivot foot (the foot that remains on the court).

Once a pivot foot is chosen, the player cannot lift or slide that foot, because doing
so would become a violation called traveling. However, when attempting a pass or
shot, the player may lift the designated pivot foot—providing the player releases the
ball before the pivot foot again hits the floor.

a b

FIGURE 4.9 Back pivot.

Jab Steps
A jab step—also called a drive step—is a short, 8- to 10-inch (20 to 25 cm) step made
straight toward the defender with the nonpivot foot. A player will use a jab step to
create space between herself and the defensive player.
To execute a jab step, the player catches the ball from a teammate and immediately
assumes the triple-threat position and squares up to the basket (see figure 4.10a). The
player’s weight should be on the pivot foot, and the player takes a short step directly
at the defensive player with the other foot (see figure 4.10b).
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

Offensive Skills 61

a b

FIGURE 4.10 Jab step.

Dribbling
Simply stated, dribbling is used to maintain possession of the ball while moving by
bouncing the ball on the floor. At the start of the dribble, the ball must leave the hand
before the player lifts her pivot foot from the floor (as discussed in Pivots on page
59), and the player may not touch the ball simultaneously with both hands while
dribbling or allow it to come to a rest in her hand.
Dribbling is an integral part of the sport of basketball and is vital to individual and
team play; however, it is also the most misused fundamental skill in the game. Exces-
sive dribbling with no purpose can quickly destroy teamwork and the morale of your
team. For example, if a player dribbles too much, teammates will tend not to move
or react, making the defense’s job much easier. When learning the skill of dribbling,
young players must first understand that all dribbling must have a purpose, such as to
advance the ball up the court or to the basket, or to make the passing angle better to
get a pass to an open teammate. Players must also keep their dribble in motion until
a shot or pass is available; picking up—or “killing”—the dribble in a poor position
without an option of a pass or a shot often results in a turnover.

COACHING TIP When dribbling, players should strive to stay in the middle
of the court and stay away from the sidelines and corners. It is much more
difficult for the defense to trap or double-team a dribbler in the middle of
the floor. Players should visualize the sideline as another defender and should
continually work to stay away from it.

When dribbling, your players should first maintain the ready position, keeping the
knees bent and the rear down, and establish a feel for the ball with the pads of the

www.Ebook777.com
62 Coaching Youth Basketball

fingers. Players should work to keep the dribble


under control by always bouncing the ball below
waist height and even lower when being guarded
closely by a defender. The ball should be kept close
to the body, and the player should protect the
dribble from the defender with the nondribbling
hand and arm. The head should always be up so
that the player can “see the rim” and be aware of
what is happening on the rest of the court, such
as the location of defenders and teammates (see
figure 4.11).

FIGURE 4.11 Proper body positioning for a dribble.

Dribbling Don’ts
Dribbling can be a very effective weapon to use in many situations, but as we have
learned, it is often an overused offensive skill. Following are a few key “don’ts” to
teach your players:
• Don’t dribble with the head down. When players dribble with their head
down, they are not able to see teammates who are open for a pass.
• Don’t always use the same hand when dribbling. Players should be able to
dribble with either hand.
• Don’t dribble the ball out from the body in traffic because this will make it
much more difficult to protect the ball from defensive players.
• Don’t automatically start dribbling after receiving a pass. After receiving the
pass, players should first square up to the basket in a triple-threat position
and look to see what shooting or passing options are available to them.
• Don’t pick up or stop the dribble until a clear shot or pass option becomes
available.
• Don’t dribble into a crowd—the ball is more likely to be stolen.
• Don’t try to get fancy when good fundamental dribbling will do the job.
• Don’t hesitate. Players should be assertive and confident when dribbling
the ball.
Offensive Skills 63

Coaches should help players learn at a young age how to dribble with both hands.
The ability to dribble with the weak hand as well as the strong hand is one key in
advancing a player’s skill level. When a player can move effectively in either direc-
tion with a dribble, this forces the defender to play in a more squared up position to
the dribbler and allows the offensive player more freedom to go in either direction.
Young players should also work on their ability to change speed and direction while
dribbling, because this makes it more difficult for the defender to anticipate the
offensive player’s next move.
Players can use many types of dribbles; however, we’re going to take a look at two
of the most common dribbles that are used in youth basketball—the power dribble
and the crossover dribble. We also discuss dribbling techniques that players should
use when driving to the basket.

Power Dribble
A power dribble is a hard dribble that
allows the player to make a move in a
close space and free himself from tight
defense. The power dribble is most
often used on a drive to the basket,
but it can also be used to get out of a
congested area, such as when a player
secures a rebound but is surrounded
by defenders with no open teammate
to pass to.
The power dribble calls on many of
the same fundamentals as described
previously for dribbling, but it com-
bines them with an explosive first step
toward the basket or in the direction
the player is moving. The ball is put
down hard on the floor, almost as if
it is being thrown (see figure 4.12), as
the offensive player takes several quick
FIGURE 4.12 Power dribble.
steps with the dribble, typically to the
left or right of the defensive player.
As with all dribbles, players should be taught to keep the head up and “see the
rim” so that they are aware of what is happening on the court. Additionally, the player
should dribble off the finger pads with fingertip control, flexing the wrist and fingers
to impart force to the ball without pumping the arm.
64 Coaching Youth Basketball

Crossover Dribble
The crossover dribble is a type of dribble where the dribbler actually crosses the ball in
front of the defensive player in order to make a change in direction (left or right), typi-
cally from the strong hand to the weak hand. A player should use a crossover dribble
when overplayed by the defender, meaning that the defender is trying to restrict the
direction that the offensive player may go. The crossover dribble is used in the open
court on a fast break or to create space between the dribbler and the defender for a
drive to the basket or for a better shot or pass.
To execute the crossover dribble, the player should first plant the foot on the side
of the body that he is dribbling on (see figure 4.13a). The player then crosses the ball
in front, switching the dribble from one hand to the other on the bounce (see figure
4.13b), while crossing the leg over in front of the defender in the direction that he
wants to go (see figure 4.13c). After changing direction, the player should remember
to get his nondribbling hand up for protection.

a b c

FIGURE 4.13 Crossover dribble.

Driving to the Basket


When the ball handler finds an opening, he will make a drive to the basket. To exe-
cute this drive properly, the player should take a longer step—called a drive step—in
a straight line to the basket, close to his defender, while keeping his weight on the
pivot foot (see figure 4.14a). The drive step should move past the defender’s lead foot,
cutting off the defender’s retreat by closing the gap between the offensive player and
the defender’s retreat step. The offensive player then takes a long dribble with the
outside hand (the hand farthest away from the defender) and makes the drive while
keeping the head up and the eyes on the basket (see figure 4.14b). After driving by
the defender, the player should be alert for defensive help and should finish by going
in strong for a layup or passing to an open teammate who can score.
Offensive Skills 65

a b

FIGURE 4.14 Drive step.

Passing
Effective passing is the key to moving the ball into position to take high-percentage
shots. Players pass the ball to maintain possession and to create scoring opportuni-
ties. Passes should usually be short and crisp, and they should arrive above the waist
and within easy reach of the receiver. Long or slow passes are likely to be stolen, and
players should avoid throwing too hard or using passes that are difficult to control.
Additionally, if possible, passes should be thrown to the receiver’s side that is farthest
from the defender.
We’ll take a closer look at three types of passes: chest pass, bounce pass, and over-
head pass.

COACHING TIP Teach your players that a pass travels much faster than a
dribble, so before dribbling, a player should always first look for an oppor-
tunity to pass to an open teammate.

Chest Pass
The chest pass is made when the ball is thrown with two hands from the passer’s
chest area to the receiver’s chest area. Chest passes are used often because they can
be made quickly and accurately from most positions on the floor.
To execute the chest pass, the player should begin in the ready position and step
toward the target, extending a leg, the back, and the arms, to initiate the pass (see
figure 4.15a on page 66). The pass should be started with the elbows in, and then
the wrists and fingers should be forced through the ball, releasing it off the first and
second fingers of both hands to give the ball backspin and direction. To get good
backspin on the ball, the player should follow through with the fingers pointed at
the target, palms facing out, and with the thumb of both hands pointed down (see
figure 4.15b on page 66).
66 Coaching Youth Basketball

FIGURE 4.15 Chest pass.

COACHING TIP Although all passers need to see their targets, more
advanced players should practice seeing their targets without looking at
them, by looking or faking away before passing. This will help the passer
better conceal where she intends to pass the ball.

Bounce Pass
It is sometimes easier for a passer to get the ball to a teammate by bouncing the ball
once on the court before it reaches the receiver. For example, if a defender is guarding
a player with both hands overhead, this may prevent a pass from being made through
the air to a teammate. Players should use bounce passes when they are closely guarded
and do not have the space to extend their arms for a chest pass.
Offensive Skills 67

To execute the bounce pass, the player should first assume the triple-threat position,
with the head up and with the ball held in both hands toward one hip to protect the
ball from the defender. The player should step toward the target (see figure 4.16a)
and snap the thumbs down and together on the release (as shown in figure 4.16b)
to impart backspin on the ball, which will slow the pass down a little as it hits the
floor. The player should make the pass at waist level and aim to bounce the ball on
the court about two-thirds of the way between herself and the receiver so that the
receiver is able to catch it at waist level.

FIGURE 4.16 Bounce pass.

COACHING TIP Often, a player’s strong hand tends to dominate on a pass,


forcing the ball in one direction or another versus straight ahead. Players
should focus on forcing the weak hand through the ball in order to place an
equal distribution of force on the ball and keep it moving straight ahead on
the pass.
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

68 Coaching Youth Basketball

Overhead Pass
An overhead pass is used when a player is closely guarded and forced to pass over
a defender—for example, when making an outlet pass to start a fast break or a lob
pass to a player cutting backdoor to the basket. The overhead pass is also an option
for feeding the low post.
To execute the overhead pass, the player should start in the triple-threat position,
holding the ball above the forehead with the elbows in and flexed at about 90 degrees
(see figure 4.17a). The player should be careful not to bring the ball back behind
the head, because from this position, it takes longer to make the pass, and it is easier
for a defender to come in from behind and make a steal. The player then steps in
the direction of the target and extends the legs and back, quickly passing the ball by
extending the arms, flexing the wrists and fingers, and releasing the ball off the first
and second fingers of both hands. The player follows through with the fingers point-
ing at the target and the palms facing down (see figure 4.17b).

FIGURE 4.17 Overhead pass.

www.Ebook777.com
Offensive Skills 69

Catching
Even the best passes are of little value if they aren’t caught, and sloppy receiving tech-
nique is often the cause of turnovers and missed scoring opportunities.
To receive a pass properly, the player should first show a target to the passer by
putting an arm up or out to the side and should call for the ball (see figure 4.18a).
She should then move to meet the pass—ideally stepping toward the ball, not away—
and watch the ball into her hands (see figure 4.18b). The player’s hands should be
relaxed—with palms facing the passer and thumbs together in a W position—and
should “give” with the ball as it is caught.
When possible, players should come to a jump stop after receiving a pass; their
feet should be positioned shoulder-width apart in triple-threat position. From this
position, players should pivot to face the basket, looking for an open teammate, a
shot, or a lane to dribble the ball to the basket.

FIGURE 4.18 Catching a pass.


Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

70 Coaching Youth Basketball

Shooting
Most players love the chance to put the basketball through the hoop and will be
highly motivated to learn proper shooting technique. However, many players spend
hours shooting the basketball but never become very good shooters because they
practice shots that they never take in game competition. After your players learn the
fundamentals of the shot, you should make sure that they practice shooting under
game conditions.
Players should first learn how to select high-percentage shots only—in other words,
shots that are likely to go in. Obviously, the closer the player is to the basket when
the shot is attempted, the better the chance that the shot will go in. Other factors
that determine a high-percentage shot include the defensive pressure, the position of
the shooter, the team offense, and the time and score of the game. High-percentage
opportunities for a shot also vary depending on the player’s shooting skill and the
position that the player plays on the team.
When shooting, players should also learn to focus on a specific target, usually the
rim or backboard. The middle of the rim should be the target for most shots, but
when players are at a 30- to 60-degree angle from the hoop, they should sight the
corner of the square on the backboard for a bank shot. If the angle is correct, using
the backboard will help the ball go into the basket.
Players can shoot the ball in a variety of ways, including set and jump shots, free
throws, layups, and shooting off a dribble.

Achieving Arc on the Shot


Many players tend to shoot “line drives” at the hoop, rather than achieving a proper
arc on the ball when taking a shot. This arc can improve the chances of making a
shot because a proper arc allows the ball to be somewhat off the mark and still go
in the basket.
Arc is determined by the placement of the arm and hand during and after the
shot. To achieve arc on the shot, players should shoot the ball up, then out, toward
the basket. The player’s shoulders should be relaxed and in a forward position. The
player should move the hands closer together if they are too far apart; she should
raise her shooting arm higher to provide more arc. A good way to check for proper
arc is to examine the positioning of the shooting-arm elbow. The elbow should end
up above eye level on the follow-through for the shot.

Set Shots
Set shots are shots taken without a jump during the shot, such as the type of shot
used for free throws. A jump shot, as the name implies, is a shot taken using a jump
during the shot (see page 72). Although the most common shot at higher levels of
play is the jump shot, young players who lack the leg strength and coordination to
spring from the floor while shooting will more often shoot set shots.

www.Ebook777.com
Offensive Skills 71

COACHING TIP Teach younger players the mechanics of the set shot first,
and they will be able to advance to the jump shot as they increase their
strength and improve their coordination.

When executing the set shot, players should first square up to the basket, with the
foot on the shooting-hand side positioned up to 6 inches (15 cm) in front of the
other foot, creating a comfortable, balanced base of support. The ball should lie on
the finger pads of each hand, with the shooting hand behind and slightly underneath
the ball and with the nonshooting hand balancing the ball from the side (see figure
4.19a). The player then bends the knees to get momentum for the shot—using the
legs, not the arms, for power; at the same time, the player bends the shooting-arm
elbow to approximately a 90-degree angle, keeping the forearm perpendicular to the
floor and in front of the cocked wrist as the ball is brought up to the shooting posi-
tion above the forehead (see figure 4.19b). As the legs extend, the player releases the
ball by extending the elbow, bringing the wrist forward, and moving the fingers of
the shooting hand up and through the ball. The player should follow through after
the release by extending the shooting arm, dropping the wrist, and pointing the index
finger of the shooting hand directly at the basket; the thumb on the shooting hand
ends in the down position after the shot (see figure 4.19c).

a b c

FIGURE 4.19 Set shot.


72 Coaching Youth Basketball

For a set shot, players should understand that the nonshooting arm and hand should
maintain their supportive position on the side of the ball until after the release—the
nonshooting hand should not be used to help push the ball to the basket. To verify
proper positioning of the nonshooting hand, ensure that the thumb of the nonshoot-
ing hand is pointed back to the ear and not at the basket.

Jump Shots
A jump shot is similar to the set shot except that the player aligns the ball higher at
the point of release and shoots after jumping, rather than shooting with the simul-
taneous extension of the legs while on the floor. Also, because the player jumps first
and then shoots, the upper body, arm, wrist, and fingers must generate more force.
When a player is executing a jump shot, the movement above the waist is similar
to that of the set shot. The shooting hand should be positioned behind the ball, with
the elbow in line with the basket, and the nonshooting hand should be positioned to
the side of the ball (see figure 4.20a). For the jump shot, however, the player should
jump straight up off both feet—fully extending the ankles, knees, back, and shoul-
ders—and should take the shot just before reaching the peak of the jump (see figure
4.20b). For a jump shot, the ball must be put into motion as the player is jumping in
order to impart that power onto the ball. If a player releases the ball too late, the shot
will most likely be short. The player should follow through on the jump shot with
the shooting arm extended and the nonshooting hand in position with the thumb
pointing back toward the ear (see figure 4.20c).

a b c

FIGURE 4.20 Jump shot.


Offensive Skills 73

The height of the player’s jump depends on the range of the shot. On shots close
to the basket when the player is closely guarded, she will have to jump higher than
her defenders. On longer-range jump shots, she will usually have more time and
defenders are not quite as close; therefore, the player won’t have to jump as high for
these shots. When using a jump shot, however, more force from the legs should be
used for shooting the ball rather than for jumping high. Balance and control are more
important than gaining maximum height on a jump.

Free Throws
Although the mechanics of a free throw are similar to a set shot (see figure 4.19 on
page 71), free-throw shooting requires a great deal of concentration because the
shooter is by himself at the free-throw line. Success in free-throw shooting largely
depends on the player’s ability to be relaxed and confident in order to concentrate
fully on the shots being taken.
Establishing a consistent rhythm and a set routine will help players achieve this
relaxation and confidence. A routine, for example, can include dribbling a set number
of times; checking mechanics; breathing deeply and exhaling fully; consciously relaxing
the shoulders, arms, hands, and fingers; letting them drop and loosen; and so forth.
Players may also use visualization techniques to mentally practice shooting the free
throw and to focus on positive thoughts, such as I’m a good shooter and “seeing” the
ball going through the basket.

Layups
The highest-percentage shot—and therefore the most desirable—is a layup. A layup
is a one-handed shot taken within three feet of the basket. A layup is typically shot
using the hand farthest from the basket in an effort to protect the ball from defenders.
Teach players to use their left hand when shooting layups from the left side of the
basket and their right hand when shooting from the right side of the basket.
When executing a layup, the player begins by striding from a 45- to 60-degree
angle to the hoop and then planting the foot opposite the shooting hand (see figure
4.21a on page 74). The player explodes off the planted foot straight up into the air
(see figure 4.21b). At the top of the jump, the player releases the ball by bringing the
shooting hand, which is underneath the ball and near the shoulder, straight up toward

COACHING TIP Right-handed players are likely to find left-handed layups


troublesome, and vice versa. The strength and coordination of younger play-
ers are not yet advanced enough to perform the layup easily from both sides
of the basket. You can help your players learn to use the left hand on the left
side of the basket, for example, by teaching them to visualize the left knee
and left elbow attached with a string. As the left elbow goes up to release
the ball, the left knee also comes up, and the player jumps off the right foot.
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

74 Coaching Youth Basketball

a b c

FIGURE 4.21 Layup.

the basket (see figure 4.21c). As in the set shot, the index finger of the shooting hand
should be pointed directly at the basket or the appropriate spot on the backboard.
When shooting a layup, the player should aim to shoot high off the backboard so
that the ball drops in the basket. This way, even if the player is fouled on the shot,
the ball will have a chance to go in.

Shooting Off the Dribble


Shooting off the dribble is simply taking a shot after using a dribble to get into a
better shooting position. The dribble also helps the shooter get more power into the
shot than when a shot is taken directly from a pass.
When shooting off a dribble, the player should first achieve a balanced stance with
the knees bent. She should pick up the ball while facing the basket in position to
shoot. The player shouldn’t reach for the ball but should instead pick it up in front
of the shooting knee (the knee on the same side of the body as the shooting hand)
as the ball bounces up. When a player is dribbling to the strong-hand side (see figure
4.22a), she should jump behind her last dribble (see figure 4.22b) and pick the ball

www.Ebook777.com
Offensive Skills 75

up in front of her shooting knee using the strong-side hand; the nonshooting hand
will be positioned on the side of the ball for the shot (see figure 4.22c). When a
player is dribbling to his weak-hand side (see figure 4.23a), he will pick the ball up
off the last dribble (see figure 4.23b) with the weak-side hand and bring the ball to
the shooting hand for the shot (see figure 4.23c).

a b c

FIGURE 4.22 Shooting the ball from the strong-side dribble.

a b c

FIGURE 4.23 Shooting the ball from the weak-side dribble.


76 Coaching Youth Basketball

Offensive Rebounding
An offensive rebound is a rebound secured by the offensive team when one of its
own players misses a shot. Successful offensive rebounding by your players adds
greatly to your team’s chances to score. Possession of the ball comes more often from
missed shots than any other way, and a team that can control the backboard usually
controls the game. More than any other basic basketball skill, the success of offensive
rebounding relies largely on players’ desire and courage. Good rebounders must be
able to anticipate missed shots and determine how hard or how soft, and to what
side of the rim, the ball will rebound. They must also know where their opponents
are at all times.
When preparing to rebound a ball, the offensive player should be in the ready posi-
tion with the hands above the shoulders (see figure 4.24a) so that she can achieve
maximum height on her jump to go after the ball. The hands and arms need to be
fully extended so the player gets the ball at the peak of her jump instead of allowing
the ball to come down to the player. A player should catch the rebound firmly with
both hands (see figure 4.24b), and after controlling a rebound, the player should keep
the ball at chin level with the elbows out (see figure 4.24c). The player must protect
the ball while maintaining the ready position with the ball at the chin and the elbows
out, but at the same time the player must avoid swinging the elbows to draw a foul.

a b c

FIGURE 4.24 Securing the rebound.


Offensive Skills 77

Rebounding Shots From the Side


For a shot taken from the side, offensive players should be aware that the ball is likely
to rebound to the opposite side of the basket. Players should not watch the ball in
flight; instead, they should look for an opening on the opposite side so that they
can position themselves for the rebound. The offensive player can get into offensive
rebound position by taking a V-cut (discussed previously on page 57) toward the
baseline in order to get inside position on the defender. The player can also use a
pivot (discussed previously on page 59) to make a spin move around the defender.

Rebounding Shots From the Front


Offensive rebounding for shots taken from the front is similar to rebounding the shots
from the side, except that shots taken from the front will usually rebound straight
out from the rim. The offensive player can use the same tactics to get into offensive
rebound position in front of the rim—taking a V-cut to get inside position on the
defender or using a pivot to make a spin move around defenders.

COACHING TIP A player should avoid reaching over an opponent when


getting “boxed out” by the defense (see Defensive Rebounding in chapter
7) or else it is likely that a foul will be called. Emphasize the importance of
jumping straight up for the rebound. By jumping vertically, not only will a
player achieve great height, but she’ll also avoid needless fouls.

Rebounding Free Throws


When rebounding free throws, the offensive player should line up as far up the lane
as possible (in his box). When the ball hits the rim, the player should immediately
step down the lane hard and quick to try to beat the inside defender for the rebound.
This will make it more difficult for the defensive rebounder to make contact and block
out the offensive player.
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

5 Offensive Tactics

Once your players understand and can properly execute the individual offen-
sive technical skills, they can begin putting them together into offensive tactics. As
you probably already know, the primary offensive objective in basketball is to move
the ball effectively so that you can score. A secondary goal, then, is to maintain ball
possession so that the opposing team cannot score. The following tactics will help
your team accomplish these goals.

Coordinating an Offensive Attack


When coordinating your offensive attack, above all else, you must strive to maintain
court balance and spacing to provide opportunities for players to be in a position to
score. The execution of these objectives differs depending on whether your team is
up against a man-to-man or zone defense.

Jump Balls
The jump ball occurs when both teams have equal control of the ball, as in the
start of the game or overtime periods. How players are positioned for a jump ball
depends on whether your team has the better chance of controlling the tip—that
is, winning the jump ball. If the player jumping for you has the advantage, your
team should align in an offensive formation and attempt to score off the play. If,
however, it appears that the opposing team will gain possession, a defensive setup
is appropriate. The jumper should tip the ball to an open spot where two teammates
are next to each other without an opponent in between.

78

www.Ebook777.com
Offensive Skills 79

Against Man-to-Man 2
Defense
Against man-to-man defense, the most
important thing for your players to learn is
4
proper spacing so that the defenders cannot
easily double-team the offensive player with
the ball (see Creating Passing Lanes on page 1
80 for more information). For youth play-
ers, an offensive set that works well against 5
man-to-man defense is one where the point
guard (1) leads the attack with the wings
(2 and 3) stationed at the free-throw line
3
extended—approximately 17 feet from the
basket—and the two post players (4 and 5)
positioned on the free-throw line blocks (see FIGURE 5.1 Offensive set against a
figure 5.1). When the ball is passed to a wing, man-to-man defense.
the point guard screens away for the other E5585/ASEP/fig5.1/429545/TammyP/R3-alw
wing, and a post player screens away for the opposite post player. At times, the point
guard may cut to the basket instead of setting the screen; when this happens, to regain
court balance, the opposite wing will fill the front spot. The post players may also
step out to the wing positions to set a ball screen and create a two-man pick-and-roll.

Against Zone Defense


Against a zone defense, your players need to move quickly and strive to find posi-
tions in gaps of the defense. If players dribble the basketball between the gaps in a
zone defense, this will often make two defenders cover the dribbler and leave a player
open for a shot. When your team faces a 2-3 zone defense (see figure 5.2a), a good

2
3
1

4 1

5
5

3 4 2

a b

FIGURE 5.2 Offensive sets against a zone defense.

E5585/ASEP/fig5.2a/429546/TammyP/R1 E5585/ASEP/fig5.2b/429547/TammyP/R1
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

80 Coaching Youth Basketball

offensive set to use would be a 1-3-1 set with a point guard (1), two wings (2 and 3),
a high-post player (4), and a low-post player (5). When facing a 1-3-1 zone defense
(see figure 5.2b on page 79), you should use a 2-1-2 offensive set with two guards (1
and 2), two forwards (3 and 4), and a post player (5) in the middle. In a 2-1-2, the
offense plays in the gaps of the zone defense.

Creating Passing Lanes


To move the ball effectively, your team needs to move well without the ball and
create passing lanes. Passing lanes are spaces or open areas where passes can be made
between offensive players with little risk of
being stolen by the defensive team. Players
create passing lanes by maintaining court
balance, by keeping the middle open, and
by quickly moving to a vacated spot. Passing
lanes can also be created by screens, which
will be covered in Setting and Using Screens
on the following page.

Maintaining Court Balance


Court balance is necessary to allow the
offense to make passes and cuts. Offensive
players should start in an open formation
about 12 to 15 feet apart. This spacing will
make it more difficult for the defenders to
double-team and will allow better opportu-
nities for screens and cuts. Offensive players FIGURE 5.3 Open spacing formation.
should be spaced high at the top, wide on
the wings, and at the midpoints between
the basket and corners on the baseline (see E5585/ASEP/fig 5.3/429548/TammyP/R1
figure 5.3).

Keeping the Middle Open


Keeping the middle, or lane area, open is
a very good offensive maneuver because it
enables cutters to cut through the lane to
receive the ball without much traffic. When a
player cuts to the basket and doesn’t receive a
pass, the player should continue through and
fill an open spot on the side of the court with
fewer players, which is usually the opposite
side from where the player came. This will
keep the middle open and the floor balanced FIGURE 5.4 Filling an open spot on
(see figure 5.4). a cut.

E5585/ASEP/fig 5.4/429549/TammyP/R3-alw
www.Ebook777.com
Offensive Tactics 81

Additionally, players must be aware that they shouldn’t stay in the post area (high,
mid, or low post) for more than three counts. A violation will occur after three sec-
onds in the lane, and the middle area will get congested if the player continues to go
into the post areas.

Moving to a Vacated Spot


When a player cuts, the player who is the next
player away from the cutting player should
move quickly to the vacated spot. This is
especially important when the player has to
cut from the top position (the position at the
top of the key that the point guard typically
covers), because floor balance is needed so
that players are in the proper position for the
rebound and to stop the fast break. This top
position is where the offense usually starts,
depending on the offensive set being used.
But as players move to various spots on the
court in response to defensive movement,
this point position needs to be covered by FIGURE 5.5 Moving to a vacated spot
different players so that good court balance is when a cut is taken from the point.
maintained. When replacing the player at the
point, the new player should swing wide above the three-point line, creating a better
E5585/ASEP/fig 5.5/429550/TammyP/R2-alw
passing angle from the wing (see figure 5.5). The new player needs to get open for a
pass at the top of the key, and if the player receives a pass, this is a good opportunity
to reverse the ball to the other side of the court and make a cut to the basket.

Setting and Using Screens


Screens can be set for a player with or without
the ball. They are used to help players get
open for passes and shots. In figure 5.6, the
low player sets a screen—also called a pick—
by positioning as a stationary barrier on one
side of his teammate's defender, thus block-
ing that defender’s path as the teammate cuts
around the screen to get open for a pass. A
player will typically set a screen perpendicular
to the path of the defender and will “screen
away” from the ball—that is, set the screen
for a player without the ball who is located
on the opposite side of the court from the
ball (the weak side). This way, the player for
whom the screen is set will be moving toward
the passer after coming off the screen. FIGURE 5.6 Setting a screen.

E5585/ASEP/fig 5.6/429551/TammyP/R2-alw
82 Coaching Youth Basketball

When setting a screen, the player should use a wide two-footed jump stop (see
page 58 of chapter 4) to avoid an illegal moving screen. The player should stand erect
with the feet planted shoulder-width apart and the arms down in front or crossed
at the chest (see figure 5.7a). The screener should keep the arms and knees in as the
defender fights through. The cutter—the player for whom the screen is set—should
cut close to the screener (see figure 5.7b) and actually brush the screener on the way
by. When playing against a good defensive team, the cutter may be covered because
defensive players will switch when a screen is set. But the screener may often be open
to receive a pass after setting the screen.

a b

FIGURE 5.7 Proper technique for setting and using a screen.

Running a Fast Break


The fast break usually develops after a rebound, a steal, or possibly after a basket, and
it is the fastest way to make the transition from defense to offense. As soon as the
defensive team gains possession, it becomes the offensive team and tries to push the
ball downcourt quickly before the other team can get back on defense.
To start a fast break after a basket or steal, players use a quick pass, known as an outlet
pass, to a teammate positioned downcourt from the player in possession of the bas-
ketball. They can also dribble to start the break, but passing is the first option because
it moves the ball faster. On a rebound, the outlet pass is slightly different because the
teammate receiving the outlet pass will not yet be positioned downcourt. Instead, the
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

Offensive Tactics 83

player in possession of the ball turns to the outside of the court and looks for a guard
to pass to. When the guard receives the ball, he immediately advances the ball down-
court using a dribble or another pass. If the rebounder is trapped or is in a congested
area and unable to make the outlet pass, he can use one or two power dribbles up the
middle and then look to pass. A point guard who sees that the rebounder is unable
to make the outlet pass should come back to the rebounder to receive a short pass
or handoff. The player who receives the pass will then be responsible for moving the
ball to the middle of the court by either passing or dribbling. Other teammates will
fill the lanes on either side as they proceed down the court. When the ball reaches the
middle, the player with the ball will want to get to the free-throw line under control
before passing to either lane for a shot or short drive (see figure 5.8).

FIGURE 5.8 A typical fast break.

COACHING TIP TheE5585/ASEP/fig 5.8/429554/TammyP/R2-alw


fast break is not started until the defensive team gains
possession of the ball and then becomes the offensive team. Players must
not anticipate possession and start the fast break early, because this may
leave the team shorthanded on defense. Younger players often get in the
habit of anticipating that a teammate will gain possession and running away
from the ball to start the fast break before possession is really obtained.

Players should stay spread out and run at top speed under control during the fast
break. The last two players down the floor are called trailers and are typically the
bigger forward and the center (the 4 and 5 positions). They cut directly to the blocks
on either side, looking for a pass from one of the outside lanes. Trailers often get
passes on the blocks from the right- or left-lane cutters when the defense moves out
to cover them on the wings.

www.Ebook777.com
84 Coaching Youth Basketball

Basic Offensive Plays


There are several basic offensive plays that every team should learn, including the
give-and-go, the pick-and-roll, and inbounds plays.

Give-and-Go
The give-and-go is the most basic play in
basketball and exemplifies what team play
is all about. The name is derived from the
action where one player gives (passes) the
ball to a teammate and goes (cuts) to the
basket, looking to receive a return pass for a
layup (see figure 5.9 for an example of the
movement made for a give-and-go play). By
passing the ball and then moving without
it, the player creates an opportunity to score
on a return pass. If the player does not get
open on the cut, the movement at least gives
the teammate a better opportunity to initi-
ate a one-on-one move, because the cutter’s
defender will be in a less advantageous posi-
tion to give defensive help. FIGURE 5.9 Give-and-go.
When a player is positioned at the point,
she should start the give-and-go at least a step above the free-throw circle. When she
is on the wing, she should start the give-and-go a E5585/ASEP/fig
step above the foul line extended.
5.9/429555/TammyP/R2-alw
The player initiates the give-and-go with a pass and then reads the defender’s posi-
tion before cutting to the basket. If the defender moves with the passer, continuing
to guard closely, the passer should simply make a hard cut to the basket. However,
if the defender drops off, moving toward the ball on the pass, the passer should set
the defender up with a fake before cutting. The passer should fake by taking a step or
two away from the ball, and then, as the defender moves with the passer, the passer
should make a sharp cut in front of the defender toward the basket. The passer can
also fake by taking a step or two toward the ball, then make a sharp cut behind the
defender. This is the backdoor cut, which was discussed previously on page 58 of
chapter 4. The key is for players to read their defenders to know which type of cut
will be most effective (see Cuts on page 56 of chapter 4).
Offensive Tactics 85

Pick-and-Roll
The pick-and-roll is another basic play whose
name, like that of the give-and-go, comes
from the action of the play. A player sets a
pick (screen) for a teammate, who dribbles
by it for an outside shot or a drive. The
screener then rolls toward the basket, look-
ing for a pass from the dribbler for a layup
(see figure 5.10 for the movement made for
a pick-and-roll play).
The player with the ball must wait until
a legal pick is set before she starts the
dribble. She then dribbles her defender into
the screen that her teammate has set. The
screener turns so she can see the dribbler
and may receive a pass. The dribbler should
take at least two dribbles beyond the screen FIGURE 5.10 Pick-and-roll.
to create space for the pass to the screener,
who rolls to the basket.
E5585/ASEP/fig 5.10/429556/TammyP/R2-alw
COACHING TIP After making a roll or cut, players should work to get their
lead hand up for a target. This will help the passer identify where the ball
should be passed. It also helps the passer know that players are looking to
receive the ball as they are cutting to the basket.

Inbounds Plays
Inbounds plays are used to get the ball into the playing area from out of bounds—for
example, after a turnover, after a made basket, or when the other team touches the ball
last before it goes out of bounds. The primary goal of your inbounds plays should be
to get the ball inbounds safely, to score off the inbounds play, or both.
Design most of your inbounds plays to create easy scoring opportunities when your
team puts the ball in play from underneath your basket, but keep the plays simple
and limit them to just a few. The key is to always have a good passer inbound the ball
and for the rest of the team to cut hard to their designated spots.

COACHING TIP When creating inbounds plays for your team, consider
aligning players in the same manner for each play so that your players aren’t
confused about where to position themselves and the defense isn’t tipped
off by a change in formation.
86 Coaching Youth Basketball

Types of Offenses
When planning an offense that best suits the needs of the team, coaches must take
into consideration their players’ skill level, size, quickness, maturity level, and desire
compared to other players.

Basic Offenses
For the team’s main offense, the coach should choose an offense that is very simple
and involves good court spacing. For example, the offense can use a set with a point
guard, two wings, and two posts (1-2-2) or a set with a point guard, two wings, a high
post, and a low post (1-3-1). Another typical set includes two guards, two wings, and
one post player (2-2-1). From all of these sets and the others discussed in this section,
the players can set screens and run give-and-go plays.
Fast Break Offense
If the team is quick and small, the fast break offense would be a good option as the
initial offense, enabling the team to try to score quickly against teams that are slower.
In this offense, the team should try to use the fast break (see page 82) off turnovers
and blocked shots with the goal of getting an easy basket. If you want to be a fast-
breaking offensive team, you must spend time in practice working on the concepts
of filling the lanes and getting the ball up the court as quickly as possible, which
involves using the pass rather than the dribble.
5-Out Offense
Regardless of whether you are a fast-breaking
team or one that is slower and works to set
up the half-court offense, you will need to
decide what works best in the half court for
your team. A smaller, quicker team will want
to spread the court and create opportuni-
ties for drives to the basket. A 5-out offense
allows for good spacing that will be effective
for such drives. The 5-out offense is consid-
ered a spread offense in which the middle of
the court is open. This offense is a 1-2-2 set
with the two baseline players positioned 12
to 15 feet from the basket (see figure 5.11).

FIGURE 5.11 5-out offensive setup.

E5585/ASEP/fig 5.11/429557/TammyP/R1
Offensive Tactics 87

1-4 Offense
In addition to the 5-out offense, a 1-4 set can
be quite effective for a fast but smaller team.
This offense includes a point guard along
with four players across the free-throw line
and free-throw line extended—two wings
and one post player at each of the free-throw
elbows (see figure 5.12). Again, the spacing
is away from the basket, which allows for
open cuts to the basket and screens by the
post players on the ball.
Double Low-Post Offense
If you have players with some size on your
team, you may want to look for more of a
power game, such as a double low-post set
with three perimeter players. In the double FIGURE 5.12 1-4 offensive setup.
low-post offense, two players are posting
up on each of the low-post blocks (see figure 5.13). This power offense is great for
teams with two big players. By having your players E5585/ASEP/fig
in the low post set screens for one
5.12/429558/TammyP/R1
another, this offense allows your big players to stay near the basket for good low-post
shots and good rebounding position.
1-3-1 Offense
A 1-3-1 set is also a good combination for teams with two good post players. In this
offense, one player is positioned at the high post and one at the low post; two wings
and a point guard are also included (see figure 5.14). A big player who is also a good
passer is great for the high-post position.

FIGURE 5.13 Double low-post FIGURE 5.14 1-3-1 offensive setup.


offensive setup.

E5585/ASEP/fig 5.13/429559/TammyP/R1 E5585/ASEP/fig 5.14/429560/TammyP/R1


Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

88 Coaching Youth Basketball

Zone Offense
The zone offense is often overlooked; how-
ever, teams should practice and drill their
zone offense similar to their man-to-man
offenses. The best type of offense to play
against a zone is one that is similar to your
team’s man-to-man offense and has many
of the same patterns. However, attacking
the zone is somewhat different in that the
players need to understand gaps in the zone
and how to attack these gaps.
Most teams play a 2-3 zone defense.
Against this type of zone, your players should
be positioned in the gaps of the zone, with a
point guard, two wings, a high-post player,
and a low-post player (see figure 5.15). This
will force the defenders to decide who to FIGURE 5.15 Zone offensive setup.
guard and will create some confusion for
them.
A fast-breaking team has some advantage when playing against
E5585/ASEP/fig a zone defense,
5.15/429561/TammyP/R1
because the quicker the ball can be advanced, the more difficult it is for the zone to
set up and defend the fast break. This is another reason why the fast break should be
used to some extent by all teams.

Whatever type of offense you decide on, you must spend time working on it in
practice so the players can run your sets without thinking too much. When the play-
ers are thinking too much, this slows them down and does not allow them to run
the offense easily. If you have too many sets and play calls, this will not allow the
players to learn how to play the game. Once your basic offense is established, have
the players spend time practicing screening for teammates and reading and reacting
to the defense. This teaches the players how to play the game with some freedom.

Press Break Offenses


A press break offense is a full-court offense used when the defense plays some type
of full-court, three-quarter-court, or half-court pressure defense to try to disrupt the
offensive team. You must prepare your players to be in the proper position so they
don’t panic when they see a press. You want them to be confident that they can get
an easy basket against the press.
If the press is a man-to-man press, the guards need to have the skills to bring the
ball up against the press using the dribble. The best strategy is to clear out the players
except for the guard, who can use the dribble to get the ball upcourt to the offensive
end. Sometimes the offense may want to use a player other than a guard to bring the
ball upcourt against man pressure if that player is the best ball handler.

www.Ebook777.com
Offensive Tactics 89

Anytime your opponents use a zone press at any level on the court—full, half, or
three-quarter court—your players should use an offensive set that enables them to
get the ball in the middle of the court. This can be done by placing a player in the
middle of the press to start with or by having a player cut to the middle of the press
from the weak side. Once the ball gets to the middle of the court, the offense should
attack the defense by dribbling the ball to the basket; an offensive player should be
on each side of the basket to create good passing situations.

Special Offenses
As a coach, you must also have some special offenses available when needed. These
include last-second shot offenses from full, half, and quarter court; a delay offense
when ahead in the last minutes of the game; and quick-hitter offenses for three-point
shots or two-point shots.
These special offenses need to be practiced each week so the players know what to
run in key situations. Working on these special offenses will give your players confi-
dence; the players will know that they are well prepared for any situation that may
arise during the game.
6 Offensive Drills

The following offensive drills can be used to help players develop the skills
and tactics that will enable them to become better on the offensive end of the court.
Although most of the drills emphasize one or two main goals, players should be
developing several offensive skills at the same time. For example, although shooting
may be emphasized in one drill, the coach should also give attention to passing or
dribbling in the same drill. In this way, players will get the most out of each drill
they perform.
For access to some of these drills online, visit the following website: www.Human
Kinetics.com/CoachingYouthBasketball5E-OffensiveDrills. Such drills are indicated
by this symbol in the outside margin of the text:

Additional offensive drills are provided in chapters 10 to 14; refer to the practice
sessions there for even more options.

90
OFFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ FOUR-LINE JUMP STOPS

Goal To learn how to make proper jump stops without traveling after running.
Description Players divide into four groups and line up along the baseline. When
the coach blows the whistle, the first players in line sprint forward. The coach blows
a second whistle (after approximately five or six steps by the players), and the play-
ers use a jump stop to stop quickly with both feet simultaneously hitting the floor.
The coach blows another whistle, and the next players in line begin. Repeat in this
manner until all players have reached the opposite baseline. This drill can also be
done with the players performing forward and reverse pivots, rebounding technique
without the ball, jump shots without the ball, or imaginary tipping.
Variations
• Place a cone on the floor to indicate where the players should execute the
jump stop.
• Have each player use a ball and perform the jump stop after dribbling.

➤ DRIBBLE–PIVOT–PASS

Goal To learn to execute a jump stop and pivot correctly without traveling.
Description Players divide into four groups and line up along the sideline. The first
players in line each have a ball, and on the coach’s command, they move forward,
dribbling three times, and jump stop. After the jump stop, the players execute a
reverse pivot (a front pivot may also be used), pass the ball to the next player in line,
and return to the end of the line. Repeat until all players have had a turn.
Use this drill to work on passing as well. The pass back to the next player in line
can be a chest pass, bounce pass, two-hand overhead pass, step-out pass (the player
steps out to avoid the imaginary defensive player), or step-through pass (the player
steps out, fakes a pass, and then crosses over with the same leg to make a pass on
the opposite side from which he originally stepped out).
Variations
• Place a cone on the floor to indicate where the player should dribble and
perform the pivot.
• Add a pass fake after the pivot and before the player makes the pass to the
next player in line.

91
OFFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ JAB STEPPING
Goal To learn how to perform a jab step to create space between the offensive
and defensive player.
Description Players divide into three groups and line up at the top of the key. The
first players in line each have a ball, and on the coach’s command, they spin the
ball out 3 or 4 feet (91 or 122 cm) in front of them. The players take their first step
with the nonshooting foot, which will be the pivot foot, to grab the ball, and with
the shooting foot, they take a jab step. After the jab step, the players shoot the
ball, rebound it, and pass it to the next player in their lines. Repeat until all players
have had a turn.
Variations
• Have the players perform the jab steps without the ball to learn the proper
footwork before adding the ball.
• Add a defender to the drill so the offensive player must perform the jab step
in a live situation.

➤ PARTNER PASSING
Goal To learn the correct techniques for passing and catching the ball.
Description Players divide into groups of two and position anywhere on the court,
12 to 15 feet (3.6 to 4.5 m) apart and facing each other. Each pair of players has a
ball, and the players pass back and forth to their partner, using proper technique.
The coach specifies the type of passes to be made (chest, bounce, or overhead).
Continue for 5 to 10 minutes, depending on the age group.
Variations
• Start with the players closer together (6 to 8 feet [183 to 244 cm] apart) so the
passes are easier to pass and catch.
• Have the players perform the drill with the weak hand only. To make the drill more
competitive, you can also add one or two stationary dribbles before each pass.

➤ TARGET TWO-LINE PASSING


Goal To learn how to pass the ball to a specific target and how to provide a target
for a passer.
Description Players divide into two groups and line up on the court, approximately
12 to 15 feet apart, facing each other. The first player in one line has a ball, and
on the coach’s command of “left,” “right,” or “both,” the first player in the other
line raises the appropriate hand (or both hands) to act as the passer’s target. Once
the pass is caught, the two players take a position at the end of the opposite line.
Repeat until all players have had a turn.
Variations
• Start with the players closer together (6 to 8 feet apart) so the passes are easier
to pass and catch.
• Work on all types of passes to the target—chest, bounce, overheard, and so on.
92
OFFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ DRIBBLING LINES
Goal To learn the various dribbling techniques that are necessary to advance the
ball against defensive players.
Description Players divide into eight groups and line up across from each other,
four lines on each side, along the sidelines on both sides of the court. The first
players in each line have a ball, and on the coach’s command, they dribble forward
toward the middle of the court, using a type of dribble specified by the coach (see
the upcoming list). When the players meet in the middle, they execute a crossover
dribble (or another dribble specified by the coach) and continue to the opposite
sideline, giving the ball to the next player in line. Repeat until all players have had
a turn.
In addition to the crossover dribble (see page 64), the players should work on
the following dribbles:
• Power dribble (see page 63)
• Speed dribble (the player dribbles as fast as he can without losing control of
the ball)
• Control dribble (the player dribbles deliberately under control)
• Hesitation dribble (the player advances forward with a speed dribble, then
takes one dribble backward before advancing forward again)
• A combination of the various types of dribbles
Variations
• Place cones where the players should perform each specified dribble, such as
the crossover.
• Add a defender so the drill becomes more gamelike.

93

E5585/ASEP/fig 6.1/429569/TammyP/R1
OFFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ TWO-BALL SHOOTING

Goal To learn to shoot the ball after moving to a spot and squaring up to face
the basket.
Description Players line up in two groups at the top of the key on both ends of the
court. The second and third players in line each have a ball. The first player in line
runs and touches the baseline and then moves to an appropriate place (the coach
specifies the type of shot to be made) in order to receive a pass from the second
player in line. The player catches the pass, pivots, and shoots the ball using proper
form. The player rebounds his own shot, takes a position at the end of the line, and
passes the ball up the line. The second player in line, who made the pass previously,
now runs to the baseline and moves to an appropriate place in order to receive a
pass from the third player in line. Repeat in this manner for 5 to 10 minutes or until
all players in line have executed a shot. Make sure the players take shots within
their range. Also, remind the players to keep all 10 toes pointed toward the basket.
Variations
• Do not use a ball to start the drill; have each player shoot an imaginary ball
after performing the movement.
• Have the players take one dribble either right or left before the shot.

E5585/ASEP/fig 6.2/429572/TammyP/R3-alw

94
OFFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ TWO-BALL CUTTING

Goal To practice making cuts to get open to receive a pass and then making a
move to score.
Description Players line up in groups of five at the top of the key on both ends of
the court. The second and third players in line each have a ball. The first player in
line executes a cut (V-cut, L-cut, or backdoor cut) to get the ball, which the second
player in line will pass. Once the player receives the pass, he turns and shoots. He
then rebounds his own shot, takes a position at the end of the line, and passes
the ball up the line. The second player in line, who made the pass previously, now
acts as the cutter and executes a cut to get the ball, which the third player in line
will pass. Repeat in this manner for 5 to 10 minutes or until all players in line have
executed a cut.
Variations
• Have each player begin with the V-cut, followed by the L-cut, and then the
backdoor cut. Perform the drill from the left side and then from the right side
of the court.
• Ask each player to perform various moves off the cut—for example, executing
a crossover dribble before the shot after catching the pass off the V-cut.

E5585/ASEP/fig 6.3/429562/TammyP/R1

95
OFFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ OFFENSIVE REBOUNDING

Goal To learn how to get into position and grab an offensive rebound.
Description Players line up in a single-file line at the block on one side of the basket.
The coach takes a shot, and the first player in line executes a V-cut or spin move to
get into the proper position to rebound the ball at the basket. (The coach should take
shots from different areas of the court to practice the rebounds for different types
of shots.) Once the player gets the rebound, she passes the ball back to the coach
and takes a position at the end of the line. Repeat until all players have had a turn.
Variations
• Have the players perform the offensive rebounding footwork without a shot.
• Add a defensive player to the drill.

➤ ON THE LINE

Goal To practice making free throws in game-winning situations.


Description Players divide into two even teams and line up on each sideline on one
half of the court. The first player in team A’s line shoots two free throws, then the first
player in team B’s line shoots two free throws. Continue in this fashion, alternating
between team A and team B, until all players have shot. The team with the most
total points is the winner. If the game is tied after all players from both teams have
shot, keep the same order of players and have a “sudden-death” shoot-off—the
first player from team A shoots one free throw, then the first player from team B
shoots one free throw, and so on. The first time the tie is broken after both teams
have shot, the game is over.
Variations
• To make the game easier, move the free-throw line up one to three feet.
• To make the game more difficult, require the winning team to make at least
four consecutive free throws in addition to making more free throws than its
opponent.

➤ FULL-COURT LAYUPS

Goal To practice making layups after performing the speed dribble.


Description Divide players into two groups, one group under each basket. The
first three players in each line have a ball. On command, the first player in each line
uses a right-handed speed dribble the length of the court and shoots a right-handed
layup. The second and third players under each basket will follow on command. After
each layup is shot, the first player in line without a ball rebounds the shot taken on
his end and then follows the player in front of him down the court for a layup. The
drill continues for one minute. Begin by asking the players to make 15 to 20 layups
in that time period; you can adjust this goal depending on the players’ skill level.

96
OFFENSIVE SKILLS

Variations
• Ask the players to speed dribble from half-court to the basket. In this variation,
the player shooting the layup will rebound his own ball, giving it to the next
player in line without one.
• Have players perform a left-handed speed dribble for a left-handed layup.

➤ FULL-COURT JUMPERS

Goal To work on making jump shots after receiving a pass.


Description Divide players into four groups, with one group in each corner of the
court. Start with two basketballs in opposite corners. On command, the first player
in each line with a ball will take a few dribbles forward, passing the ball to the other
end of the court. Each player follows her pass to the other end of the court for a
return pass for a jump shot. This player then goes to the end of the line, while the
passer on the same end rebounds the ball and continues the drill going the opposite
way. Start with a goal of five to seven made baskets in one minute; you can adjust
this according to skill level.
Variations
• Allow players to take several dribbles before passing the ball to the opposite
end of the court.
• Ask players to add a dribble to either the right or the left before each jump shot.

E5585/ASEP/fig 6.4/429575/TammyP/R1

97
OFFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ FIVE BALL

Goal To learn how to catch the ball on the move and come to a stop to shoot.
Description Divide players into four groups, with one group in each corner of
the court. On one end of the court, the first player in each group has a ball. On the
opposite end of the court, one player is positioned with a ball under, or just in front
of, the basket in between the two groups; from this end of the court, three players
make two passes while moving down the court for a layup at the opposite end.
The third player and the passer will then each receive a ball from the corners at the
opposite end for a jump shot. The player making the layup will grab his ball from
the net, turn, and pass in the opposite direction to one of the two corner players
who made passes for jumpers. These three players then travel to the opposite end,
making two passes for a layup along with two jump shots, and the drill continues. For
older age groups, start with a goal of 20 to 25 baskets in one minute; for younger
players, adjust the goal to 10 to 12 baskets.
Variations
• Allow players to dribble the ball several times before passing to a teammate
for the layup.
• Ask players to add a dribble to either the right or the left before each jump shot.

E5585/ASEP/fig 6.5/429576/TammyP/R1

98
OFFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ PERFECT LAYUPS

Goal To learn how to pass the ball while moving and to practice making layups.
Description Begin with three lines of players along the baseline. The first player in
the left line should have a ball (alternatively, the line on the right can begin with the
ball). The first three players move down the court while passing the ball. The player
on the left passes to the player in the middle, who passes back to the player on the
left; then, the player on the left once more passes to the player in the middle, who
this time makes a bounce pass to the player on the right for a layup. The player on
the left rebounds the ball and makes a two-hand overhead outlet pass to the middle
player, who has moved to the side of the player making the layup. This player con-
tinues the other way, making a baseball pass back to the next person in the right
line, who continues the drill. For older players, the goal is to make 25 points in one
minute; players get 2 points for a perfect layup (meaning the ball does not touch
the rim) and 1 point for a made layup. For younger players, adjust the goal to 10
to 12 points.
Variations
• Use only one ball to start the drill and add a second ball later.
• Ask the players to use bounce passes instead of chest passes.

E5585/ASEP/fig 6.6/429577/TammyP/R2-alw

99
OFFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ TWO-STEPPIN’

Goal To use pivots, drop steps, and jab steps to get free for shots.
Description Play 3v3 in either the full or half court depending on the age group.
When a player on the wing receives a pass, the player does either of the following:
1. Dribbles to the defender, stops, pivots, and shoots.
2. Uses a jab or drop step, then dribbles around a defender for a layup.
Two points are awarded if the player performs the pivot, jab, or drop step cor-
rectly and gets a shot off; an additional point is given for a made basket. One point
is awarded for any made basket, whether made off a pivot or jab or drop step. Play
to three points for the 5 to 6 age group, four points for the 7 to 8 age group, five
points for the 9 to 10 age group, six points for the 11 to 12 age group, and seven
points for the 13 to 14 age group.
Variations
• To make the game easier, use a chair or other object in place of the defender
so that the offensive player can get accustomed to the moves.
• To make the game more difficult, award the two “performance” points only on
made baskets, or don’t award any points for made baskets that did not come
off a pivot or jab or drop step.

➤ DRIVE-THROUGH

Goal To develop the ability to dribble under pressure.


Description Play 3v3 or 4v4 in either the full or half court depending on the age
group. Emphasize proper fundamentals, but place emphasis on dribbling under
pressure by awarding the offense two points for scores off drives, one point if the
offensive player can dribble the ball to the middle of the lane for a shot, and one
point for all other baskets.
Variations
• To make the game easier, limit the number of dribbles that can be made by
one player.
• To make the game more difficult, add another defensive player.

100
OFFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ IN MY DUST

Goal To use power dribbles and crossover dribbles to attack the basket.
Description Play 3v3 or 4v4 in either the full or half court depending on the age
group. Emphasize proper fundamentals, but place a special emphasis on effective
dribbling by awarding one point each for made baskets, power dribbles, and cross-
over dribbles. Players should use these types of dribbles only as appropriate within
the game situation. Points should not be awarded for ineffective or inappropriate use.
Variation To make the game more challenging, award points for only one specified
move. For example, to focus on the crossover dribble, award one point to players
for proper use of the crossover dribble, but require that they pass or shoot before
they can be awarded another point.

➤ PASSING CONTEST

Goal To set up good shots through passing.


Description Play 3v2 or 4v3 in either the full or half court depending on the age
group. To place the emphasis on setting up good shots, award the offense one point
for each successful pass and one point for each basket.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 3v1 or 4v2.
• To make the game more difficult, do any of the following: Play 3v3 or 3v4; award
two points for a particular pass of your choosing; require that players use only
a certain type of pass (i.e., chest, bounce, or overhead); or allow no dribbling.

➤ CLEANING THE GLASS

Goal To rebound using proper technique.


Description Play 2v2 in either the full or half court depending on the age group.
Each play begins with the coach shooting at the basket, intentionally missing the
shot. The two offensive players try to rebound and score, and the defensive players
also try to rebound. If the offense makes a basket or the defense gets the ball, the
play is over. Each basket or rebound is worth one point. Switch offense and defense
after five plays.
Variations
• To make the game easier, award two points for an offensive rebound.
• To make the game more challenging, require the offensive players to immedi-
ately shoot the ball, without a dribble, when they get the rebound.

101
OFFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ BUCKETMANIA

Goal To score as many baskets as possible using proper technique.


Description Play 3v2 in the half court. Give the three offensive players five minutes
to score as many baskets as possible against the two defensive players. After each
made basket, a defensive player will rebound the ball and return it to the offense.
After five minutes, switch the offense and defense, keeping one of the offensive
players on offense so that play remains 3v2. The new offense will have five minutes
to score as many baskets as possible.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 3v1 or 4v2.
• To make the game more difficult, do any of the following: Play 3v3 or 4v4; award
two points for a particular type of shot of your choosing; or require that play-
ers only take a certain type of shot (e.g., jump shot, layup, shot off a dribble).

➤ ROOM TO MOVE

Goal To create passing lanes and move


to open space for better ball movement.
Description Play 3v2 in the half or full
court depending on the age group. The
offense has the ball, and players pass and
then move to a place on the court—point,
wing, baseline, or low post—that is adja-
cent to the ball. This emphasizes spacing
by allowing the players to get to an open
spot so one defender cannot guard two
offensive players. Players can dribble, but
the emphasis should be on little dribbling
and crisp passing. Offensive players must
make 10 passes; after the 10th pass, they
can shoot and continue to shoot until they
score or the defense rebounds.
Award one point for each pass successfully received and one point for a basket.
Once a basket is made or the defense rebounds, begin again, this time with the two
defenders moving to offense.
E5585/ASEP/fig 6.7/429582/TammyP/R1
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 3v1.
• To make the game more difficult, play 3v3 or allow no dribbling.

102
OFFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ LIFE IN THE FAST LANE

Goal To convert fast break opportunities into baskets.


Description Play 2v4 using a full court specific to the age group. One of the two
offensive players takes a shot, but purposely misses it, to begin the game. The
defense rebounds and runs a fast break, making the outlet pass and filling the lanes.
The defense (which just converted from offense) attempts to stop the fast break.
Award two points for a well-executed break and one additional point for finishing it
off with a basket. Switch teams and repeat at the other end of the court.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 1v4 or 1v3.
• To make the game more difficult, play 3v4 or 4v4, or allow no dribbling.

➤ SCREEN DOOR

Goal To set effective screens to free up


teammates.
Description Play 3v2 in either the full or
half court depending on the age group.
The player with the ball should be posi-
tioned out on top (top of the key or circle
above the three-point line); one teammate
sets a screen for the other teammate, who
cuts around the screen and looks for a pass
from the player with the ball. The player
with the ball can call out “PR” (which sig-
nals to set a pick on the right side) or “PL”
(which signals to set a pick on the left side),
or the teammates can move on their own
without the call.
The offense has five turns and is
awarded two points for each successful screen and one point for each basket
scored directly off the screen. (A screen is successful if it frees the teammate from
her defender.) Reset the play after a shot is taken, whether the ball goes in or not.
E5585/ASEP/fig 6.8/429583/TammyP/R1
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 3v1.
• To make the game more difficult, play 3v3.

103
OFFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ PICKIN’ FOR POINTS

Goal To score off the pick-and-roll.


Description Play 3v2 in the half or full
court depending on the age group. The
player with the ball positions out on top
(top of the key or circle above the three-
point line), while one offensive player sets
a screen for the other offensive player. The
player who set the screen then rolls to
the basket, hand up, to receive the return
pass for the shot. Award the offense two
points for each successful pick-and-roll that
results in a made basket. Reset the play
after a shot is taken, whether the ball goes
in or not. Switch teams after five plays.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 3v1.
• To make the game more difficult, play 3v3.
E5585/ASEP/fig 6.10/429586/TammyP/R2-alw
➤ RETURN TO SENDER

Goal To score off the give-and-go play.


Description Play 3v3 in the half or full
court depending on the age group. When
offensive players have the ball, they look
for an open teammate and make a pass.
After a pass, the player cuts to the basket,
looking for the return pass and the shot.
Shots must be taken within five feet of
the basket. Baskets scored directly off the
give-and-go count for two points; other
baskets count for one point. Reset the
offense after each play. The offense has
five turns, then offense and defense are
switched.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 3v2.
• To make the game more difficult, award one point for offensive rebounds, which
emphasizes blocking out by the defenders.
E5585/ASEP/fig 6.9/429584/TammyP/R1

104
OFFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ SECONDS TO GO

Goal To score off an inbounds play.


Description Play 5v3 in the half court. Five seconds are placed on the clock, and
an inbounds play is run. Award the offense one point for each basket scored before
five seconds elapse.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 5v2.
• To make the game more difficult, play 5v4 or 5v5.

➤ CUTTHROAT

Goal To learn how to move, square up, and thank the passer in a gamelike situation.
Description This is a very intense and fast 4v4 drill. Four players set up on offense
against four defenders; a third group of four is waiting on the sidelines. To stay on
offense, players must follow these three rules:
1. Every player must square up on each catch; this means the player must assume
a triple-threat position with the ball on the hip and the shooting foot ahead. If
the defense is playing very tight, be more lenient; even an attempt to square
up is accepted.
2. Every player must move after each pass—cutting to the basket, screening away,
and screening on the ball are all acceptable, but the player cannot just stand.
3. When a player makes a basket, she must thank the passer; if the coach made
the pass that resulted in a basket, the player must thank the coach.
If a rule is broken, that offensive team must leave the court. The defensive team
goes to offense, and the new team comes in on defense. Play for a set period of
time (four minutes is appropriate) or to a certain number of points.
Variations
• Begin with just the square-up part of the drill before adding the other two rules.
• To make the drill more difficult, add other rules, such as limiting each player
to two dribbles, dictating that all players must touch the ball before a shot is
taken, or not allowing the offense to shoot until a ball screen occurs.

105
7 Defensive Skills

Playing defense is part instinct, part effort, and part technique. Players can
improve their instincts by learning technique, practicing plays, and getting repetition.
This chapter focuses on the defensive techniques that your players must learn in order
to succeed in youth basketball. Again, remember to use the IDEA approach to teaching
skills—introduce, demonstrate, and explain the skill, and attend to players as they
practice the skill. Also, if you aren’t familiar with basketball skills, you may want to
watch a video about this subject so you can see how to perform the skills correctly.
Individual defensive skills are sometimes less appreciated than individual offensive
skills, but they are just as important. To compete successfully, your players need to
learn the basics of player-to-player defense.

Defensive Stance
The defensive stance—commonly referred to as the
ready or basketball position—is the most basic of all
defensive skills. It is the positioning that defensive
players should strive to maintain at all times. In the
ready position, the feet are shoulder-width apart or
wider, and the knees are bent and out from the body
(see figure 7.1). The hands and arms are above the
waist to make the player seem as big as possible. This
makes it tougher for offensive players to maneuver
around the defender.

FIGURE 7.1 Basic defensive stance.

106
Defensive Skills 107

Defensive Footwork
From the defensive stance, a defender must be able to slide his feet and maintain
an arm’s distance from an opponent who is attempting to drive or cut to the basket.
Players should stand in the ready position, with the knees bent, the rear down, and
the back erect; the arms should be held out above the waist. The player should move
the leg nearest the intended direction about 2 feet (61 cm) to that side (see figure
7.2a) and then slide the other foot until the feet are once again shoulder-width apart
(see figure 7.2b). The player should use short, quick steps, with his weight evenly dis-
tributed on the balls of the feet. Remind the player to keep the toes pointed forward
and to never cross the feet.

a b

FIGURE 7.2 Defensive slide.

COACHING TIP Younger players tend to cross their feet when attempting
to move sideways on a slide. To help prevent this, you can have your players
visualize holding a broomstick between their feet that will not allow the feet
to cross.

Defensive Body Positioning


To guard a player with the ball effectively, the defensive player’s stance and body
positioning are the most important elements. When guarding an opponent with the
ball, the defensive player should maintain the defensive stance, as described previ-
ously, with one hand down to help protect against the crossover dribble and the other
hand up in the passing lane to deflect a pass attempt (see figure 7.3 on page 108).
108 Coaching Youth Basketball

FIGURE 7.3 Defender’s body positioning FIGURE 7.4 Defender’s body positioning
when guarding an opponent with the ball. when turning an opponent with the ball.

COACHING TIP Teach your players not to reach toward the dribbler. Reach-
ing will cause defensive players to get off balance and allow the dribbler to
easily get around them. Reaching may also cause the defender to foul the
dribbler.

When the defender is in a situation where he must turn the offensive player, such
as when the offensive player is working to dribble the ball up the court, the defender’s
foot positioning will change. The player must position the foot closest to the rim line
(the imaginary line that runs down the center of the court from rim to rim) at least
an arm’s length away from the offensive player’s inside foot to help force the dribbler
to the baseline (see figure 7.4). This will force the dribbler to go to the outside or to
the baseline. The defensive player’s eyes should stay focused on the waist area of the
dribbler so that the defender does not get faked out of position by watching the ball
or the head and shoulders of the offensive player.

Steals
Stealing refers to intercepting the ball when a pass is made or knocking the ball away
from the dribbler. Most often, a steal occurs when a pass is made from one offensive
player to another and the defender steps in the path of the pass. When attempting to
steal the ball, the defensive player must anticipate where and when the pass will be
thrown and get the hand in the passing lane. Stealing the ball from dribblers is often
difficult because they can protect the ball using their body. Dribblers also commonly
draw a foul on the defender because the defender’s reach on the dribbler will often
Defensive Skills 109

create contact with the offensive player. This also produces a poor defensive stance
because the defender’s balance is poor when reaching for the ball.

Deflections
Deflections are a big part of the defensive game. A deflection can be a batted ball,
kicked ball, or partially blocked shot (see Blocking Shots on page 111)—anytime
the defensive player gets a touch on the ball in any form. To create a deflection, the
defender needs to be in the proper defensive position when guarding the offensive
player with the ball; the defender should have one hand up in the passing lane and
one hand down to stop the dribble. The defender should avoid fouling. Deflections
are crucial to the defense because they can disrupt the offense even if a steal does not
occur. A deflection is often the result of outstanding hustle by a player; in fact, the
coach can define “playing hard” in terms of deflections. Be sure to chart and keep
track of deflections throughout a game so you have an idea of how many deflections
your team is getting. This will enable you to associate those deflections with playing
well or winning the game.

Drawing the Charge


Drawing a charge is a momentum changer and is another great example of the
defender playing hard. A charge occurs when an offensive player drives hard into the
body of a nonmoving defender. The defender has a right to take the space in front
of an offensive player if he gets to that space before the offensive player. When the
defender moves into the path of the offensive player (see figure 7.5a), he must estab-
lish a set position (see figure 7.5b). If the offensive player fails to stop and runs into
the defender, a charge should be called by the officials, and the ball will be rewarded
to the defensive team.

a b

FIGURE 7.5 Drawing the charge.


110 Coaching Youth Basketball

The help-side defender is usually the player in position to take a charge by sliding
into the path of the offensive player advancing to the basket. The defender may need
to sell the charge to the officials by falling backward and landing on his rear (keeping
his hands up as he falls back in order to avoid wrist injuries).

Closing Out
Closing out is an instrumental part of the defensive game. A closeout is simply defined
as making the shooter shoot the ball with some defensive pressure. A closeout is per-
formed when the defender comes forward (or from the help side or off her player)
to guard the shooter. The defender sprints about two-thirds of the distance to the
shooter (see figure 7.6a) and then moves into the shooter by taking short, choppy
steps while keeping her hands high and her rear down for a low center of gravity (see
figure 7.6b). In this position, the defender is also prepared if the shooter decides to
ball fake and then put the ball on the floor to dribble.

FIGURE 7.6 Closing out.


Defensive Skills 111

Defenders use two types of closeouts—the long closeout and the short closeout. The
difference between these two types relates to how close the defender gets to the player
he’s guarding. The long closeout should be used on a good shooter; in this case, the
defender is trying to get the offensive player to put the ball on the floor rather than
shoot. On the long closeout, the defender advances close enough to the shooter to
force the shooter to either take a difficult shot or put the ball on the floor. The short
closeout is performed when the defender is guarding a player who may be a better
driver than shooter. In this instance, the defender does not get as close to the shooter
because the defender needs to guard against the drive more than the outside shot.

Blocking Shots
Blocking a shot is when a defensive player jumps up and stops a shot in the air taken
by the offensive team. This is a skill that not all players, especially those in younger
age groups, should use because a foul is often called on this action if the defensive
player cannot execute it properly. The defensive player’s size, jumping ability, and
the ability to properly time the jump are the main factors in determining the quality
of this skill. When going for a block (or a deflection), the defender should maintain
the defensive stance until the ball leaves the shooter’s hand (see figure 7.7a). If the
defender jumps too soon, the offensive player can easily draw the foul. When going
for the block, the defender should do so with an open hand and work to keep the
ball in bounds (see figure 7.7b).

a b

FIGURE 7.7 Going for a block.


112 Coaching Youth Basketball

The best player to block a shot is the player on the help side, not the player guard-
ing the ball. This help-side defender has a much better chance to block the shot
because he can more easily time her jump to the release of the ball. This player also
has a much better chance of blocking the shot without having a foul called on him.

Defensive Rebounding
When the offensive team shoots the ball, the defensive team will try to gain posses-
sion by rebounding the missed shot. The technique for rebounding defensively is
similar to offensive rebounding in that the player must always first be in the ready
position. When preparing to go for the rebound, the player’s hands should be above
the shoulders so that the player can achieve maximum height on the jump.
However, for defensive rebounds, players must locate their opponents first (see
figure 7.8a), achieve an inside position (see figure 7.8b), and box out their opponent
(see figure 7.8c)—using a front or rear pivot to get into a position between their
opponent and the basket and putting their rear in contact with the opponent. This
is done to ensure that the offensive player is behind the defensive player and so that
the defensive player can see the flight of the ball when the shot is taken. A front pivot
allows the defensive rebounder to turn while watching the offensive player move
toward the rebound. A rear pivot is used to move into the path of the offensive player
without the same visual contact. Encourage defenders to use whichever method gets
them in position in front of the offense, sealing the offensive player away from the
basket. Once contact is established with an opposing player, the defensive rebounder
wants to maintain that contact until releasing to jump for the rebound.
For rebounding free throws on defense, you should place your best rebounders
in the positions closest to the basket because this is where these rebounds generally
go. Defenders should be in a balanced stance with the knees bent; the hands should

a b c

FIGURE 7.8 Defensive rebounding.


Defensive Skills 113

be held above the waist in anticipation of the missed free throw. As the ball hits the
rim, the defenders should step toward the free-throw line to block out the offensive
rebounder next to them. You should also designate a player to block out the shooter.

Communication
Communication on the basketball court is an essential part of the game, especially on
defense, and you need to address this topic with your team. Communication involves
talking to teammates in a positive and helpful manner while the game is being played.
Most players have a difficult time communicating while playing. However, commu-
nication among teammates helps your team play at a higher intensity level and play
harder than they would normally.
Communication on defense is constant. Here are some examples of instances in
which communication is key:
• Defensive players should call out “Shot!” when the shooter shoots the ball so
that all their teammates know to block out and go for the ball.
• Defenders should call out “Ball!” when guarding the ball on the defensive tran-
sition, indicating that the next player should guard the next available offensive
player closest to the basket.
• Defensive players should call out “Help!” when they are the help-side defender,
offering help to the defender guarding the ball if the offensive player gets
around him.
• Defensive players should call out “Screen!” when they are guarding the player
setting the screen. This lets everyone (especially the teammate being screened)
know that a screen is coming.
• Defenders should call out “Switch,” “Slide through,” “Double team,” or “Go
behind” to describe how the screen should be defended.
• Players should call out “Man,” “Zone,” or “Press” after their team has made a
basket and is setting up the defense.

Awareness
Awareness is simply anticipation of what might happen next on the court. Although
somewhat intuitive, awareness can be taught and is a great skill for each player to have.
Defensively, awareness is thinking about what the offensive team might do next and
being prepared for this action. For example, guarding a player on the opposite side of
the court from the ball puts a defender in help-side position; being aware of this and
taking away the player’s path to the ball could lead to a steal or a deflection. In other
instances, awareness may also lead to taking a charge, closing out on the shooter, or
establishing good rebounding position. As a coach, make sure you stress awareness,
citing such examples whenever the opportunity presents itself on the court.
8 Defensive Tactics

Good defensive play inhibits the opponent by limiting the number of uncon-
tested shots. Good defense not only reduces scoring opportunities for the opponent,
but also opens them up for your own team. For your team to have an effective defense,
your players must use correct defensive technical skills as discussed in the previous
chapter. In addition, your players must work together with teammates to use sound
defensive tactical skills based on the game situation.
In this chapter, we focus on several aspects of defensive tactics: coordinating a team
defense, playing on and off the ball, playing the post, helping out, defending against
screens, cutting off passing lanes, and using specific defenses.

Coordinating a Team Defense


The two main types of defenses played in youth basketball are man-to-man defense
and zone defense. In man-to-man defense, the defensive player is responsible for a
specific offensive player (see figure 8.1), while at the same time, the player must be
alert to situations where he can help his teammates and stop the offensive team from
scoring. In zone defense, each defender covers an area instead of a specific offensive
player—for example, in the commonly used 2-3 zone, two players cover the wings
and high-post area, and three players cover the baseline and middle areas (see figure
8.2). Younger players should primarily be taught man-to-man defense. This type of
defense provides players with the basic skills necessary for learning zone defense as
they move into older age groups or progress in skill.

114
Defensive Skills 115

FIGURE 8.1 Man-to-man defense. FIGURE 8.2 2-3 zone defense.

E5585/ASEP/fig 8.1/429607/TammyP/R1 E5585/ASEP/fig 8.2/429608/TammyP/R1


Jump Ball Strategies
The defensive jump ball situation can provide your team with a possession if played
correctly. If you know that there is little chance to get the tip, then your team must
attempt to force the opponent to tip the ball to the tipper’s weak side—the side
of the court where it would be the most difficult to tip the ball (this would be to
the right and to the back for right-handed players). To help do this, you should
position a player on each side of the offensive player where the tipper can most
easily tip the ball. This will force the tipper to tip the ball at another player in a
more difficult position.

Playing On and Off the Ball


When using a man-to-man defense, playing “off the ball” and playing “on the ball”
are two basic concepts that your players must be aware of. Certain rules apply when
guarding a player with the ball versus guarding players without the ball.

On the Ball
Playing “on the ball” simply refers to defending the offensive player with the ball.
When playing on the ball, as the offensive player begins to dribble, the defender should
react by sliding the feet and maintaining an arm’s distance from the opponent (see
figure 8.3a on page 116). The defender should try to beat the offensive player to the
spot that the player wants to reach. Moreover, if the defender can get the offensive
116 Coaching Youth Basketball

player to stop and pick up the ball, the defender can then move closer and crowd the
offensive player, blocking the passing lanes and applying extensive pressure with the
arms (see figure 8.3b). When playing on the ball, players should also strive to maintain
focus on the opponent’s midsection; if they watch the ball or their opponent’s head
or feet, they are likely to react to a fake that will put them out of position.
More advanced defenders can focus on four defensive strategies when playing
defense on the ball. In each of these strategies, the defender should establish a half-
body position against the dribbler in order to dictate the dribbler’s next move. Rather
than squaring up against his opponent, the defender splits the offensive player in
half (see figure 8.4).

a b

FIGURE 8.3 On-the-ball defense.

FIGURE 8.4 Defensive half-body position.


Defensive Tactics 117

Turning the dribbler Defenders who establish a half-body position to either side
ahead of the dribbler can force the dribbler to turn or reverse direction. This makes it
much more difficult for the dribbler to find an open teammate for the pass because
the dribbler is concerned with the defender.
Forcing the dribbler to the sideline When a defensive player forces the dribbler
to dribble toward the sideline, the dribbler can pass in only one direction. A defender
can do this by working for position a half body to the inside of the court, with the
inside foot (the one closer to the middle of the court) forward and the outside foot
back. This technique limits the offensive player to one side of the court and makes
the offensive team work much harder to score.
Forcing the dribbler to the middle By taking position a half body to the outside
of the court, a defender can force a dribbler to the middle. This strategy will move
the dribbler toward one of the defender’s teammates off the ball.
Forcing the dribbler to use the weak hand By overplaying the strong hand,
defenders can force the dribbler to use the weak hand. Defenders can overplay the
strong hand by being a half body to the dribbler’s strong-hand side.

Off the Ball


Playing “off the ball” simply means guarding an offensive player who does not have
the ball. Defending an opponent without the ball is just as important as guarding
a player with the ball, but it is a bit more complicated. When playing off the ball,
defensive players need to apply the defensive concept of ball-you-man, as shown in
figure 8.5, which simply means that a triangle is created between the offensive player
with the ball, you (the defender), and the offensive player whom you are guarding.

FIGURE 8.5 Ball-you-man positioning.


118 Coaching Youth Basketball

Defenders should also position themselves so that they can see the ball (and know
if they need to come and help a teammate on a pass or drive), and they must keep
track of a moving opponent (their player), who may be trying to get open to receive
a pass. The closer an opponent is to the ball, the closer the defender should be to
that opponent. The farther the ball is from an opponent, the farther away a defender
can play that opponent and be able to give help to the teammate guarding the ball.
Defenders must also be able to move quickly as the ball is passed from one offensive
player to another and must be able to adjust their position in relationship to the ball
and the player they are guarding.

Denial Position
A player should use the denial position when his opponent is one pass away from
the ball. The space between two offensive players where a pass can be made is called
the passing lane. A defender wants to have an arm and leg in the passing lane when
guarding a player who is one pass away (see figure 8.6). This denial position allows
the defender to establish the ball-you-man relationship and discourages the offensive
player with the ball from attempting a pass.

FIGURE 8.6 Denial position.

Open Position
When offensive players are two or more passes away from the ball, the defensive player
wants to establish an open position that still maintains the ball-you-man relation-
ship. In the open position, the defender points to the ball with one hand and to the
opponent with the other hand (see figure 8.7). Using peripheral vision, the defender
moves to react as the ball penetrates toward the basket (to help out on the drive) or
moves into denial position if the offensive player cuts hard to receive a pass.
FIGURE 8.7 Open position.

Defensive Techniques On and Off the Ball


Players must remember that court position and defensive stance are two of the
most important techniques when playing defense regardless of whether the player
they are guarding has the ball. However, there are some things that your players
should be aware of and should ask themselves when they are playing specifically
on or off the ball.
On the Ball
• Am I in ready position and alert?
• Am I an arm’s distance from my player (the ball handler) and able to put
pressure on his ability to shoot, pass, or drive?
• Is my player close enough to attempt a good shot?
• Am I close enough to the player to prevent an easy shot?
• Am I too close, so the opponent can drive around me?
• Will a teammate be able to help me if the player beats me with the dribble?
Off the Ball
• Am I in proper position on the help side so that I can see both the ball and
the player I am guarding?
• Is my player in a position to cut to the ball side and receive a pass?
• Can I get to my player if the ball is passed to him for a shot?
• Am I too close, so the opponent can make a cut to the ball?
• Am I in proper position so I can help my teammate guarding the offensive
player with the ball in case he attempts to drive to the basket?

119
120 Coaching Youth Basketball

Playing the Post


The post area refers to anywhere in the free-throw lane area; the high post is the area
near the free-throw line, the mid post is the area halfway down the lane, and the low
post is the area located closest to the basket. Playing defense in the post area is dif-
ferent than playing defense on the perimeter (the area outside the lane). The defense
will usually try to keep the ball out of the post area because it is much easier for the
offensive team to score in this area. Players should defend the post offensive player
based on her position and her ability. The first method is to front the offensive post
player to completely deny the pass into the offensive post (see figure 8.8a). To do
this correctly, the help-side defensive player must be in a position to stop the lob pass
over the defensive player who is in the fronting position. The second method is to
play directly behind the post player (see figure 8.8b). This method will allow the ball
to be thrown into the post player but is intended to prevent that player from getting
a shot in front of the basket. This is the best method to use when the offensive post
player is not a good turnaround shooter, and it is an effective method for blocking out
the offensive player. The third way is to play on one side or the other of the offensive
player in a partial fronting position (see figure 8.8c). This will keep the ball from
entering the post and still allow a good position for boxing out.

Helping Out
No matter how well your players position themselves on the court and communicate
with each other on defense, an offensive player will at times be open. When this occurs,
your players must know how to respond based on what kind of help is needed, and
each player must be in a position to help when and where needed. For example, if one
of your players spots an opponent wide open under the basket waving for a teammate
to pass the ball, that defender should leave an assigned opponent who is farther from
the basket and sprint to try to prevent the pass. On the other hand, if a dribbler gets
by a defender and is headed for a layup, the defensive player closest to the dribbler
between the dribbler and the basket should immediately move in to cut off the lane
to the hoop. This can cause the offensive player to commit a charging foul, throw the
ball away, or travel. The most important thing for defenders to know is where the ball
is located so they can be in a position to help stop the ball, if needed. Whatever the
case, the defender who has been beaten, or who loses an offensive player and sees
that recovery is impossible, should shout, “Help!” All four teammates should be ready
to respond if you have effectively taught them this very important defensive tactic.
On a related note, each player must also know how to properly cover gaps in the
defense. Everywhere on the floor, whether it be a man-to-man defense or a zone
defense, there are gaps—spaces between two defensive players—that must be covered
by the defense. A good offense will try to dribble the ball in those gaps. The defenders
must react quickly to this and cover the gaps by sliding the feet and trying to take the
charge on the dribbler or causing a turnover.
a

FIGURE 8.8 Defending the post: (a) denying, (b) playing behind, and (c) partially fronting.

121
122 Coaching Youth Basketball

Defending Against Screens


A screen is used by an offensive player to free up a teammate by obstructing the path
of the defender. Screens can be used on defenders playing on the ball or on defend-
ers who are guarding an offensive player away from the ball. Defensive players must
be able to defend the screening action in order to stop a score. Three ways to defend
against a screen are to fight over the top of the screen, to slide behind it, and to switch.

COACHING TIP Players need to communicate and help one another when
defending against screens. The defender on the opponent who is setting the
screen must alert the defender being screened by calling out the direction
of the screen: “Screen right!” or “Screen left!”

Fight Over the Top


A player should fight over the top of a screen when there is room for the defender to
get between the screener and the screener’s teammate (see figure 8.9). The defender
whom the screen was set on should let the teammate guarding the screener know
to stay with that opponent by shouting, “Through!” or “Over!” The defender being
screened should work to get through the screen by first getting a foot over the screen
and then the remainder of the body.

Slide Behind
Sliding behind the screen should be used when guarding a poor shooter or a quick
driver, or when the screen is set too far away from the basket for the offensive player
to shoot the ball. When an opponent sets a screen on a player guarding a quick driver
or when the action is outside the opponent’s shooting range, the player being screened
should slide behind the screen by moving under the opponent on the basket side,
rather than on top (see figure 8.10).

FIGURE 8.9 Fighting over the top of FIGURE 8.10 Sliding behind a screen.
a screen.

E5585/ASEP/fig 8.9/429619/TammyP/R2-alw E5585/ASEP/fig 8.10/429621/TammyP/R2-alw


Defensive Tactics 123

Switch
When teammates are of equal size and
defensive ability, the easiest defensive move
against a screen is to switch opponents. As
the offensive player dribbles around the
screen, the defender guarding the screener
will switch to guarding the dribbler, and
the defender guarding the dribbler will now
guard the screener (see figure 8.11). This
is the best method for stopping the drib-
bler from going to the basket; however, it
does open up the court for the pass to the
screener. If size and defensive ability differ,
switching should be the last option because
it allows the offense to take advantage of a
mismatch. Players who switch should call
out the screen by yelling, “Switch!” As play- FIGURE 8.11 Switching on a screen.
ers switch, one player must aggressively get
in position to deny a pass to the cutter (the
screener who rolls to the basket) while the E5585/ASEP/fig 8.11/429622/TammyP/R2-alw
other player gets in position on the ball side
of the screener.

Switching Defenses
Although teams typically play either a standard man-to-man or zone defense
(described on page 114) throughout a game, switching your defense is a good way
to cause some problems for the opponent’s offense. For example, if the offense has
a certain rhythm going against your man-to-man defense, you may want to change
what you are doing defensively. This may mean changing to a zone defense or a press
(see Pressing Defenses below) in an attempt to take the offense out of their rhythm
against your man-to-man defense. Or it may mean doing something different against
the screens that the offense sets. For example, you may want to try using a double
team on all screens instead of switching on screens, because this will be something
that the offense may not be ready to play against. Or you might change the way your
defenders are guarding the players in the post or at the wings. Fronting the post play-
ers to prevent the quick pass inside or denying the pass to the wings may disrupt
the offense. All of these adjustments can be made without too much difficulty and
without causing too much confusion for your players.

Pressing Defenses
Regardless of the type of defensive team you are coaching, you must have some type
of pressing defense available in case your team is behind in the late stages of a game
and needs to force the action in an effort to score some quick points. Pressing defenses
124 Coaching Youth Basketball

are usually a gamble; they involve using traps to disrupt the offense and steal the
ball. Many times the press will not lead to steals immediately, but if given a chance
to work, over time the press will have some effect on the offense. Depending on your
personnel, some pressing defenses that you may choose to run include the following:
• 1-2-1-1 or diamond zone press. This is a full-court press with one player on
the ball, one player at each free-throw elbow, one player at midcourt, and one
player back in the opposite lane. The player on the ball and a player at one
elbow will set a trap when the ball is inbounded.
• Man-to-man press. This is a man-to-man defense starting in the full court; each
player guards his offensive player from one end to the other.
• Various types of three-quarter and half-court presses. For example, the 1-2-
1-1 can be condensed to three-quarter court; the player on the ball moves back
to the top of the key, the two players at the elbows move back to the half-court
line, and so on. A 2-2-1 three-quarter zone press—with two players at the free-
throw elbows, two players at half-court, and one player back in the opposite
lane—can also be quite useful. In this zone press, traps occur at the half-court
sidelines and corner baselines. Finally, an example of a half-court zone press
is the 1-3-1, with one player at half-court, three players along the free-throw
line and free-throw line extended, and one player in the lane.
The best strategy is to choose one type of press for your team rather than try to
teach too many presses. If you have a shorter, quicker team, the diamond press or
a full-court man press should be a good fit for your players’ abilities. If you have a
slower team, you may want to use a three-quarter zone press that is less of a gamble,
such as a 2-2-1 or a 1-2-2. The 2-2-1 is one of the more common presses used at the
youth level (see figure 8.12).

FIGURE 8.12 The 2-2-1 three-quarter zone press.

E5585/ASEP/fig 8.12/429627/TammyP/R1
Defensive Tactics 125

Defense in Special Situations


Defending special situations such as out-of-bounds plays is something that your team
needs to learn and practice. Using a zone defense to defend the out-of-bounds play
is usually the best strategy because it helps defenders avoid being caught off guard by
multiple screens set by the offense. If the ball is taken out of bounds on the side, your
regular defense may be the best route; however, you must ensure that your players
communicate screens and always know where the inbounder is located when the ball
is taken out of bounds underneath the basket or on the sideline. Defenders sometimes
forget about the inbounder, and this player is often left open after inbounding the ball.
Another special situation that a team should be prepared for is when the offense
goes into a delay game. In this situation, the defense should know when to foul in
order to stop the clock and how to double-team the ball at any place on the court.
Communication on the floor is imperative so that all defenders know what to do in
such situations.
9 Defensive Drills

Defensive drills are the basis for developing a good defensive team.
Defense is the one skill that will remain constant during a game, regardless of whether
that game is on the road or at home. Defense is not dependent on the ball going
through the basket—rather, defense depends on the effort of each player. The founda-
tion for good defense is the defensive stance and slide, which should be worked on
daily. As you progress with your team, two-on-two, three-on-three, and four-on-four
drills can be used to bring the defense together in team defense situations.
For access to some of these drills online, visit the following website: www.Human
Kinetics.com/CoachingYouthBasketball5E-DefensiveDrills. Such drills are indicated
by this symbol in the outside margin of the text:

Additional defensive drills are provided in chapters 10 to 14; refer to the practice
sessions there for even more options.

126
DEFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ DEFENSIVE SLIDE, SIDELINE TO SIDELINE

Goal To learn how to slide effectively in a defensive stance.


Description Players line up perpendicular to the sideline, and on the coach’s com-
mand, they assume the basic defensive stance and use slides to move across the
floor. Players’ arms are held out wide, and the players slap the floor on each slide
to help emphasize staying low. Once all players have reached the opposite sideline,
repeat the drill. Continue for three to seven minutes, depending on the age group.
Points of emphasis include pointing the foot in the direction of the slide (for
example, when sliding to the right, the right foot should be pointed to the opposite
sideline), moving the foot that is closer to the direction of the slide first (for example,
when sliding to the right, the right foot should move first), and making the first step
a big step.
Variations
• Start with only one or two slides so players get the idea of how to execute a
proper slide.
• Work on the defensive slides while incorporating a slide-run-slide technique.

➤ DEFENDING SHOTS

Goal To learn the best method for putting pressure on the shooter.
Description Players divide into two groups and line up at the baseline at one end
of the court. The first player in one line has a ball, and on the coach’s command, this
player dribbles to the basket at the opposite end of the court while the first player in
the other line defends him. (The coach designates what type of shot will be taken.)
When the player with the ball takes a shot, the defender uses proper technique to
block or deflect the shot. The defender rebounds the ball, and both players jog back
up the court along the sidelines. The defender gives the ball to the first player in his
original line, and both players take a place at the end of their original lines. Repeat
until all players have had a turn at defending the shot.
Variations
• Begin the drill at half-court.
• Add crossover dribbles so the defender also works on drop-stepping against
the dribbler before the shot is taken.

127
DEFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ DEFENDING THE DRIBBLE

Goal To learn to defend a dribbler in a full-court situation.


Description Players divide into two groups and line up at the baseline at one end
of the court. One player has the ball and acts as the offensive player, and the other
player acts as the defender. The offensive player moves down the court in a zigzag
pattern, using the sidelines as boundaries. The player dribbles the ball at half speed
so that the defender can practice the proper mechanics of guarding. Once play-
ers reach the opposite baseline, the offensive player rolls the ball back to the next
player in line, and two more players move down the court. Repeat until all players
have had a turn.
Throughout the drill, the defender must keep his head lower than the offensive
player’s shoulders. Also, the defender’s hand on the same side as his lead foot should
be down to discourage the crossover; the other hand should be above his waist to
defend the passing lanes.
Variations
• Have players switch offensive and defensive positions at half-court.
• Keep track of the number of times the defender can make the offensive drib-
bler change directions.

E5585/ASEP/fig 9.2/429643/TammyP/R1

128
DEFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ DEFENSIVE REBOUNDING

Goal To learn the technique for block-


ing out against an offensive player.
Description Players divide into four
groups; two groups are positioned at
the baseline on both sides of the basket,
and the other two groups are positioned
at the free-throw line directly in front of
the other lines. The first player in one
of the lines under the basket has a ball
and passes it to the first player in the line
directly in front of him. This player shoots
the ball; then, the shooter and the first
player in the other line at the free-throw
line both go for the rebound. The first
two players in the lines at the baseline act as defensive rebounders; they screen out
and go for the ball. After the rebound is secured, the ball is returned to the line along
the baseline where the drill was originally started, and all players take a position at the
E5585/ASEP/fig 9.3/429644/TammyP/R1
end of their lines. Repeat until all players have had a turn at defensive rebounding.
Variations
• To increase the focus on learning proper technique, start with just two groups,
one line on the baseline and one line at the free-throw line.
• Allow the offensive players to take one dribble right or left before the shot.

➤ FOUR-ON-FOUR BLOCKOUT

Goal To learn how to block out both on


the ball and away from the shooter.
Description Four defenders huddle at the
free-throw line with their hands draped over
one another’s shoulders. Four offensive play-
C

ers—two guards and two wings—are posi-


tioned on the court within shooting range.
On a count of “1, 2, 3,” the defenders yell
“Box out!” three times for emphasis. The
coach passes the ball to one of the offensive
players, who immediately takes a shot. The
defenders then concentrate only on blocking
out and getting the rebound. The sequence
is then repeated. After a designated amount
of time, offense and defense switch.
Variations
E5585/ASEP/fig
• Start with two-on-two, then three-on-three, before 9.4/429645/TammyP/R1
finally moving to four-on-four.
• Allow the offensive players to take one dribble right or left before the shot.
129
DEFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ THREE-PLAYER RUN AND SLIDE

Goal To learn how to defend a quicker player who is dribbling the ball.
Description Start with one defensive player guarding one offensive player at the
baseline; a third player is positioned on the ball side of the rim. The offensive player
dribbles to the sideline, and the defender slides to cut the dribbler off. The offensive
player then pivots and passes to the third player, who is a step behind the passer at
this point. After the ball is passed, the new ball handler dribbles hard to the opposite
sideline at a 45-degree angle. The defender turns and sprints to get in front of this
new dribbler at the opposite sideline. At this point, the new dribbler passes back
to the original dribbler, who is on the ball side of the rim and one step behind the
dribbler. Continue the drill with the same defender for four sideline cutoffs; then
rotate positions so each player has an opportunity to be the defender.
Variations
• Begin with just a one-on-one situation in which the dribbler dribbles hard to
the opposite sideline and the defender must run and slide to catch the offen-
sive dribbler.
• Once the dribbler has reached half-court, have the offensive player try to score
a basket.

E5585/ASEP/fig 9.5/429646/TammyP/R1

130
DEFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ FOUR-PLAYER RUN AND TRAP

Goal To learn to trap the dribbler.


Description Start with one defensive player guarding one offensive player at the
baseline; a second offensive player and his defender are positioned on the ball side
of the rim. The offensive player dribbles to the sideline, and his defender slides to
cut the dribbler off. At this point, the second defender leaves his own opponent to
trap the dribbler. The offensive player pivots and attempts to break the trap by pass-
ing to his teammate, who is a step behind the passer at this point. After the ball is
passed, the new ball handler dribbles hard to the opposite sideline at a 45-degree
angle. The defenders turn and sprint to get in front of and trap this new dribbler
at the opposite sideline. At this point, the new dribbler passes back to the original
dribbler, who is on the ball side of the rim and one step behind the dribbler. The
drill continues with the same defenders for four sideline traps. Each player should
have a turn on defense to work on the trap.
Variations
• Work on the trap in a two-on-one situation with two defenders trapping one
offensive player on the sideline.
• Once the ball has crossed the half-court line, have the two offensive players
try to score against the two defensive players.

E5585/ASEP/fig 9.6/429647/TammyP/R3-alw

131
DEFENSIVE SKILLS

➤ CHAMPIONS

Goal To learn to close out on the shooter from the help position.
Description One defensive player starts in good help-side position at the elbow
(the gap) with an offensive player on the wing. The coach has the ball at the top of
the key. The coach passes to the wing, and the defensive player closes out. The wing
passes the ball back to the coach, and the defensive player reacts by jumping back
to the gap at the elbow (a). The coach then dribbles to the wing as the offensive
player cuts to the block. The defensive player denies and then fronts the offensive
player when the ball is on the wing. The coach then reverses the ball to a new player
who has stepped in at the top of the key. As the ball is reversed, the defensive player
jumps out and up to deny it to the post (b). The offense should make these passes
from the top of the key to the wing, and so on, a couple of times until the coach slaps
the ball; then the offensive player on the block sprints to the opposite wing as the
player at the top of the key steps back out of the drill. The defensive player stays on
the help side until the coach skips the ball to the opposite wing. At this point, the
defensive player closes out on the player who receives the ball (c). The coach and
the opposite wing pass back and forth a couple times as the defender adjusts until
the coach slaps the ball once more; then the offensive player on the wing cuts to
the middle of the lane and up to the top of the key. The defensive player denies the
offensive player cutting (d). When the coach throws the ball to the offensive player
at the top of the key, the drill becomes a live one-on-one. The defensive player must
close out on the opponent and work to contain and contest the shot.
Variations
• Perform this drill in segments before putting all the defensive techniques
together.
• Make this a live drill throughout.

132
DEFENSIVE SKILLS

C
a b

E5585/ASEP/fig 9.7a/429650/TammyP/R1 E5585/ASEP/fig 9.7b/434650/TammyP/R1


C

c d

E5585/ASEP/fig 9.7c/434651/TammyP/R1 E5585/ASEP/fig 9.7d/434652/TammyP/R1

133
DEFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ ONE-ON-ONE CONTROLLED
Goal To learn to defend an offensive player on the dribble and in a dead-ball
situation.
Description The coach poses as an offensive player with the ball at the top of the
key, and the defender guards the coach in an appropriate defensive stance. The
defender mirrors the basketball while the coach sweeps it below the kneecaps, above
the head, and so on. The coach then dribbles in various directions (for example, to
the baseline or the middle of the floor) as the defender makes defensive slides at
game speed. When the defender cuts the coach off at the sideline, the defender
should once again trace (follow) the ball in a good defensive position before a new
defender takes his place.
Variations
• Have the coach take one dribble only.
• Replace the coach at the top of the key with another player, who will try to
score against the defender.

➤ ONE-ON-ONE LIVE
Goal To work on stopping an offensive player who is trying to score.
Description An offensive player and a defensive player set up at one wing. When
the defensive player hands the offensive player the ball, the drill is considered live.
The offensive player is allowed three dribbles maximum to make a move and take
a shot as the defender tries to make a defensive stop. The defender finishes the
drill with a box-out and rebound. The offensive player then moves to defense, and
a new offensive player steps in.
Variations
• Limit the offensive player to one dribble at the beginning of the drill.
• Require the defender to keep the ball out of the lane area.

➤ ONE-ON-ONE LIVE FROM CLOSEOUT


Goal To learn to close out and then stop the dribbler from reaching the basket.
Description An offensive player and a defensive player begin on the court. The
defensive player begins with the ball on the block in front of the rim. He passes the
ball to the offensive player at the elbow to start the drill. On the pass, the defender
breaks down (moves into good defensive position) and closes out on his opponent.
On the catch, the offensive player is looking to score. He is allowed two dribbles
maximum to make a move and take a shot as the defender tries to make a defensive
stop. The defender finishes the drill with a box-out and rebound.
Variations
• Limit the offensive player to no dribbles or one dribble at the beginning of
the drill.
• Allow the offensive player to take up to three dribbles to score.
134
DEFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ ONE-ON-ONE LIVE FROM CLOSEOUT IN HELP POSITION

Goal To learn how to close out on the shooter when guarding another player.
Description Along with the coach, an offensive player and a defensive player
begin on the court. The defensive player is in the help position at the elbow. The
offensive player is at the top of the key. The coach has the ball on the wing. (Note
that the offensive player could instead be on the wing, and the coach with the ball
could be at the top of the key.) On the pass from the coach to the offensive player,
the defender must close out against the offensive player while staying low. On the
catch, the two opponents play one-on-one. The defender ends the drill with a box-
out and rebound.
Variations
• Limit the offensive player to no dribbles or one dribble, or limit the offensive
player to dribbling either to the right or to the left.
• Allow the offensive player to use unlimited dribble options and let her go either
direction with the dribble.

➤ TWO-ON-TWO

Goal To learn ball-side and help-side responsibility.


Description One offensive player is positioned at the top of the key, and one
offensive player is positioned on the wing. A defender will guard each player. When
the ball is at the top of the key, one defender is on the ball, and the help defender
guarding the wing is at the elbow. At this point, play becomes live. As the offense
moves the ball, the defenders must keep them from scoring. If the offense scores,
defenders will run a down-and-back.
Variations
• Limit the number of dribbles by the offense, or restrict the movement of the
offensive players.
• Allow the offensive players to take multiple dribbles and make movements to
any location on the court.

135
DEFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ THREE-ON-THREE

Goal To work with two other defenders in a three-on-three situation to stop the
offense from scoring.
Description The coach starts with the ball under the basket. Three offensive players
set up around the perimeter (two at the wings and one at the top of the key). Three
defensive players begin in the lane. On the coach’s pass out to the offense, one
defender closes out on the ball, and the other two go to their help-side positioning
(a). From here, the defense practices reacting to the following:
1. Weak-side interchange. From the top of the key, the ball is passed to the wing.
The offensive players at the top of the key and the wing opposite the ball will
interchange (switch positions), and the two defensive players must rotate to
their help positions (b).
2. Paint touches. From the top of the key, the ball is passed to the wing. The
offensive players then try to break down the defense by cutting into the lane
(c) or by driving the ball baseline past the defenders. The defense must adjust
to all passes, drives, and cuts accordingly.
3. Baseline rotations. From the top of the key, the ball is passed to the wing.
The offensive player on the wing catches the ball, sweeping it from one side
to the other. The weak-side defender must rotate outside of the lane and cut
the dribble off as the defender at the top of the key drops to the hole (d). On
a skip pass from the dribbler out to the offensive player on the opposite side
of the court, the player who rotated over will stay with the ball. The player in
the hole defends the first pass out, and the defender who was guarding the
ball rotates to the next available offensive player.
4. Baseline rotations with weak-side interchange. From the top of the key, the
ball is passed to the wing. The two offensive players on the weak side (away
from the ball) exchange positions. The defenders must be in position to stay
with their offensive players as they exchange places but must also be in posi-
tion to stop the baseline drive that may occur on the ball side of the floor (e).
Variations
• Teach one part of the drill to the players before adding the other parts.
• Add this rule to the drill: When the coach says “Live,” the offensive players
can make any moves to try to score against the defenders in a three-on-three
situation.

136
DEFENSIVE TACTICS

a b

E5585/ASEP/fig 9.8a/434653/TammyP/R1 E5585/ASEP/fig 9.8b/429652/TammyP/R1

c d

E5585/ASEP/fig 9.8c/433876/TammyP/R1 E5585/ASEP/fig 9.8d/433877/TammyP/R2-alw

137
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

DEFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ FOUR-ON-FOUR

Goal To learn defensive rotation in a four-on-four situation.


Description This drill involves the same action as the three-on-three drill. The coach
starts with the ball under the basket. Four defenders start in the lane. Four offensive
players, two guards and two wings, set up around the perimeter. The coach passes
the ball to one of the four offensive players. One defender closes out on the ball
while the other three defenders move to help-side positioning (a). From here, the
defense practices reacting to the following:
1. Weak-side interchange. When the ball goes from guard to forward, the
offensive weak-side guard and weak-side forward will interchange. On that
interchange, the defensive players must move to their respective weak-side
help positions (b).
2. Defend the basket cut. When the
ball goes from guard to forward,
the guard making the pass cuts to
the basket. The weak-side guard
and weak-side forward rotate to the
empty spots. The defensive players
then move to their respective help-
side positions (c).
Variations
C

• Teach one part of the drill to the play-


ers before adding the other parts.
• Add this rule to the drill: At any
point during the drill, if the coach
says “Live,” the offensive players
may make any moves to try to score
against the defenders. a

E5585/ASEP/fig 9.9a/434654/TammyP/R1

b c

138

www.Ebook777.com
DEFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ HELPING HANDS

Goal To provide help for a teammate.


Description Play 3v3. Tape off a 3-foot-
by-3-foot area about 15 to 20 feet from the
basket from any angle on the court. This
area is the “freeze zone”—that is, when a
defender enters this zone, the defender
must freeze. Instruct the offense to dribble
so that the player guarding the dribbler
enters the freeze zone. When this hap-
pens, the dribbler should dribble toward
the basket (the other offensive players
should not be clustered around this freeze
zone or in the dribbler’s path), and the
“frozen” defender should call, “Help!” The
teammate nearest to this defender should
respond appropriately, trying to cut off the
dribbler and defend against passes to the
dribbler’s teammates. If the defense suc-
cessfully provides help, it gets one point.
E5585/ASEP/fig 9.10/429655/TammyP/R2-alw
Note: If help is not provided well but the offense misses its shot, the defense does
not get a point. Successful help means cutting off the dribbler and not allowing an
easy scoring opportunity.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 3v4 or make the freeze zone farther away from
the basket.
• To make the game more challenging, eliminate the freeze zone.

➤ CUTTING OFF

Goal To defend against screens.


Description Play 2v2, 3v3, or 4v4. The offense must use screens in setting up plays.
If the defense defends well against a screen (that is, no advantage is gained), the
defense is awarded one point. If the offense gains an advantage on the screen, the
defense loses one point. If the offense scores directly off the screen, the defense
loses two points. A play ends after the screen is set (the offense can shoot directly
off the screen). From that point, the play is reset, and the offense begins again. After
five plays, switch sides.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 2v3 or 3v4, or allow defenders to call out
“Switch!” and then switch players on screens.
• To make the game more difficult, require defenders to fight through or slide
behind screens—no switching.

139
DEFENSIVE TACTICS

➤ NO PASSING ZONE

Goal To cut off passing lanes and intercept passes.


Description Play 3v3. The defense tries to cut off the passing lanes and intercept
the ball. Each player on offense can dribble no more than three times before pass-
ing. Offensive players move to open spaces to receive passes and then look to hit
open teammates with passes. The offense controls the ball for one minute. Then the
teams switch sides. Within each one-minute period, the defense returns the ball to
the offense if the defense steals it. Each steal counts for one point. Give each team
five one-minute periods on defense.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 3v4 or don’t use dribbling.
• To make the game more difficult, play 4v3.

➤ PICKING POCKETS

Goal To create turnovers by stealing the ball.


Description Play 3v4 or 2v3 in either the full or half court depending on the age
group. The offense must complete four passes before attempting to shoot. The
defense must use their defensive positioning to force a turnover or steal. Award two
points to the defense for each turnover. As an option, you may also award one point
for any of the following: forcing a dribbler to a sideline, funneling a dribbler to the
middle (assuming defensive teammates are in the middle to help out), or forcing a
dribbler to use the weak hand. Switch offense and defense after five minutes of play.
Variations
• To make the game easier, play 3v5 or 2v4.
• To make the game more difficult, play 3v3 or 4v4.

➤ SCRAMBLE

Goal To quickly find an offensive player when the team moves from offense to defense.
Description This drill starts with two offensive guards and two offensive wings
spread out along the perimeter against their defenders. The ball is passed around
the perimeter, and the defensive players adjust accordingly in their help-side posi-
tioning. The coach then blows a whistle, and whoever has the ball places it on the
floor. At this point, the defensive players move out to the offensive positions, and
the offensive players move to defense. The new defensive players need to guard
someone on the opposite side of the floor. When the ball is picked up, the offense
makes one more pass; then the drill becomes a live four-on-four drill.
Variations
• Start with a 2v2 and build the drill to a 4v4. You can also limit how many times
the offense can dribble when they move from defense to offense.
• Allow unlimited dribbling as soon as the ball goes from defense to offense.

140
Part III
Practicing

141
142 Coaching Youth Basketball

The practice time you spend with your team is the most important time for you
and your players. Practice should be fun for the players as well as the coaches. When
you step into the practice area, you should know the answers to these questions: (1)
What am I going to teach? (2) How am I going to teach it? and (3) Why am I going to
teach it? Each practice should have little wasted time; the coach should move quickly
from one part to the next. No part of the practice schedule should last any longer than
10 minutes. Practices should go quickly; you will find that the players stay interested
in each practice session if they are kept busy and moving.

Warming Up
Warm-ups are extremely important in reducing injuries and allowing the muscles to
be ready for more strenuous competition. The warm-up should take approximately
10 to 15 minutes at the start of each practice and should include both stretching and
conditioning. The ball can be used in the warm-up to help players develop skills
such as dribbling and passing. Have players start at one baseline and perform various
warm-up drills (both passing and dribbling related) while moving from one baseline
to the other and back again. Stretching can be mixed in on the baselines as players
wait their turns.

Drill Work
In each practice session, you should emphasize a few skills and then drill on these
skills. The drill work needs to be an extension of your offense and defense; try to
develop drills that directly develop parts of your offenses and defenses in addition
to individual skills.
Keep in mind the whole–part–whole theory when teaching a new offense or defense.
The whole–part–whole method of teaching involves showing and demonstrating the
basketball skill and then breaking down the whole into parts for teaching. After teach-
ing the parts of the skill, the coach puts the entire whole back together. The advantage
of the whole–part–whole method is that the players will see what they are working
toward first. This will make the broken-down drills more effective because the players
will already know how the drill fits in with the big picture.
Here are some key points to consider when it comes to preparing and executing drills:
• Make sure every drill has a name.
• Make sure every drill is timed.
• Build a portfolio of drills that specifically relate to your system of play and
fundamental concepts.
• Occasionally ask yourself these questions: (1) Why do we do this drill? (2)
How often do we do this drill? and (3) Are we receiving the desired results?
• Sell the value of drill work to your players. Most players do not like drills, view-
ing them as conditioning.
Practicing 143

• Vary the use of drills to protect against boredom; the biggest challenge for play-
ers during drill work is to consistently concentrate on performance.
• Remember that coaches are teachers, and drill work requires constant teaching.
• Stress enthusiasm. Be a vocal coach, letting players know that you are watch-
ing every drill.
• Remember your responsibilities during drill work: to teach, to motivate, and to
discipline (not punishing, but stressing correctness and concentration).
• Be sure to balance criticism with praise—praising at least twice for every one
criticism.
• Keep in mind that two of the most neglected aspects of drill work are passing
and cutting.
• Try to place every drill at the most advantageous time during the practice period.
• Always introduce new drills early in the practice period—when player concen-
tration levels are still high.
• Make sure that physically difficult drills are followed by more fun drills and
vice versa.
• Include drill stations; stations allow for more variety (while maintaining
emphasis on the same subject matter), protect against monotony, leave fewer
players standing around, and give assistant coaches the opportunity to teach.
• For teaching purposes, use small, carefully organized groups of three to five
players in each drill.
• Remember that each player will not require the same amount of work or atten-
tion on each fundamental in a drill.
• Guard against ending practice with a drill that causes the players to feel as if
they are being punished. Instead, end each practice with a drill that players
enjoy so that players (and coaches) leave practice with a positive feeling.

Short-Sided Games
Short-sided games are games or drills involving players in situations other than
five on five. These are games that break down the offense or defense so play-
ers can work on related skills. By using a short-sided game, the coach places the
players into a gamelike drill that will help them develop their skills while making
the learning fun and second nature (in most cases, short-sided games will be the
“part” method of teaching before a whole offense or defense is again worked on
in a five-on-five setting).
Short-sided games can also be very valuable in developing the skills of younger
players. The players will focus on winning the short-sided game and working with
their teammates without thinking too much about the individual skills being used.
This is a great opportunity for you to stop the game during a dead-ball situation and
explain why a team or player has succeeded by using a skill you’ve recently taught.
144 Coaching Youth Basketball

Cooling Down
Every practice should end with cool-down drills that are competitive in nature. These
drills should leave the players with a positive feeling about practice and make them
want to come back to the next practice. Cool-down drills can include free-throw
shooting drills, shooting contests from various spots, and stretching. This is also a
time for team bonding, where you may ask players to cheer for one another during
a competition. The cool-down may also provide a chance for the coach to visit with
individual players (for example, while stretching).

Creating Practice Schedules


Practice schedules are extremely important because they allow the coach to be well
organized within each practice session. As a coach, you should first make a list of
everything that you want to cover with your team during the year, such as offenses,
defenses, out-of-bounds plays, and special situations. You should then create practice
schedules containing drills that will be used to develop each of these main parts of
the game.
In each practice, remember to stick to your practice schedule. The drills need to stay
between 5 to 10 minutes in length; regardless of how the drill is going for the play-
ers, move on to the next drill when the time is up according to the practice schedule.
If a drill is not going well, don’t extend the time for the drill. Review why it did not
go well and then perhaps use it again in another practice. Maybe the drill was too
complicated for players in your team’s age group and you need to adjust the drill for
their skill level. You may be tempted to continue working on a drill when it is not
going well, but most of the time, the longer you spend on the drill, the worse it gets.
The same may happen if a drill is going extremely well.
Practice schedules also give the players the idea that you are very organized and
know how to prepare them for competition. This can add to their respect and admi-
ration for you as a coach and teacher.

Coaching in the Practice Setting


Coaching during practices can be intense and stressful for both the coach and players.
The coach should try to make each practice as stress free as possible so the players can
play a relaxed and confident game. As a coach and teacher, you should remember to
• tell the players what you want,
• show the players what you want (diagram),
• demonstrate to the players what you want (drill),
• clean up the demonstration, and
• use repetition with competition.
Practicing 145

Most players will listen to you for only a short period of time, so keep your com-
ments short—preferably a minute or less. Teaching in sound bites, or short phrases,
is better than giving long-winded speeches that cause players to lose interest and
stand around too long.
If you keep your tone positive when instructing the players, they will react to you
in a much better way. Also, try to give feedback as soon as possible to a player. This
enables you to provide proper teaching of the skill, and the player can make the
adjustments immediately. Finally, don’t forget to let your players know when they
have done something right.
The following chapters provide practice plans for each age group (5 and 6, 7 and
8, 9 and 10, 11 and 12, and 13 and 14), including one early-season practice, three
midseason practices, and one late-season practice. Note that these practice plans are
examples only. As a coach, you should put together the practice plan that works best
for your team.
10 Practices for
Ages 5 and 6

For players who are 5 or 6 years old, basketball is a new activity. Players who
are this young often know the sport of basketball through parents, siblings, friends,
or media but usually have no idea about any of the skills involved in playing the
game. When coaching this age group, your main goal is to establish that basketball
is a fun game to play.
Coaching this age group takes a lot of patience and repetition. Patience involves
allowing the young players to have fun in a slightly structured atmosphere. You want
your young players to have a desire to come back to practice, and over the course of the
season, you want them to develop a passion for the game and to continue to improve
their skills. Remember that raising your voice or punishing the players by making
them do sprints or push-ups will not help them develop a good attitude for the game.
Practice sessions should be no more than an hour and a half and preferably an
hour or less. You should change drills every 5 to 10 minutes so the players can keep
on task. The biggest challenge with this age group is keeping the players interested
and focused while working on a skill. Children this age love competition in drills—for
example, counting the number of dribbles they can do in a minute with each hand or
the number of times their team can dribble around a cone and back. Be innovative
with the players in order to hold their attention and make practice fun.
A variety of skill levels will exist in this age group, and your practice plans should
take these differences into account. For example, practices should always include both
beginner and advanced skills, and players should be divided into groups according to
their skill levels for certain drills. Players who are not as skilled may decide to pout or
sit out of a drill because they don’t think they are any good or not as good as another
player. The coach will need to use some psychology to coax these players back into
the drill. Always be positive with these young players, because they need to feel good
about their development on the court and with their friends. Do not tolerate any
bullying behavior on your team.
Remember to have fun with these players!

146
Practices for Ages 5 and 6 147

Considerations When Coaching Females


Annie Byrne, Marian Catholic High School girls’ basketball coach
Coaching 5- and 6-year-old girls requires patience and understanding. The coach
must have the patience to teach the fundamentals in a way that these players can
relate to. The coach must also understand that most activities that girls participate
in at this age are for fun. When attempting to teach the basics of basketball to 5-
or 6-year-old girls, a coach will want to develop a practice plan that includes work
on the fundamentals and defensive drills; however, practices should also include
a lot of fun and enthusiasm while outlining the principles for the youngsters. This
is a very rewarding age to coach because the players’ progress is so evident and
the players show a lot of excitement in their progress. Players will have plenty of
energy, so one of your tasks will be to manage that energy while keeping atten-
tion. Scores of games are often low, and when someone scores, you may find that
everyone claps. This is part of the learning process. Enjoy it. As the players get older,
they will need a base to build on, and you are a key component in the beginning
stages. Keep in mind, the more fun the players are having, the more they will want
to continue to learn and continue to participate in basketball. Teach them in ways
they will enjoy. At this age, the more the players enjoy what they are doing, the
more you will be able to teach them.

5-6 years old

Early-Season Practices
Early-season practice sessions should establish that basketball is a fun game. Limit the
time for each drill to 10 minutes or less. Try to keep players moving during drills and
moving from one drill to another, allowing time for them to get a drink between drills.

Early-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Warm-up time should involve activities such as running, pivoting, executing jump
stops, and performing V-cuts up and down the court. Players may use basketballs
at some point during the warm-up if their skill level is high enough.
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

5-6 years old

COACHING POINTS
• Players need to be lined up and organized for warm-ups. Using the same
format for warm-ups each practice will enhance the discipline of the group.
• The coach can have a different player lead warm-ups each day; this will help
the players develop leadership.

Four-Line Jump Stops and V-Cuts (10 minutes)


Organize the team into four lines on the baseline with no more than four players in
each line. On the coach’s command (whistle), the first player in each line runs and
comes to a stop at the free-throw line (or free-throw line extended). The players
should be in balance when executing the jump stop. On the next command, the first
group of four runs to the half-court line and stops, while the next group of four runs
to the free-throw line and stops in balance. On the next command, the first group
goes to the opposite free-throw line, the second group goes to the half-court line,
and the third group of four goes to the free-throw line. The drill continues up and
down the court on the coach’s command. Once all groups have performed jump
stops down and back, the drill is performed using continuous V-cuts; the players run
and change direction in a V-cut pattern down the floor.
COACHING POINT
Players tend to have a difficult time stopping in balance, so check that the feet are
shoulder-width apart, the hands are above the waist, the head is not leaning forward,
and the chin is up.

Freeze Tag With Proper Jump Stops (10 minutes)


Have one player be It. This player chases the other players around the court. When
touched by the It player, the other players must jump stop (freeze) in a proper ready
position. The coach can unfreeze a player by touching him when that player shows
good ready position.
COACHING POINT
After one or two minutes, the coach should choose a new player to be It.

Stationary Dribbling, Right- and Left-Handed (10 minutes)


Each player has a basketball (if this is not possible, players can be split up into two
groups, and the drill can be performed by one group at a time). The players begin
the drill by dribbling with the right hand first. On the coach’s command, the players
switch hands, now dribbling with the left hand. In this drill, players can work up to
alternating hands with each dribble.
COACHING POINTS
• These young players may try to dribble with the palm of their hand instead of
the pads of the fingers and hand.
• The elbow should stay in close to the hip and should not be away from the body.

148

www.Ebook777.com
5-6 years old

Form Shooting While Sitting Cross-Legged (10 minutes)


Have players sit cross-legged on the floor in pairs facing each other, with one ball
per pair. Instruct the players on how to hold the ball when shooting; the shooting
hand should be underneath the ball, and the guide hand should be on the side. On
command, the player with the ball shoots or pushes the ball to his partner, releasing
it above the eyes and snapping the wrist down goose-neck style.
COACHING POINTS
• This drill can be done with the players shooting against a wall if there are
enough basketballs for each player to have one.
• Emphasize that the hand below the ball should be the only hand that shoots
the ball.

Pair Passing, Air and Bounce (10 minutes)


Players pair up, and each pair stands about 6 to 8 feet (183 to 244 cm) from each
other. On command, the player with the ball passes to her partner using an air pass
(a pass that does not touch the floor) or a bounce pass. Both hands and arms should
be used to make the pass; the elbows should be close to the body, and the thumbs
should be down with palms out after the pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Show the players that a bounce pass should be caught by the partner at the
same level that the ball was passed from.
• Note that young players tend to bring the ball above the head to pass;
emphasize that each pass should be made from the waist.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left, keeping the knees bent and the hands above
the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

Defensive Mirror (10 minutes)


Ask players to pair up, with one player on each side of a line on the court (such as
the free-throw line or baseline). One player is designated as the offensive player;
this player will move in a quick manner back and forth on her side of the line. The

149
5-6 years old

other player is the defender and must slide her feet and try to stay with the offensive
player as she moves. The offensive player should remain in a 6- to 8-foot space as
she moves back and forth.
COACHING POINT
Tell defenders to keep their eyes on the waist of their offensive player as they move
to stay with her. Also teach defenders to avoid crossing their legs.

One-on-One No-Ball Tag (10 minutes)


Ask players to pair up. Start with one player at the free-throw line and the other
player in the middle of the lane. On the coach’s command, the player at the free-
throw line (the offensive player) tries to get to the baseline without getting touched
by the other player. The offensive player must stay inside the sidelines and cannot
go out of bounds.
COACHING POINT
This drill teaches the players to move their feet and stay in proper ready position,
keeping their knees bent for better balance.

Dribble Freeze Tag (10 minutes)


Each player has a basketball (if this is not possible, players can be split up into two
groups, and the drill can be performed by one group at a time). One player is des-
ignated as Michael Jordan, LeBron James, or any other star your players may know.
On command, all players begin dribbling, and this player tries to touch the other
players (all players are still maintaining their dribble). Once touched, a player must
freeze, still dribbling while stationary. After a specified number of dribbles (to be
determined by the coach), the player may be unfrozen.
COACHING POINT
Limit the area for the game to one half of the court or even from free-throw line to
baseline so the designated player has more success.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Midseason Practices
Midseason practices take on a different look because the players now know some of
the drills and may perform certain skills well for their age. Keep the practice sessions
fresh by introducing some new drills. A good way to keep the players’ interest high is
to add some competition to the drills. You will start to see some separation among
player skill levels, so account for this in your practice sessions by using a combination
of both beginning and advanced drills and dividing players up accordingly.

150
5-6 years old

Midseason Practice Plan 1


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Warm-up time should involve activities such as running, pivoting, executing jump
stops, and performing V-cuts up and down the court. Players may use basketballs
at some point during the warm-up if their skill level is high enough.
COACHING POINTS
• Players need to be lined up and organized for warm-ups. Using the same
format for warm-ups each practice will enhance the discipline of the group.
• The coach can have a different player lead warm-ups each day; this will help
the players develop leadership.

Mass Shooting and Layups, Form Only (10 minutes)


Players spread out on the floor and face the coach. On command, the players shoot
an imaginary ball, working on proper form for shooting as instructed by the coach.
Players should also practice performing layups with an imaginary ball, taking one
step and bringing the right knee up with the right hand on the right-handed layup
(or bringing the left knee up with the left hand on the left-handed layup).
COACHING POINT
This is the first step in learning how to correctly perform shots and layups. Perform-
ing the shooting action with no ball allows the players to focus on using the correct
form without worrying about whether the ball goes in the basket.

Dribble Layups (10 minutes)


Players begin in a line starting at the free-throw line elbow. Each player has a bas-
ketball. One at a time, players dribble to the basket and perform a layup. The coach
rebounds for each player and hands the ball back to him; the player then goes to
the back of the line to wait for another turn.
COACHING POINT
You may also want to start this drill without basketballs. Have the players use an
imaginary dribble for a layup before adding the ball.

Form Shooting to Partner (10 minutes)


Players pair up, facing each other; each pair has a ball. The player with the ball
shoots the ball to his partner using correct shooting form—the elbow is pointed to
the target, the shooting hand is underneath the ball, and the guide hand is on the
side. The player should lift the ball up and toward his partner.

151
5-6 years old

COACHING POINT
You may want players to begin this drill without using basketballs (players take imagi-
nary shots to their partner) so that form is emphasized before the basketball is added.

Two-Line Passing, Chest and Bounce (10 minutes)


Divide the squad into two lines facing each other; the first person in one line should
have a basketball. This player passes the ball using a chest pass to the first person in
the opposite line. The passer follows his pass and goes to the end of the opposite
line. The drill continues as the players pass the ball and follow it. Once players have
practiced the chest pass, they should perform the same drill using the bounce pass.
COACHING POINT
Make sure the receiving player has his hands up and is in ready position, with his
knees bent, to catch the pass.

Dribble and Shoot Contest (10 minutes)


Divide players into two or more teams, depending on the number of players. Each
team should be limited to three or four players and should have their own basket,
if possible. You can have the players start at any place on the court—for example,
the free-throw line. The first player on each team dribbles to the basket for a shot,
gets her own rebound, and passes back to the next player in line. Each team should
count their made baskets. Continue for a specified amount of time and count the
made baskets for each group.
COACHING POINT
This shooting drill can also be used for layups or bank shots.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left, keeping the knees bent and the hands above
the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

Defensive Mirror (10 minutes)


Ask players to pair up, with one player on each side of a line on the court (such as
the free-throw line or baseline). One player is designated as the offensive player;

152
5-6 years old

this player will move in a quick manner back and forth on her side of the line. The
other player is the defender and must slide her feet and try to stay with the offensive
player as she moves. The offensive player should remain in a 6- to 8-foot space as
she moves back and forth.
COACHING POINT
Tell defenders to keep their eyes on the waist of their offensive player as they move
to stay with her. Also teach defenders to avoid crossing their legs.

Three-on-Three Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line is an
offensive player. These players start on the court, facing the basket. The second
player in each line is a defensive player. These players defend the offensive players.
The rest of the players remain on the baseline. The offensive team tries to score by
dribbling, passing, and cutting to the basket. The defensive players work to stay
with the offensive player they are assigned to guard. When a basket is made or
the defense gets the ball, the defensive team goes to offense, and the next three
players in line become the defensive team. Play for a certain amount of time or to
a specified score.
COACHING POINT
Depending on the ability of your team, you can put restrictions on the players, such
as no stealing the ball from the dribbler on defense, one dribble only for the offense,
or the offense must make three passes before a shot is taken.

Dribble Freeze Tag (10 minutes)


Each player has a basketball (if this is not possible, players can be split up into two
groups, and the drill can be performed by one group at a time). One player is des-
ignated as Michael Jordan, LeBron James, or any other star your players may know.
On command, all players begin dribbling, and this player tries to touch the other
players (all players are still maintaining their dribble). Once touched, a player must
freeze, still dribbling while stationary. After a specified number of dribbles (to be
determined by the coach), the player may be unfrozen.
COACHING POINT
Limit the area for the game to one half of the court or even from free-throw line to
baseline so the designated player has more success.

Pair Shooting Contest (10 minutes)


Divide players into pairs; each pair has a ball. One player shoots the ball from a
specified position on the floor (for example, the right elbow), gets his own rebound,
and gives the ball to his partner for the same shot. The drill continues back and forth
with the two players taking turns shooting until time is called or until one pair makes
a specified number of baskets.

153
5-6 years old

COACHING POINTS
• Try to organize the pairs so the two best shooters are not together.
• Once players have finished shooting from one specified position, ask them to
shoot from another (for example, the left elbow).
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Midseason Practice Plan 2


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Warm-up time should involve activities such as running, pivoting, executing jump
stops, and performing V-cuts up and down the court. Players may use basketballs
at some point during the warm-up if their skill level is high enough.
COACHING POINTS
• Players need to be lined up and organized for warm-ups. Using the same
format for warm-ups each practice will enhance the discipline of the group.
• The coach can have a different player lead warm-ups each day; this will help
the players develop leadership.

Mass Ballhandling, Weak-Hand Dribble (10 minutes)


This drill is designed specifically to get players to work on the weak hand. Each player
has a basketball. On command, the players dribble with only their weak hand. The
coach can allow players to change hands on a whistle. Making a contest out of how
many dribbles a player can do in a certain amount of time is a good way to keep
players interested.
COACHING POINT
For advanced players, the coach may add some other basic ballhandling instructions
(for example, dribbling the ball around the right leg).

Layups, Weak-Hand Dribble (10 minutes)


Players start at the free-throw line elbow on the right side of the court; each player
has a ball. The players dribble to the basket using their weak hand and then shoot
a right-handed layup. The coach rebounds each ball and gives it back to the player,
who then returns to the end of the line. After an appropriate amount of time, play-
ers move to the left-side elbow, dribbling to the basket with their weak hand for a
left-handed layup.
COACHING POINT
The coach may want players to start the drill using an imaginary basketball so they
can get the proper steps and shooting stroke down before adding the ball.

154
5-6 years old

Pair Shooting Contest, Bank Shots (10 minutes)


Divide players into pairs; one partner is at the block facing the basket. This player
shoots the ball and must use the backboard for the shot. The player gets his own
rebound and gives the ball to his partner for the same shot. The drill continues back
and forth with the two players taking turns shooting until time is called or until one
pair makes a specified number of baskets.
COACHING POINTS
• Try to organize the pairs so the two best shooters are not together.
• Once the players have shot from one side of the basket, they can move to the
other block and shoot bank shots from that side.

Pair Passing, Chest and Bounce (10 minutes)


Players pair up, and each pair of partners stand about 6 to 8 feet from each other. On
command, the player with the ball passes to his partner using a chest pass or a bounce
pass. Both hands and arms should be used to make the pass; the elbows should be
close to the body, and the thumbs should be down with palms out after the pass.
COACHING POINT
Emphasize that each pass should be made from the waist.

Dribble and Shoot Contest (10 minutes)


Divide players into two or more teams, depending on the number of players. Each
team should be limited to three or four players and should have their own basket,
if possible. You can have the players start at any place on the court—for example,
the free-throw line. The first player on each team dribbles to the basket for a shot,
gets her own rebound, and passes back to the next player in line. Each team should
count their made baskets. Continue for a specified amount of time and count the
made baskets for each group.
COACHING POINT
This shooting drill can also be used for layups or bank shots.

Defensive Slide, Sideline to Sideline (5 minutes)


Players line up on one sideline, facing the coach at the end of the court. On com-
mand, the players step and push in a defensive slide to the opposite sideline and
back again.
COACHING POINT
The players should start slowly by taking a big step with the foot in the direction
they are going, pushing off the opposite foot in a defensive slide motion.

Defensive One-on-One, No Ball (10 minutes)


Divide the team into pairs. Players start at the baseline; one partner is designated as
the offensive player, and the other partner is designated as the defensive player. The

155
5-6 years old

offensive player does not have a ball. On command, the offensive player proceeds
down the court using V-cuts in a designated third of the court. The defender slides
with the offensive player, performing drop steps with each V-cut.
COACHING POINT
The defender should try to maintain an arm’s length of space between himself and
the offensive player.

Three-on-Three Half Court, No Dribble (10 minutes)


Divide players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line is an
offensive player. These players start on the court, facing the basket. The second
player in each line is a defensive player. These players defend the offensive players.
The rest of the players remain on the baseline. The offensive team tries to score
without dribbling the ball; they do this by passing and cutting to the basket. The
defensive players work to stay with the offensive player they are assigned to guard.
When a basket is made or the defense gets the ball, the defensive team goes to
offense, and the next three players in line become the defensive team. Play for a
certain amount of time or to a specified score.
COACHING POINT
The defensive team may not steal the ball from the offensive player. This drill encour-
ages the players to cut and move to get open because no dribble can occur.

Dribble Tag Inside Lane (10 minutes)


All players have a ball in the lane. On command, all players start to dribble. While
dribbling, each player tries to knock another player’s ball out of the lane. When a
player’s ball is knocked out of the lane, that player is out of the game. The game
continues until only one player is left dribbling.
COACHING POINT
Ask players to perform this drill using both strong-hand and weak-hand dribbling.

Pair Shooting Contest, First to 10 (10 minutes)


Players are divided into pairs; each pair has a ball. One player shoots the ball from a
specified position on the floor (for example, the right elbow), gets his own rebound,
and gives the ball to his partner for the same shot. The drill continues back and
forth with the two players taking turns shooting from the same spot until one pair
makes 10 baskets.
COACHING POINTS
• Try to organize the pairs so the two best shooters are not together.
• The coach can mix up the drill with dribble shots, layups, and so on.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

156
5-6 years old

Midseason Practice Plan 3


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Warm-up time should involve activities such as running, pivoting, executing jump
stops, and performing V-cuts up and down the court. Players may use basketballs
at some point during the warm-up if their skill level is high enough.
COACHING POINTS
• Players need to be lined up and organized for warm-ups. Using the same
format for warm-ups each practice will enhance the discipline of the group.
• The coach can have a different player lead warm-ups each day; this will help
the players develop leadership.

Follow the Leader Dribbling Work (10 minutes)


One player is the leader, and the rest of the players are in a position on the court
where they can see the leader. The leader performs ballhandling movements (drib-
bling with the weak hand, dribbling around the leg, and so on), and the rest of the
players imitate the leader’s ballhandling movements.
COACHING POINT
The leader may move while doing the ballhandling movements using various drib-
bling techniques such as crossover moves and between-the-legs moves.

Two-Line Give-and-Go With Layup (10 minutes)


Arrange players in two lines at the free-throw elbows. The first player in one line
starts with the ball, makes a pass to the player in the opposite line, and gets the
ball back for a layup on a give-and-go play. The shooter then goes to the end of
the passing line, and the passer gets the rebound and goes to the shooting line.
COACHING POINT
You can also use this as a jump shot drill. On the give-and-go cut, the player can
stop and shoot a short jump shot instead of a layup.

Pass and Screen for Layup (10 minutes)


Divide players into three lines, one line at the top of the three-point line and one
line at each wing. The player at the top of the key starts with the ball, passing it to
one of the wings. After the pass, the player at the top of the key sets a screen on an
imaginary opponent for the opposite wing, who cuts off the screen for a pass and
a layup. Rotate the lines from left wing to top, top to right wing, and right wing to
left wing.

157
5-6 years old

COACHING POINT
Use a chair as the defensive player so the screener can set the screen on the chair.
The coach can also act as the defender. Eventually, use another player as the defender
to be screened.

Three-on-Three Pass, Cut, and Replace (10 minutes)


Organize players into teams of three. One team is the offensive team, and one is the
defensive team; the remaining teams stay on the baseline ready to come onto the
court. The offensive players should be arranged with a player at the top of the key
and two wings. The player at the top of the key begins by making a pass to one of the
wings. After the pass, the player makes a cut to the basket. The opposite wing then
fills the top position, and the cutter fills the vacated wing position. The ball is then
reversed to the top of the key and passed to the other wing; the player at the top of
the key cuts to the basket to repeat the process. The coach designates how many
ball reversals must take place before the ball can be passed to the cutter for a shot.
COACHING POINT
Do not allow the defenders to intercept the passes. This will enable the offense to
have success with the cuts and passes.

Dribble and Shoot Contest, Top of Key (10 minutes)


Divide players into two or more teams, depending on the number of players. Each
team should be limited to three or four players and should have their own basket,
if possible. Have players start at the top of the three-point line. The first player on
each team must dribble toward the basket and stop and shoot a shot inside the lane
area; the player then gets her own rebound and passes back to the next player in
line. Each team should count their made baskets. Continue for a specified amount
of time and count the made baskets for each group.
COACHING POINT
The drill can also be used to practice layups or bank shots.

Mass Rebounding Pivots (5 minutes)


Players are scattered around the court; they are all in a position where they can see the
coach. On command, the players pivot so their back is to the coach with their hands
up in rebounding position. The players then jump to get the imaginary rebound.
COACHING POINT
Ask the players to tip the imaginary rebound several times before grabbing it.

One-on-One Rebounding With Ball on Floor (10 minutes)


Have the players pair up around the center circle. The first pair takes position along
the outside of the circle; the inside player is facing his partner. The ball is in the

158
5-6 years old

middle of the circle. On command, the inside player pivots in front of his partner to
prevent him from getting to the ball in the middle of the circle. Both players try to
get the ball. The inside player has the advantage.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should stay low in good basketball position.
• As the inside player makes a pivot, his hands should go up.

Two-on-Two With Coach (10 minutes)


Divide the team into lines starting at the half-court line. The first two players in line
are the defenders, and the next two are the offensive players. The coach is posi-
tioned at the free-throw line as a passer. One of the offensive players starts the drill
by passing to the coach. Both offensive players then cut and move to get open for
a pass from the coach. The offensive players may pass the ball at any time to the
coach, who always stays at the free-throw line. Players rotate from offense to defense
and from defense to the end of the line.
COACHING POINT
The offensive players can cut to the basket for a pass from the coach, or they can
screen for each other.

Team Shooting Competition, 20 in 3 (10 minutes)


Divide the players into three lines on each baseline. A player in the first row on one
baseline has a ball, and a player in the second row on the opposite baseline has a
ball. The first row of players on the baseline without a basketball run straight down
the court and receive a pass from the player on that baseline with a ball. Whoever
receives the ball shoots it, rebounding her own shot. She and the other two players
then go to the end of each line at that end as the row of players from which the ball
was passed run to the other baseline and receive a pass for a shot. The drill continues
in this fashion for three minutes; the goal is 20 made baskets.
COACHING POINT
Emphasize footwork on each shot as the ball is passed to the shooter.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
The coach can also ask each player to shoot two free throws until the pair makes
four in a row.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

159
5-6 years old

Late-Season Practices
As the season progresses, most of the practice time should still focus on skill devel-
opment for this age group. However, some drills can progress to team drills that
emphasize several skills in one drill. Keep the lines as short as possible so that each
player gets more repetitions.

Late-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Warm-up time should involve activities such as running, pivoting, executing jump
stops, and performing V-cuts up and down the court. Players may use basketballs
at some point during the warm-up if their skill level is high enough.
COACHING POINTS
• Players need to be lined up and organized for warm-ups. Using the same
format for warm-ups each practice will enhance the discipline of the group.
• The coach can have a different player lead warm-ups each day; this will help
the players develop leadership.

Two-Line Full-Court Passing (10 minutes)


Players line up in two lines on the baseline. Beginning with the first two in each
line, players pass the ball back and forth while running down the court. Initially, air
passes (passes that do not touch the floor) should be used in this drill; as the team
progresses, the coach can ask players to also perform the drill using bounce passes.
COACHING POINT
Players can also perform a defensive slide down the length of the court as they pass
the ball to each other.

Full-Court Layups With Dribble (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket.
The first three players in each line should have a basketball. On command, the first
player in each line dribbles to the other end and shoots a layup. After each layup
is shot, the first player in line without a ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter
goes to the end of the line. Each time a player reaches the half-court line, the next
player in line follows.
COACHING POINT
Remind the players to keep their heads up as they dribble the ball.

160
5-6 years old

Defensive Slides, One-on-Zero and One-on-One (10 minutes)


Divide the players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line per-
forms defensive slides to the other baseline, making a drop step after every three
slides. Once players get the hang of the drill, divide the players into pairs. One
partner now dribbles a basketball, using V-cuts and crossover dribbles to change
direction, from one baseline to the other; the other partner is the defensive player.
The defensive player should slide to stay in front of the dribbler, executing a drop
step each time the offensive player changes direction.
COACHING POINTS
• The offensive players should go slowly so the defense can work on footwork.
• Defensive players should remain one arm’s length away from the dribbler,
keeping their eyes on the dribbler’s waist.

Two-on-Two Half Court (10 minutes)


Players begin in two lines at the half-court line. The first two players in line are the
defensive players, and the next two are the offensive players. The coach passes a
ball to one of the offensive players, and the offensive players dribble, pass, and cut
to try to score. The drill is over when the offense scores or the defensive players
get the rebound. Players rotate from offense to defense and from defense to the
end of the line.
COACHING POINT
Various rules, such as allowing only two dribbles per player, may be implemented
in the drill.

Cutthroat, Three-on-Three (10 minutes)


Divide the team into three lines on the baseline; the first players in each line are on
offense, and the second players in each line are on defense. The offensive players
are facing the basket on the court, and the defenders are in defensive position. The
coach starts the drill by passing the ball to one of the offensive players. As a rule,
the offensive players must face the basket in the triple-threat position, must move
after they pass, and must thank the passer on a pass that results in a basket. If the
offense fails to follow one of the rules, the whistle blows, and the offensive players
must go to the end of the line. The defense moves to offense, and a new set of three
players comes in on defense. Play for a specified period of time or until one team
reaches a specified number of points. Each basket counts as a point.
COACHING POINT
Teams must leave and come onto the court quickly.

161
5-6 years old

Freeze Tag With Proper Jump Stops (5 minutes)


Have one player be It. This player chases the other players around the court. When
touched by the It player, the other players must jump stop (freeze) in a proper ready
position. The coach can unfreeze a player by touching him when that player shows
a good ready position.
COACHING POINT
After one or two minutes, the coach should choose a new player to be It.

Pair Shooting Contest, From Four Spots (10 minutes)


Players are divided into pairs; each pair has a ball. In this drill, players shoot from
four designated spots chosen by the coach. One player shoots the ball from the
first designated position on the floor (for example, the right elbow), gets his own
rebound, and gives the ball to his partner for the same shot. Both players must make
the shot from this spot before moving to the next spot. The drill continues back and
forth with the players taking turns shooting until each player makes all four shots.
COACHING POINTS
• Try to organize the pairs so the two best shooters are not together.
• To make the drill more difficult, the coach can have the players make five shots
(or any other specified number) each at every spot before moving to the next.

Two-on-One Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two lines at half-court; one player is positioned in the middle
of the lane as a defender. The first two players in line dribble and pass the ball to
try to score against the lone defender.
COACHING POINT
The offensive players should only make one or two passes to try to score.

10-Basket Shooting Contest (10 minutes)


The squad is divided into groups of no more than three per team. The coach des-
ignates a shooting spot where the team of players will shoot one shot each until
that team makes 10 baskets. Each player rebounds his own shot and passes the ball
back to the next person in line.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should have their feet and hands ready to
shoot before the ball is passed.
• The coach can change the specified number of made shots and the shooting
spots depending on the players’ ability.
• To change up the drill, the coach may specify that the players must shoot
bank shots or must dribble and shoot.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

162
Practices for
11
Ages 7 and 8

Players in the 7- and 8-year age group have more experience than those
in the 5- and 6-year age group, but practice sessions will be much the same. You will
find that players in this age group have a wide range of ability. Growth spurts take
over and cause some players to be taller but less coordinated. Practice sessions should
emphasize individual skills such as shooting, passing, dribbling, rebounding, and
ballhandling. As the season progresses, the practice sessions can begin to include
more offensive and defensive concepts. Plays such as the give-and-go, screen away
for teammates, ball screens, and three-player games can be incorporated into these
practices. For players at this age group, the man-to-man defense is the only type of
defense that should be played. Defensive slides, drop steps, and proper stance are
all part of the defensive fundamentals that this age group should be taught. As the
season progresses, the players should also be introduced to the concepts of ball-side
and help-side defense and defending the ball and their offensive player.
Don’t expect these offensive and defensive concepts to be picked up quickly by the
players. This will be the first time that many of these players have been exposed to
the terminology and fundamental skills related to these concepts. Stay patient and
repeat the skills on a consistent basis. Also, keep practices moving quickly from one
drill to another with short lines in each drill. Have fun with the players in practice,
but work them hard!

163
164 Coaching Youth Basketball

Considerations When Coaching Females


Annie Byrne, Marian Catholic High School girls’ basketball coach
Coaching 7- and 8-year-old girls should involve a continuation of teaching the fun-
damentals. All coaches know that the fundamentals are essential when coaching
any group of players, especially players at a young age. If these 7- and 8-year-olds
did start at age 5 or 6, they may be more familiar with what will be expected of
them at a practice session or skills clinic. If they are just beginning at this age, then
you will have to go back and reference chapter 10 and start from the beginning.
Do not try to speed up the process. Skipping necessary fundamental steps will only
hinder your players’ development. You must be consistent and must ensure that
your players develop a foundation that they can build on.
Items to consider teaching in practice include defensive slides without crossing
the feet, the BEEF acronym for shooting (balance, eyes, elbow, follow-through), and
ballhandling skills. Also, outlining the rules of the game is helpful for these players.
This may include how to line up for free throws, when a player or coach can call a
time-out, the procedure for checking in at the scorer’s table, how many players are
on the floor at one time, taking the ball out of bounds, staying behind the free-
throw line when shooting a free throw, what the various positions in basketball are
on offense, and how to play a man-to-man and zone defense. This information will
be enough to enable the players to compete and begin to understand exactly how
the game is played.
Girls at any age need to develop confidence; on the basketball court, this can
be done in a variety of ways. Give praise and high-fives as often as you can, and
applaud constantly when the effort that you are looking for is given. If players are
feeling more confident in their abilities and potential on the court, they will want
to spend more time learning and developing their game.

7-8 years old

Early-Season Practices
Early-season practice sessions should be a review of skills previously taught and
should include skill development. Introduce new skills early in the season and then
review them on a daily basis.
7-8 years old

Early-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Four-Line Jump Stops and V-Cuts (10 minutes)


Organize the team into four lines on the baseline with no more than four players in
each line. On the coach’s command (whistle), the first player in each line runs and
comes to a stop at the free-throw line (or free-throw line extended). The players
should be in balance when executing the jump stop. On the next command, the first
group of four runs to the half-court line and stops, while the next group of four runs
to the free-throw line and stops in balance. On the next command, the first group
goes to the opposite free-throw line, the second group goes to the half-court line,
and the third group of four goes to the free-throw line. The drill continues up and
down the court on the coach’s command. Once all groups have performed jump
stops down and back, the drill is performed using continuous V-cuts; the players run
and change direction in a V-cut pattern down the floor.
COACHING POINTS
• On jump stops, check that players’ feet are shoulder-width apart, the hands
are above the waist, the head is not leaning forward, and the chin is up.
• On V-cuts, confirm that players make a sharp change of direction after planting
their outside foot; cuts should not be rounded.

Running Fast Break Lanes (10 minutes)


Players form three lines at one baseline. Cones are spread out from one free-throw
line to the other, about five to six feet in from the sideline. On command, the first
three players run in three lanes to the other baseline; the players in the outside lanes
run outside the cones, and the player in the middle lane runs between the cones
(free-throw lanes). No ball is used to start the drill, but depending on player ability,
the ball may be added. In that case, the player in the middle lane pushes the ball
upcourt and makes a pass to an outside-lane player before that player reaches the
offensive lane.
COACHING POINT
Emphasize that the outside players must run wide and outside the cones to establish
the outside lanes on the break while the middle player pushes the imaginary ball
up the middle.

165
7-8 years old

Stationary Dribbling, Right- and Left-Handed (10 minutes)


Each player has a basketball (if this is not possible, players can be split up into two
groups, and the drill can be performed by one group at a time). The players begin
the drill by dribbling with the right hand first. On the coach’s command, the players
switch hands, now dribbling with the left hand. In this drill, players can work up to
alternating hands with each dribble.
COACHING POINT
Stress that players need to keep their head up while dribbling.

Form Shooting to Partner (10 minutes)


Players pair up, facing each other; each pair has a ball. The player with the ball
shoots the ball to his partner using correct shooting form—the elbow is pointed to
the target, the shooting hand is underneath the ball, and the guide hand is on the
side. The player should lift the ball up and toward his partner.
COACHING POINT
You may want players to begin this drill without using basketballs (players take imagi-
nary shots to their partner) so that form is emphasized before the basketball is added.

Pair Passing, Air and Bounce (10 minutes)


Players pair up, and each pair stands about 6 to 8 feet (183 to 244 cm) from each
other. On command, the player with the ball passes to her partner using an air pass
(a pass that does not touch the floor) or a bounce pass. Both hands and arms should
be used to make the pass; the elbows should be close to the body, and the thumbs
should be down with palms out after the pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Show the players that a bounce pass should be caught by the partner at the
same level that the ball was passed from.
• Note that young players tend to bring the ball above the head to pass;
emphasize that each pass should be made from the waist.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for all
the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a defen-
sive slide to the right and left, keeping the knees bent and the hands above the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

166
7-8 years old

Defensive Mirror (10 minutes)


Ask players to pair up, with one player on each side of a line on the court (such as
the free-throw line or baseline). One player is designated as the offensive player;
this player will move in a quick manner back and forth on her side of the line. The
other player is the defender and must slide her feet and try to stay with the offensive
player as she moves. The offensive player should remain in a 6- to 8-foot space as
she moves back and forth.
COACHING POINT
Tell defenders to keep their eyes on the waist of their offensive player as they move
to stay with her. Also teach defenders to avoid crossing their legs.

One-on-One No-Ball Tag (10 minutes)


Have players pair up. One partner begins on the baseline, facing the court; this
player is the offensive player. The other partner is the defensive player. This player
starts at the free-throw line and is facing the offensive player. On command, the
offensive player tries to get to the opposite baseline while the defensive player tries
to tag or touch him.
COACHING POINT
This is a good drill for working on quickness and change of direction. The defensive
player must keep the offensive player in front of him in order to make the tag.

Dribble Freeze Tag (10 minutes)


Each player has a basketball (if this is not possible, players can be split up into two
groups, and the drill can be performed by one group at a time). One player is des-
ignated as Michael Jordan, LeBron James, or any other star your players may know.
On command, all players begin dribbling, and this player tries to touch the other
players (all players are still maintaining their dribble). Once touched, a player must
freeze, still dribbling while stationary. After a specified number of dribbles (to be
determined by the coach), the player may be unfrozen.
COACHING POINT
Limit the area for the game to one half of the court or even from free-throw line to
baseline so the designated player has more success.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Midseason Practices
Midseason practices will include fewer individual drills and more multiple-player
drills. The coach can implement drills that emphasize several skills in one drill. Play-
ers will become more comfortable with performing skills in a team setting.

167
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

7-8 years old

Midseason Practice Plan 1


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Dribble–Pivot–Pass (10 minutes)


Players line up on the sideline with no more than three players per line. The first
player takes three right-handed dribbles out and comes to a stop. He then executes
a reverse pivot (a front pivot may also be used) and makes a chest pass to the next
player in line. The passer goes to the end of the line after the pass, and the next
player (the one who caught the pass) dribbles out and makes the pivot and pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should execute the pivot with the knees bent
to make the pass.
• Depending on ability, players may instead use bounce passes or one-hand
push passes in the drill.

Dribble Layups (10 minutes)


Players begin in a line starting at the free-throw line elbow. Each player has a bas-
ketball. One at a time, players dribble to the basket and perform a layup. The coach
rebounds for each player and hands the ball back to him; the player then goes to
the back of the line to wait for another turn.
COACHING POINT
You may also want to start this drill without basketballs. Have the players use an
imaginary dribble for a layup before adding the ball.

Form Shooting to Partner (10 minutes)


Players pair up, facing each other; each pair has a ball. The player with the ball
shoots the ball to his partner using correct shooting form—the elbow is pointed to
the target, the shooting hand is underneath the ball, and the guide hand is on the
side. The player should lift the ball up and toward his partner.
COACHING POINT
You may want players to begin this drill without using basketballs (players take imagi-
nary shots to their partner) so that form is emphasized before the basketball is added.

168

www.Ebook777.com
7-8 years old

Two-Line Passing, Chest and Bounce (10 minutes)


Divide the squad into two lines (8 to 12 feet [2.4 to 3.6 m] apart) facing each other;
the first person in one line should have a basketball. This player passes the ball using
a chest pass to the first person in the opposite line. The passer follows his pass and
goes to the end of the opposite line. The drill continues as the players pass the ball
and follow it. Once players have practiced the chest pass, they should perform the
same drill using the bounce pass.
COACHING POINTS
• The passer’s elbows should be close to the body when executing a chest or
bounce pass.
• The receiver needs to make sure his hands are up, showing a good target with
the fingers and thumb in a W shape.

Dribble and Shoot Contest (10 minutes)


Divide players into two or more teams, depending on the number of players. Each
team should be limited to three or four players and should have their own basket,
if possible. You can have the players start at any place on the court—for example,
the free-throw line. The first player on each team dribbles to the basket for a shot,
gets her own rebound, and passes back to the next player in line. Each team should
count their made baskets. Continue for a specified amount of time and count the
made baskets for each group.
COACHING POINT
This shooting drill can also be used for layups or bank shots.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left, keeping the knees bent and the hands above
the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

Defensive Mirror (10 minutes)


Ask players to pair up, with one player on each side of a line on the court (such as
the free-throw line or baseline). One player is designated as the offensive player;
this player will move in a quick manner back and forth on her side of the line. The
other player is the defender and must slide her feet and try to stay with the offensive

169
7-8 years old

player as she moves. The offensive player should remain in a 6- to 8-foot space as
she moves back and forth.
COACHING POINT
Tell defenders to keep their eyes on the waist of their offensive player as they move
to stay with her. Also teach defenders to avoid crossing their legs.

Three-on-Three Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line is an
offensive player. These players start on the court, facing the basket. The second
player in each line is a defensive player. These players defend the offensive players.
The rest of the players remain on the baseline. The offensive team tries to score by
using cuts and screens. The defensive players work to stay with the offensive player
they are assigned to guard. When a basket is made or the defense gets the ball,
the defensive team goes to offense, and the next three players in line become the
defensive team. Play for a certain amount of time or to a specified score.
COACHING POINTS
• If one player tends to dribble the ball too much, put a limit on the number of
dribbles for the offensive team.
• Rules requiring specific techniques—such as pass and cut to the basket or
pass and screen away for a teammate—can also be implemented.

Three-on-Two Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide the team into three lines at the half-court line. Two defensive players are in
the lane; one player is at the free-throw line, and the other is in the middle of the
lane. The coach begins the drill by throwing the ball to the first player in the middle
line at half-court. The other two offensive players are wings, positioned out wide on
the sides of the court. The middle player makes a pass to one of the wing players,
staying to the side of the pass for a possible return pass. The three offensive play-
ers try to attack the two defensive players to score. The offensive team should work
to get a shot in three passes or less. After the play is over, the two wings move to
defense, and the other three players go to the end of the lines.
COACHING POINTS
• Defensive players should be in a tandem position, with the back defender
guarding the first pass to the wing and the top defender dropping back to
the middle of the lane.
• The middle offensive player must slide to the elbow of the lane to the same
side of the pass so that this player is in position to get the ball back for a jump
shot.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two

170
7-8 years old

post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINTS
• The coach can also ask each player to shoot two free throws until the pair
makes four in a row.
• As the season progresses, the coach may increase the number of consecutive
free throws made from two to three, three to four, and four to five.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Midseason Practice Plan 2


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Dribble–Pivot–Pass (10 minutes)


Players line up on the sideline with no more than three players per line. The first
player takes three right-handed dribbles out and comes to a stop. He then executes
a reverse pivot (a front pivot may also be used) and makes a chest pass to the next
player in line. The passer goes to the end of the line after the pass, and the next
player (the one who caught the pass) dribbles out and makes the pivot and pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should execute the pivot with the knees bent
to make the pass.
• Depending on ability, players may instead use bounce passes or one-hand
push passes in the drill.

171
7-8 years old

Layups With Crossover Dribble (10 minutes)


Players set up in one line at the half-court line in the middle of the court. Place a
cone at the top of the three-point line. The first player in line dribbles from the half-
court line to the cone, performs a crossover dribble at the cone, and then dribbles
to the basket for a layup. Players should start with a left-handed dribble and cross
over to the right hand for a right-handed layup.
COACHING POINTS
• Start players on the wing or baseline to get a different approach to the basket.
• Once players get the hang of the drill, proceed to having the players start
with a right-handed dribble and cross over to the left hand for a left-handed
layup.

One-Dribble Shooting From Free-Throw Line (10 minutes)


Players line up in two lines at the free-throw line, one line at each free-throw elbow.
The first player in each line takes one dribble and then comes to a good stop for
a shot. The player gets his own rebound, passes the ball back to the next player in
line, and moves to the end of the line. The drill continues in this fashion for a certain
number of baskets or a specified amount of time.
COACHING POINTS
• Take note of each player’s footwork in this drill, correcting as necessary.
• Emphasize that players should bend their knees on the stop before shooting.

Two-Line Passing, Chest and Bounce (10 minutes)


Divide the squad into two lines (8 to 12 feet apart) facing each other; the first person
in one line should have a basketball. This player passes the ball using a chest pass
to the first person in the opposite line. The passer follows his pass and goes to the
end of the opposite line. The drill continues as the players pass the ball and follow
it. Once players have practiced the chest pass, they should perform the same drill
using the bounce pass.
COACHING POINTS
• The passer’s elbows should be close to the body when executing a chest or
bounce pass.
• The receiver needs to make sure his hands are up, showing a good target with
the fingers and thumb in a W shape.

Three-Line Passing Full Court With One Dribble (10 minutes)


Players form three lines on one baseline; the players in the middle line should have a
ball. On command, the middle player takes one dribble toward the opposite baseline
and then makes a pass to one of the wing players as all three players are running
toward the opposite baseline. The wing player catches the ball, takes one dribble,
and passes back to the middle player. The middle player then takes one dribble

172
7-8 years old

and passes to the opposite wing player. All three players end up on the opposite
baseline as the next group of three proceeds downcourt in the same manner.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should rotate lines after they reach the baseline so each player has an
opportunity to begin in the middle line.
• Emphasize that passes should be made ahead of the player who is running
down the court.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left, keeping the knees bent and the hands above
the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

Defensive Mirror (10 minutes)


Ask players to pair up, with one player on each side of a line on the court (such as
the free-throw line or baseline). One player is designated as the offensive player;
this player will move in a quick manner back and forth on her side of the line. The
other player is the defender and must slide her feet and try to stay with the offensive
player as she moves. The offensive player should remain in a 6- to 8-foot space as
she moves back and forth.
COACHING POINT
Tell defenders to keep their eyes on the waist of their offensive player as they move
to stay with her. Also teach defenders to avoid crossing their legs.

Three-on-Three Pass, Cut, and Replace (10 minutes)


Organize players into teams of three. One team is the offensive team, and one is the
defensive team; the remaining teams stay on the baseline ready to come onto the
court. The offensive players should be arranged with a player at the top of the key
and two wings. The player at the top of the key begins by making a pass to one of
the wings. After the pass, the player makes a cut to the basket. The opposite wing
then fills the top position, and the cutter fills the vacated wing position. The ball is
then reversed to the top of the key and passed to the other wing; the player at the
top of the key cuts to the basket to repeat the process. The coach designates how
many ball reversals must take place before the ball can be passed to the cutter for
a shot.

173
7-8 years old

COACHING POINTS
• Ask the offense to focus on proper spacing and filling in each position.
• Restrict the defensive team to intercepting passes only; do not allow them to
steal the ball on the dribble.

Three-on-Two, Two-on-One Full Court (10 minutes)


Start with three lines at one end of the court. Two players set up at the opposite end
of the court in a defensive position, one player at the free-throw line and one player
in the middle of the lane. The first three players in line try to score against the two
defenders (three-on-two); the middle player dribbles the ball down the floor and
makes a pass to one wing. After the shot, the two defenders become the offensive
players, moving to the opposite end of the court with the middle offensive player
transitioning to defense (two-on-one). The two wings remain as the defenders in the
lane for the next group of three offensive players.
COACHING POINTS
• The three offensive players should work to get a shot after three or fewer
passes against the two defenders.
• The two offensive players should work to get a shot after two or fewer passes
against the one defender.

Three-on-Three With One Dribble (10 minutes)


Divide players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line is an offen-
sive player. These players start on the court, facing the basket. The second player
in each line is a defensive player. These players defend the offensive players. The
rest of the players remain on the baseline. The offensive team tries to score by using
cuts and screens; each player is allowed only one dribble each time she touches the
ball. The defensive players work to stay with the offensive player they are assigned
to guard. When a basket is made or the defense gets the ball, the defensive team
goes to offense, and the next three players in line become the defensive team. Play
for a certain amount of time or to a specified score.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should learn to cut after a pass and look to get the ball back for a shot.
• Offensive spacing is crucial.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINTS
• The coach can also ask each player to shoot two free throws until the pair
makes four in a row.

174
7-8 years old

• As the season progresses, the coach may increase the number of consecutive
free throws made from two to three, three to four, and four to five.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Midseason Practice Plan 3


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Two-Line Full-Court Passing, Air (10 minutes)


Players line up in two lines on the baseline. Beginning with the first two in each line,
players make air passes (a pass that does not touch the floor) back and forth while
running down the court.
COACHING POINT
Players can also perform a defensive slide down the length of the court as they pass
the ball to each other.

Two-Line Fast Break With Layup (10 minutes)


The team is arranged in two lines, with one line in the lane facing the opposite basket
and the other line at the wing position (players in this line are ready to catch the ball).
The first player in the lane line starts with the ball and passes to the player at the
wing. The wing player dribbles the ball to the opposite free-throw line and makes
a good stop without traveling. The passer runs to the other end in the outside lane
to receive a return pass from the wing. After receiving the return pass, this player
dribbles in for a layup. These two players stay at this end, switching positions, as
the next two players in line take their turn. After all the players have completed the
drill going to one basket, they switch positions and complete the drill going back
to the original basket.
COACHING POINTS
• Make sure the passer runs wide; to stress this, the coach can place cones on
the court and specify that the player must run outside the cones.
• The drill can also be performed with the players executing jump shots off the
glass, power shots, or a pass back to the middle player at the free-throw line
for a shot.

175
7-8 years old

Seven-Spot Shooting, Two Made Shots From Each Spot


(10 minutes)
Pick out seven spots on the floor, marking these spots with tape. Players pair up,
and each pair has a ball. The first player shoots the ball at the first spot, gets her
own rebound, and passes back to her partner, who shoots at the same spot. After
two shots total are made from that spot, the players move to the next spot. Players
must make two shots from each spot before they are done with the drill.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize that shooters must be ready and must have their feet and hands in
good position to shoot when they catch the pass.
• This drill can be changed to require players to make any number of shots
before moving to the next spot or require them to make a certain number in
a row before moving to the next spot.

Two-Line Give-and-Go With Layup (10 minutes)


Arrange players in two lines at the free-throw elbows. The first player in one line
starts with the ball, makes a pass to the player in the opposite line, and gets the
ball back for a layup on a give-and-go play. The shooter then goes to the end of
the passing line, and the passer gets the rebound and goes to the shooting line.
COACHING POINT
You can also use this as a jump shot drill. On the give-and-go cut, the player can
stop and shoot a short jump shot instead of a layup.

Three-on-Three Pass, Cut, and Replace (10 minutes)


Organize players into teams of three. One team is the offensive team, and one is the
defensive team; the remaining teams stay on the baseline ready to come onto the
court. The offensive players should be arranged with a player at the top of the key
and two wings. The player at the top of the key begins by making a pass to one of
the wings. After the pass, the player makes a cut to the basket. The opposite wing
then fills the top position, and the cutter fills the vacated wing position. The ball is
then reversed to the top of the key and passed to the other wing; the player at the
top of the key cuts to the basket to repeat the process. The coach designates how
many ball reversals must take place before the ball can be passed to the cutter for
a shot.
COACHING POINTS
• Ask the offense to focus on proper spacing and filling in each position.
• Restrict the defensive team to intercepting passes only; do not allow them to
steal the ball on the dribble.

176
7-8 years old

Two-on-Two Defensive Jump to Ball (5 minutes)


Players form two lines starting at the free-throw lane extended outside the three-
point line. One defensive player is guarding each offensive player in a two-on-two
situation. The offensive players pass the ball back and forth, moving to any position
on the court. With each pass, the defenders must adjust their positioning so they
are in good help or on-the-ball position. After a specified amount of time, the next
two players in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the
defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINT
The defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so the
defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Three-on-Three Defensive Positioning (10 minutes)


The offensive team is set up with a player at the top of the key and players at both
wings. A defender is guarding each offensive player for a three-on-three situation;
the rest of the team is divided into three lines at half-court. The ball is passed from
the top to the wing, back to the top, to the opposite wing, and so on. The defend-
ers move on each pass so that they are in proper position to help or guard the ball.
After a specified amount of time, the next three players in line move to offense, the
offensive players move to defense, and the defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINT
The defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so the
defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Three-on-Three Defending the Pass and Cut (10 minutes)


This drill is a continuation of the previous three-on-three drill. Offensive players
are positioned at the top of the key and at each wing, and a defender is guarding
each offensive player; the rest of the team is divided into three lines at half-court.
The offensive player at the top of the key cuts to the basket every time he makes
a pass from the top of the key to a wing. The opposite wing then fills the top, and
the cutter goes to the opposite wing. Throughout, the defenders work to move to
each pass and defend the cutter going to the basket. After a specified amount of
time, the next three players in line move to offense, the offensive players move to
defense, and the defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• The defender on the cutter should be in a position between the ball and the
cutter; this takes away the direct pass to the cutter for a shot.
• The defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct
defensive position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out
“Pass!” so the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

177
7-8 years old

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell (10 minutes)


Four players are on offense, and four on defense. The offense is spaced out with
one guard above each free-throw lane outside the three-point line and one player
at each wing. A defender is guarding each offensive player; the rest of the team
is divided into four lines at half-court. One of the guards starts with the ball and
passes it to a wing. As the coach observes, the defenders must adjust to each pass
so they are in good help position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense
continues to pass the ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders adjust
their position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the next four players
in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the defenders
move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.
• Defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so
the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Three-on-Three With One Dribble (10 minutes)


Divide players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line is an offen-
sive player. These players start on the court, facing the basket. The second player
in each line is a defensive player. These players defend the offensive players. The
rest of the players remain on the baseline. The offensive team tries to score by using
cuts and screens; each player is allowed only one dribble each time she touches the
ball. The defensive players work to stay with the offensive player they are assigned
to guard. When a basket is made or the defense gets the ball, the defensive team
goes to offense, and the next three players in line become the defensive team. Play
for a certain amount of time or to a specified score.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should learn to cut after a pass and look to get the ball back for a shot.
• Offensive spacing is crucial.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINTS
• The coach can also ask each player to shoot two free throws until the pair
makes four in a row.
• As the season progresses, the coach may increase the number of consecutive
free throws made from two to three, three to four, and four to five.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________
178
7-8 years old

Late-Season Practices
The late-season practice sessions for this group should involve reviewing the skills
and ability levels of the team and then working on any areas that are a concern. These
practice sessions will also contain more team-oriented drills—three-on-three and
four-on-four drills—than in the early-season and midseason practices. Late-season
practice sessions also involve more five-player work in gamelike conditions.

Late-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Two-Line Full-Court Passing (10 minutes)


Players line up in two lines on the baseline. Beginning with the first two in each
line, players pass the ball back and forth while running down the court. Initially, air
passes (passes that do not touch the floor) should be used in this drill; as the team
progresses, the coach can ask players to also perform the drill using bounce passes.
COACHING POINT
Players can also perform a defensive slide down the length of the court as they pass
the ball to each other.

Full-Court Layups, Right-Handed, 15 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the right side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a right-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without
a ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 15 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 15 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.
179
7-8 years old

Defensive Slides, One-on-Zero and One-on-One (10 minutes)


Divide the players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line per-
forms defensive slides to the other baseline, making a drop step after every three
slides. Once players get the hang of the drill, divide the players into pairs. One
partner now dribbles a basketball, using V-cuts and crossover dribbles to change
direction, from one baseline to the other; the other partner is the defensive player.
The defensive player should slide to stay in front of the dribbler, executing a drop
step each time the offensive player changes direction.
COACHING POINTS
• The offensive players should go slowly so the defense can work on footwork.
• Defensive players should remain one arm’s length away from the dribbler,
keeping their eyes on the dribbler’s waist.

Two-on-Two Half Court (10 minutes)


Players begin in two lines at the half-court line. The first two players in line are the
defensive players, and the next two are the offensive players. The coach passes a
ball to one of the offensive players, and the offensive players dribble, pass, and cut
to try to score. The drill is over when the offense scores or the defensive players
get the rebound. Players rotate from offense to defense and from defense to the
end of the line.
COACHING POINT
Various rules, such as allowing two dribbles, may be implemented in the drill.

Cutthroat, Three-on-Three (10 minutes)


Divide the team into three lines on the baseline; the first players in each line are on
offense, and the second players in each line are on defense. The offensive players
are facing the basket on the court, and the defenders are in defensive position. The
coach starts the drill by passing the ball to one of the offensive players. As a rule,
the offensive players must face the basket in triple-threat position, must move after
they pass, and must thank the passer on a pass that results in a basket. If the offense
fails to follow one of the rules, the whistle blows, and the offensive players must go
to the end of the line. The defense moves to offense, and a new set of three players
comes in on defense. Play for a specified period of time or until one team reaches
a specified number of points. Each basket counts as a point.
COACHING POINT
Teams must leave and come onto the court quickly.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (5 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.

180
7-8 years old

COACHING POINTS
• The coach can also ask each player to shoot two free throws until the pair
makes four in a row.
• As the season progresses, the coach may increase the number of consecutive
free throws made from two to three, three to four, and four to five.

Pair Shooting Contest, From Four Spots (10 minutes)


Players are divided into pairs; each pair has a ball. In this drill, players shoot from
four designated spots chosen by the coach. One player shoots the ball from the
first designated position on the floor (for example, the right elbow), gets his own
rebound, and gives the ball to his partner for the same shot. Both players must make
the shot from this spot before moving to the next spot. The drill continues back and
forth with the players taking turns shooting until each player makes all four shots.
COACHING POINTS
• Try to organize the pairs so the two best shooters are not together.
• To make the drill more difficult, the coach can have the players make five
shots (or any other specified number) each at every spot before moving to
the next.

Out-of-Bounds Play, Review (10 minutes)


Divide your team into groups of five; one group begins on the court. Have every
group of players run your out-of-bounds play without a defense.
COACHING POINTS
• Start with an easy out-of-bounds play for the players; you should not have
more than one play at this point, but you can provide many options.
• Most out-of-bounds plays will begin in a box set, with one player in each
corner of the lane.

Two-on-One Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two lines at half-court; one player is positioned in the middle
of the lane as a defender. The first two players in line dribble and pass the ball to
try to score against the lone defender.
COACHING POINT
The offensive players should only make one or two passes to try to score.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or

181
7-8 years old

post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

10-Basket Shooting Contest (10 minutes)


The squad is divided into groups of no more than three per team. The coach des-
ignates a shooting spot where the team of players will shoot one shot each until
that team makes 10 baskets. Each player rebounds his own shot and passes the ball
back to the next person in line.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should have their feet and hands ready to
shoot before the ball is passed.
• The coach can change the specified number of made shots and the shooting
spots depending on the players’ ability.
• To change up the drill, the coach may specify that the players must shoot
bank shots or must dribble and shoot.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

182
Practices for
12
Ages 9 and 10

Developing practice plans for players in the 9- and 10-year age group
will take some time for the coach. Some of these players may have one to four years
of experience, but for others, this may be the first time they have had any organized
practice sessions with a coach. The coach will need to do some planning in order to
implement drills that will cover the wide range of skill levels that can be present in
this age group.
Players in this age group may start to take on specific positions on the court, such
as the point guard, wings, or post. However, a coach should not lock players into
just one position at this age. Skill development in practice sessions should involve
all players working on skills that are used for all positions. General skill develop-
ment drills will help each young person develop as a player for any position. This is
extremely important, because players who are big and tall at this age may end up as
guards on a varsity high school team, while smaller players may later become post
players or forwards.
Practice sessions should include a good mixture of individual skill development
along with team drills that emphasize several skills in one drill. Players in this age
group may also be ready for some scrimmage work at the midseason or late-season
practice sessions. These scrimmages may range from two-on-two games to five-on-
five games. Make these scrimmages controlled; for example, the drill may start with
the offensive team working to score, the defensive team converting to offense, and
then the teams switching back again. With this format, three possessions take place
before players switch out. This gives the coach a chance to bring up any coaching
points after every three possessions.

183
184 Coaching Youth Basketball

Considerations When Coaching Females


Annie Byrne, Marian Catholic High School girls’ basketball coach
When girls reach the age of 9 or 10, their interest in a particular sport, such as bas-
ketball, often grows or dissipates. Do all that you can to inspire and motivate your
players at this level. Effective motivation can help increase players’ skills and accel-
erate learning. Your motivation alone can drive a good player to continue to excel
or can provide a new player with the belief that she can succeed. Your three main
points of emphasis at this time should be reassurance, motivation, and teaching.
Again, the coach must start with the fundamentals. To effectively engage the girls
at this age, you should include aspects that they enjoy about the game. A good
plan is to start with shooting (which everyone loves). Be sure to teach players the
correct mechanics of shooting and how to execute a proper follow-through. You can
use the traditional concept of BEEF (balance, eyes, elbow, follow-through). Make
sure you are encouraging players to shoot with their strong hand, right or left, and
help them adjust accordingly. Another idea would be to work on ballhandling and
then move to drills in which the players learn that the most important thing when
trying to get past a defender is to change speed and direction. You could end with
a fun but competitive game of dribble tag.
Other points of emphasis may include footwork and ballhandling, defensive
concepts, and the basic rules of the game. At this age, players love to know more
about the game itself. They may not truly understand the rules and how to play
until they get a bit older or more accustomed to the game, but that is a lot closer
than it may seem at this point.

9-10 years old

Early-Season Practices
Early-season practices should be well organized, which will establish the coach’s
organization for all future practice sessions. Skill development is a high priority for
early-season practice sessions. Work on helping your players develop leadership quali-
ties in early-season drills.

Early-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
9-10 years old

COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Pair Passing, Two-Hand Chest (10 minutes)


Players pair up, and each pair stands about 6 to 8 feet (183 to 244 cm) from each
other. On command, the player with the ball passes to his partner using a two-hand
chest pass. Both hands and arms should be used to make the pass; the elbows
should be close to the body, and the thumbs should be down with palms out after
the pass. The partner then passes the ball back, and so on.
COACHING POINT
Emphasize that each pass should be made from the waist.

Two-Line Passing, Chest and Bounce (10 minutes)


Divide the squad into two lines (8 to 12 feet [2.4 to 3.6 m] apart) facing each other;
the first person in one line should have a basketball. This player passes the ball using
a chest pass to the first person in the opposite line. The passer follows his pass and
goes to the end of the opposite line. The drill continues as the players pass the ball
and follow it. Once players have practiced the chest pass, they should perform the
same drill using the bounce pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Make sure that players do not travel as they catch the ball or make the pass
while moving.
• The receiving player must have his hands up in a ready position to catch the
ball.

Stationary Dribbling, Right- and Left-Handed (10 minutes)


Each player has a basketball (if this is not possible, players can be split up into two
groups, and the drill can be performed by one group at a time). The players begin
the drill by dribbling with the right hand first. On the coach’s command, the players
switch hands, now dribbling with the left hand. In this drill, players can work up to
alternating hands with each dribble.
COACHING POINT
Remind players to keep their head and eyes up while dribbling.

Form Shooting to Partner (10 minutes)


Players pair up, facing each other; each pair has a ball. The player with the ball
shoots the ball to his partner using correct shooting form—the elbow is pointed to
the target, the shooting hand is underneath the ball, and the guide hand is on the
side. The player should lift the ball up and toward his partner.

185
9-10 years old

COACHING POINT
You may want players to begin this drill without using basketballs (players take imagi-
nary shots to their partner) so that form is emphasized before the basketball is added.

Three-Line Passing Full Court, Staying in Lanes (10 minutes)


Players form three lines on one baseline; the players in the middle line should have a
ball. On command, the middle player passes to one of the wing players as all three
players are running toward the opposite baseline. The wing player catches the ball
and passes back to the middle player, who then passes to the opposite wing player,
and so on. Players on the wing should stay wide throughout. All three players end
up on the opposite baseline as the next group of three proceeds down the court
in the same manner.
COACHING POINTS
• While running the court, players should pass the ball across their body as they
run forward.
• Players need to keep their hands in and up to call for the ball as they are
running.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left, keeping the knees bent and the hands above
the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

Defensive Mirror (10 minutes)


Ask players to pair up, with one player on each side of a line on the court (such as
the free-throw line or baseline). One player is designated as the offensive player;
this player will move in a quick manner back and forth on her side of the line. The
other player is the defender and must slide her feet and try to stay with the offensive
player as she moves. The offensive player should remain in a 6- to 8-foot space as
she moves back and forth.
COACHING POINT
Tell defenders to keep their eyes on the waist of their offensive player as they move
to stay with her. Also teach defenders to avoid crossing their legs.

186
9-10 years old

Seven-Spot Shooting, Two Made Shots From Each Spot


(10 minutes)
Pick out seven spots on the floor, marking these spots with tape. Players pair up,
and each pair has a ball. The first player shoots the ball at the first spot, gets her
own rebound, and passes back to her partner, who shoots at the same spot. After
two shots total are made from that spot, the players move to the next spot. Players
must make two shots from each spot before they are done with the drill.

COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize that shooters must be ready and must have their feet and hands in
good position to shoot when they catch the pass.
• This drill can be changed to require players to make any number of shots
before moving to the next spot or require them to make a certain number in
a row before moving to the next spot.

Dribble Freeze Tag (10 minutes)


Each player has a basketball (if this is not possible, players can be split up into two
groups, and the drill can be performed by one group at a time). One player is des-
ignated as Michael Jordan, LeBron James, or any other star your players may know.
On command, all players begin dribbling, and this player tries to touch the other
players (all players are still maintaining their dribble). Once touched, a player must
freeze, still dribbling while stationary. After a specified number of dribbles (to be
determined by the coach), the player may be unfrozen.

COACHING POINT
Limit the area for the game to one half of the court or even from free-throw line to
baseline so the designated player has more success.

Dribble and Shoot Contest (10 minutes)


Divide players into two or more teams, depending on the number of players. Each
team should be limited to three or four players and should have their own basket,
if possible. You can have the players start at any place on the court—for example,
the free-throw line. The first player on each team dribbles to the basket for a shot,
gets her own rebound, and passes back to the next player in line. Each team should
count their made baskets. Continue for a specified amount of time and count the
made baskets for each group.

COACHING POINTS
• This shooting drill can also be used for layups or bank shots.
• The coach may need to limit the number of dribbles to two or three before
each shot.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

187
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

9-10 years old

Midseason Practices
Midseason practices for this age group will involve a combination of skill develop-
ment and team drills, as well as some competitive drills. Players will now be ready
to learn how to compete and win or lose; however, for competitive drills, coaches
should be aware of players who are physically more mature and should match them
up accordingly.

Midseason Practice Plan 1


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Dribble–Pivot–Pass (10 minutes)


Players line up on the sideline with no more than three players per line. The first
player takes three right-handed dribbles out and comes to a stop. He then executes
a reverse pivot (a front pivot may also be used) and makes a chest pass to the next
player in line. The passer goes to the end of the line after the pass, and the next
player (the one who caught the pass) dribbles out and makes the pivot and pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should execute the pivot with the knees bent
to make the pass.
• Depending on ability, players may instead use bounce passes or one-hand
push passes in the drill.

Full-Court Layups, Right-Handed, 20 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the right side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a right-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without
a ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 20 by the time a minute has elapsed.

188

www.Ebook777.com
9-10 years old

COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 20 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

Form Shooting to Partner (10 minutes)


Players pair up, facing each other; each pair has a ball. The player with the ball
shoots the ball to his partner using correct shooting form—the elbow is pointed to
the target, the shooting hand is underneath the ball, and the guide hand is on the
side. The player should lift the ball up and toward his partner.
COACHING POINT
You may also ask players to shoot the ball with one hand; this ensures that the elbow
is underneath the basketball in proper position.

Two-Line Passing, Chest and Bounce (10 minutes)


Divide the squad into two lines (8 to 12 feet apart) facing each other; the first person
in one line should have a basketball. This player passes the ball using a chest pass
to the first person in the opposite line. The passer follows his pass and goes to the
end of the opposite line. The drill continues as the players pass the ball and follow
it. Once players have practiced the chest pass, they should perform the same drill
using the bounce pass.
COACHING POINTS
• The passer’s elbows should be close to the body when executing a chest or
bounce pass.
• The receiver needs to make sure his hands are up, showing a good target with
the fingers and thumb in a W shape.

Dribble and Shoot Contest (10 minutes)


Divide players into two or more teams, depending on the number of players. Each
team should be limited to three or four players and should have their own basket,
if possible. You can have the players start at any place on the court—for example,
the free-throw line. The first player on each team dribbles to the basket for a shot,
gets her own rebound, and passes back to the next player in line. Each team should
count their made baskets. Continue for a specified amount of time and count the
made baskets for each group.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should dribble the ball with the outside hand.
• The coach may need to limit the number of dribbles to two or three before
each shot.

189
9-10 years old

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left, keeping the knees bent and the hands above
the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

Two-on-Two Defensive Help (10 minutes)


Players form two lines, one at each wing outside the three-point line. One defensive
player is guarding each offensive player in a two-on-two situation. The wing who
starts with the ball skip passes it to his teammate on the opposite wing. The first
wing’s defender moves from guarding the player with the ball to the help-side rim
line (the imaginary line running from rim to rim in the center of the floor) as the ball is
skipped across to the opposite wing, while his teammate shifts to on-the-ball defense.
After a specified amount of time, the next two players in line move to offense, the
offensive players move to defense, and the defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• The first defender must sprint to the rim line in good defensive position so he
can see the ball and his player.
• The second defender must sprint to the offensive player catching the ball; the
defender’s hands should be up as he closes out on the shot.

Three-on-Three Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line is an
offensive player. These players start on the court, facing the basket. The second
player in each line is a defensive player. These players defend the offensive players.
The rest of the players remain on the baseline. The offensive team tries to score by
dribbling, passing, and using cuts and screens. The defensive players work to stay
with the offensive player they are assigned to guard. When a basket is made or
the defense gets the ball, the defensive team goes to offense, and the next three
players in line become the defensive team. Play for a certain amount of time or to
a specified score.
COACHING POINT
Depending on the ability of your team, you can put restrictions on the players, such
as no stealing the ball from the dribbler on defense, one dribble only for the offense,
or the offense must make three passes before a shot is taken.

190
9-10 years old

Three-on-Two Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide the team into three lines at the half-court line. Two defensive players are in
the lane; one player is at the free-throw line, and the other is in the middle of the
lane. The coach begins the drill by throwing the ball to the first player in the middle
line at half-court. The other two offensive players are wings, positioned out wide on
the sides of the court. The middle player makes a pass to one of the wing players,
staying to the side of the pass for a possible return pass. The three offensive players
try to attack the two defensive players to score. The offensive team should work to
get a shot in two passes or less (the offense should try to make no more passes than
there are defenders). After the play is over, the two wings move to defense, and the
other three players go to the end of the lines.
COACHING POINTS
• Defensive players should be in a tandem position, with the back defender
guarding the first pass to the wing and the top defender dropping back to
the middle of the lane.
• The middle offensive player must slide to the elbow of the lane to the same
side of the pass so that this player is in position to get the ball back for a jump
shot.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

191
9-10 years old

Midseason Practice Plan 2


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Dribble–Pivot–Pass (10 minutes)


Players line up on the sideline with no more than three players per line. The first
player takes three right-handed dribbles out and comes to a stop. He then executes
a reverse pivot (a front pivot may also be used) and makes a chest pass to the next
player in line. The passer goes to the end of the line after the pass, and the next
player (the one who caught the pass) dribbles out and makes the pivot and pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should execute the pivot with the knees bent
to make the pass.
• Depending on ability, players may instead use bounce passes or one-hand
push passes in the drill.

Full-Court Layups, Left-Handed, 20 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the left side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a left-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without a
ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 20 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 20 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

192
9-10 years old

One-Dribble Shooting From Free-Throw Line (10 minutes)


Players line up in two lines at the free-throw line, one line at each free-throw elbow.
The first player in each line takes one dribble and then comes to a good stop for
a shot. The player gets his own rebound, passes the ball back to the next player in
line, and moves to the end of the line. The drill continues in this fashion for a certain
number of baskets or a specified amount of time.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should dribble with the outside hand.
• Once players practice the one-dribble shot, this drill can be made into a
contest between the groups.

Dribble and Shoot Contest (10 minutes)


Divide players into two or more teams, depending on the number of players. Each
team should be limited to three or four players and should have their own basket,
if possible. You can have the players start at any place on the court—for example,
the free-throw line or half-court line. The first player on each team dribbles to the
basket for a shot, gets her own rebound, and passes back to the next player in line.
Each team should count their made baskets. Continue for a specified amount of
time and count the made baskets for each group.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should dribble the ball with the outside hand.
• This drill can also combine dribble moves (such as the crossover) before the
shot.

Three-on-Two, Two-on-One Full Court (10 minutes)


Start with three lines at one end of the court. Two players set up at the opposite end
of the court in a defensive position, one player at the free-throw line and one player
in the middle of the lane. The first three players in line try to score against the two
defenders (three-on-two); the middle player dribbles the ball down the floor and
makes a pass to one wing. After the shot, the two defenders become the offensive
players, moving to the opposite end of the court with the middle offensive player
transitioning to defense (two-on-one). The two wings remain as the defenders in the
lane for the next group of three offensive players.
COACHING POINTS
• The three offensive players should work to get a shot after three or fewer
passes against the two defenders.
• The two offensive players should work to get a shot after two or fewer passes
against the one defender.

193
9-10 years old

Defensive Slide, Sideline to Sideline (5 minutes)


Players line up on one sideline, facing the coach at the end of the court. On com-
mand, the players step and push in a defensive slide to the opposite sideline and
back again.
COACHING POINTS
• The players should start slowly by taking a big step with the foot in the
direction they are going, pushing off the opposite foot in a defensive slide
motion.
• Players need to keep their head level as they slide.

Two-on-Two Defensive Help (10 minutes)


Players form two lines, one at each wing outside the three-point line. One defensive
player is guarding each offensive player in a two-on-two situation. The wing who
starts with the ball skip passes it to his teammate on the opposite wing. The first
wing’s defender moves from guarding the player with the ball to the help-side rim
line (the imaginary line running from rim to rim in the center of the floor) as the ball is
skipped across to the opposite wing, while his teammate shifts to on-the-ball defense.
After a specified amount of time, the next two players in line move to offense, the
offensive players move to defense, and the defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• The first defender must sprint to the rim line in good defensive position so he
can see the ball and his player.
• The second defender must sprint to the offensive player catching the ball; the
defender’s hands should be up as he closes out on the shot.

Three-on-Three Pass, Cut, and Replace (10 minutes)


Organize players into teams of three. One team is the offensive team, and one is the
defensive team; the remaining teams stay on the baseline ready to come onto the
court. The offensive players should be arranged with a player at the top of the key
and two wings. The player at the top of the key begins by making a pass to one of
the wings. After the pass, the player makes a cut to the basket. The opposite wing
then fills the top position, and the cutter fills the vacated wing position. The ball is
then reversed to the top of the key and passed to the other wing; the player at the
top of the key cuts to the basket to repeat the process. The coach designates how
many ball reversals must take place before the ball can be passed to the cutter for
a shot.
COACHING POINT
Ask the offense to focus on proper spacing and filling in each position.

194
9-10 years old

Three-on-Three With One Dribble (10 minutes)


Divide players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line is an offen-
sive player. These players start on the court, facing the basket. The second player
in each line is a defensive player. These players defend the offensive players. The
rest of the players remain on the baseline. The offensive team tries to score by using
cuts and screens; each player is allowed only one dribble each time she touches the
ball. The defensive players work to stay with the offensive player they are assigned
to guard. When a basket is made or the defense gets the ball, the defensive team
goes to offense, and the next three players in line become the defensive team. Play
for a certain amount of time or to a specified score.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should learn to cut after a pass and look to get the ball back for a shot.
• Offensive spacing is crucial.

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell (10 minutes)


Four players are on offense, and four on defense. The offense is spaced out with
one guard above each free-throw lane outside the three-point line and one player
at each wing. A defender is guarding each offensive player; the rest of the team
is divided into four lines at half-court. One of the guards starts with the ball and
passes it to a wing. As the coach observes, the defenders must adjust to each pass
so they are in good help position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense
continues to pass the ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders adjust
their position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the next four players
in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the defenders
move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.
• Defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so
the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

195
9-10 years old

Midseason Practice Plan 3


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Two-Line Fast Break With Layup (10 minutes)


The team is arranged in two lines, with one line in the lane facing the opposite basket
and the other line at the wing position (players in this line are ready to catch the ball).
The first player in the lane line starts with the ball and passes to the player at the wing.
The wing player dribbles the ball to the opposite free-throw line and makes a good
stop without traveling. The passer runs to the other end in the outside lane to receive
a return pass from the wing. After receiving the return pass, this player dribbles in for
a layup. These two players stay at this end, switching positions, as the next two play-
ers in line take their turn. After all the players have completed the drill going to one
basket, they switch positions and complete the drill going back to the original basket.
COACHING POINTS
• Make sure the passer runs wide; to stress this, the coach can place cones on
the court and specify that the player must run outside the cones.
• The drill can also be performed with the players executing jump shots off the
glass, power shots, or a pass back to the middle player at the free-throw line
for a shot.

Full-Court Layups, Left-Handed, 25 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the left side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a left-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without a
ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 25 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 25 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

196
9-10 years old

Four-Corner Passing and Jump Shots (10 minutes)


Begin this drill with one line of players in each corner of the court, with two balls
in opposite corners (four balls total). The first player in each line with a ball (the
shooting lines) takes a few dribbles forward, then passes the ball to the first player
in line at the other end of the court (the passing lines). The passer follows the pass,
receives a return pass, and takes a shot. He then moves to the end of the same line
at this end (the passing line), while the player who made the return pass rebounds
the ball, passes it to the opposite corner at the same end, and moves to the end of
that line (the shooting line).
COACHING POINTS
• Shooters need to have their feet in the proper position for shooting when
they catch the ball.
• Rebounders should look to make good outlet passes.

Two-Ball Dribbling (10 minutes)


Players pair up along one sideline. The first player in each pair has two basketballs;
this player dribbles both balls simultaneously from one sideline to the other and
back. She then hands off the balls to her partner, who continues the drill.
COACHING POINTS
• Players need to keep their head up while dribbling both balls; they should not
look at the basketballs.
• After players dribble both balls simultaneously, they can repeat the drill, this
time alternating bounces while dribbling both balls.

Three-on-Two Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide the team into three lines at the half-court line. Two defensive players are in
the lane; one player is at the free-throw line, and the other is in the middle of the
lane. The coach begins the drill by throwing the ball to the first player in the middle
line at half-court. The other two offensive players are wings, positioned out wide on
the sides of the court. The middle player makes a pass to one of the wing players,
staying to the side of the pass for a possible return pass. The three offensive players
try to attack the two defensive players to score. The offensive team should work to
get a shot in two passes or less (the offense should try to make no more passes than
there are defenders). After the play is over, the two wings move to defense, and the
other three players go to the end of the lines.
COACHING POINTS
• Defensive players should be in a tandem position, with the back defender
guarding the first pass to the wing and the top defender dropping back to
the middle of the lane.
• The middle offensive player must slide to the elbow of the lane to the same
side of the pass so that this player is in position to get the ball back for a jump
shot.

197
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

9-10 years old

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell, Jump to Ball (5 minutes)


As in the four-on-four defensive shell drill, four players are on offense, and four on
defense. The offense is spaced out with one guard above each free-throw lane out-
side the three-point line and one player at each wing. A defender is guarding each
offensive player; the rest of the team is divided into four lines at half-court. One of
the guards starts with the ball and passes it to a wing. As the coach observes, the
defenders must jump to the ball, adjusting to each pass so they are in good help
position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense continues to pass the
ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders jump to the ball and adjust
their position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the next four players
in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the defenders
move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.
• Defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so
the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Three-on-Three Defensive Help (10 minutes)


In this three-on-three drill, the defense works on defending dribble penetration
by the offensive players, who are trying to get to the basket. The defender who is
guarding the player closest to the dribbler must help stop the dribbler, recovering
back to his own player once the ball has been passed back out.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders need to stay in a good defensive stance.
• Defenders need to watch the dribbler as well as the player they are guarding
so they can be in a position to help.

Cutthroat, Four-on-Four (10 minutes)


Divide the team into four lines on the baseline; the first players in each line are on
offense, and the second players in each line are on defense. The offensive players
are facing the basket on the court. The coach starts the drill by passing the ball to
one of the offensive players. The defenders run from the baseline to close out on the
offense in defensive position. As a rule, the offensive players must face the basket
in triple-threat position, must move after they pass, and must thank the passer on a
pass that results in a basket. If the offense fails to follow one of the rules, the whistle
blows, and the offensive players must go to the end of the line. The defense moves
to offense, and a new set of three players comes in on defense. Play for a specified
period of time or until one team reaches a specified number of points. Each basket
counts as a point.

198

www.Ebook777.com
9-10 years old

COACHING POINTS
• Teams must leave and come onto the court quickly.
• Players must perform the action specified by each rule immediately; if not,
the team is out.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Five-on-Five Scrimmage, Controlled (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two teams of five for a scrimmage that involves using the
skills and tactics that the players have learned so far in practices. Have the players
go five-on-five half court and transition into a full-court scrimmage after a made or
missed basket. They should stop at the other end, then again go five-on-five into a
full-court scrimmage. Sub players as necessary.
COACHING POINTS
• The coach should stop play when necessary to explain areas on both offense
and defense that need work.
• Offensive players need to sprint back on a change of possession in order to
stop the ball first.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

199
9-10 years old

Late-Season Practices
Practice drills during the late season will include team drills that help develop team
skills as well as individual skills. The coach should plan carefully in order to account
for individual differences in the skill levels on the team.

Late-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Four-Corner Passing and Jump Shots (10 minutes)


Begin this drill with one line of players in each corner of the court, with two balls in
opposite corners (four balls total). The first player in each line with a ball (the shooting
lines) takes a few dribbles forward, then passes the ball to the first player in line at
the other end of the court (the passing lines). The passer follows the pass, receives
a return pass, and takes a shot. He then moves to the end of the same line at this
end (the passing line), while the player who made the return pass rebounds the ball,
passes it to the opposite corner at the same end, and moves to the end of that line
(the shooting line). The goal is to make 10 jump shots in one minute.
COACHING POINTS
• Shooters need to have their feet in the proper position for shooting when
they catch the ball.
• Rebounders should look to make good outlet passes.

Full-Court Layups, Right-Handed, 30 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the right side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a right-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without
a ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 30 by the time a minute has elapsed.

200
9-10 years old

COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 30 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

Defensive Slides, One-on-Zero and One-on-One (10 minutes)


Divide the players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line per-
forms defensive slides to the other baseline, making a drop step after every three
slides. Once players get the hang of the drill, divide the players into pairs. One
partner now dribbles a basketball, using V-cuts and crossover dribbles to change
direction, from one baseline to the other; the other partner is the defensive player.
The defensive player should slide to stay in front of the dribbler, executing a drop
step each time the offensive player changes direction.
COACHING POINTS
• The offensive players should go slowly so the defense can work on footwork.
• Defensive players should remain one arm’s length away from the dribbler,
keeping their eyes on the dribbler’s waist.

Three-on-Three Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line is an
offensive player. These players start on the court, facing the basket. The second
player in each line is a defensive player. These players defend the offensive players.
The rest of the players remain on the baseline. The offensive team tries to score by
dribbling, passing, and using cuts and screens. The defensive players work to stay
with the offensive player they are assigned to guard. When a basket is made or
the defense gets the ball, the defensive team goes to offense, and the next three
players in line become the defensive team. Play for a certain amount of time or to
a specified score.
COACHING POINT
Depending on the ability of your team, you can put restrictions on the players, such
as no stealing the ball from the dribbler on defense, one dribble only for the offense,
or the offense must make three passes before a shot is taken.

Cutthroat, Four-on-Four (10 minutes)


Divide the team into four lines on the baseline; the first players in each line are on
offense, and the second players in each line are on defense. The offensive players
are facing the basket on the court. The coach starts the drill by passing the ball to
one of the offensive players. The defenders run from the baseline to close out on the
offense in defensive position. As a rule, the offensive players must face the basket

201
9-10 years old

in triple-threat position, must move after they pass, and must thank the passer on a
pass that results in a basket. If the offense fails to follow one of the rules, the whistle
blows, and the offensive players must go to the end of the line. The defense moves
to offense, and a new set of three players comes in on defense. Play for a specified
period of time or until one team reaches a specified number of points. Each basket
counts as a point.
COACHING POINTS
• Teams must leave and come onto the court quickly.
• Players must perform the action specified by each rule immediately; if not,
the team is out.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (5 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.

Pair Shooting Contest, From Four Spots (10 minutes)


Players are divided into pairs; each pair has a ball. In this drill, players shoot from
four designated spots chosen by the coach. One player shoots the ball from the
first designated position on the floor (for example, the right elbow), gets his own
rebound, and gives the ball to his partner for the same shot. Both players must make
the shot from this spot before moving to the next spot. The drill continues back and
forth with the players taking turns shooting until each player makes all four shots.
COACHING POINTS
• Try to organize the pairs so the two best shooters are not together.
• To make the drill more difficult, the coach can have the players make five
shots (or any other specified number) each at every spot before moving to
the next.

Out-of-Bounds Play, Review (10 minutes)


Divide your team into groups of five; one group begins on the court. Have every
group of players run your out-of-bounds play without a defense.
COACHING POINTS
• Start with an easy out-of-bounds play for the players; you should not have
more than one play at this point, but you can provide many options.
• Most out-of-bounds plays will begin in a box set, with one player in each
corner of the lane.

202
9-10 years old

Two-on-One Half Court (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two lines at half-court; one player is positioned in the middle
of the lane as a defender. The first two players in line dribble and pass the ball to
try to score against the lone defender.
COACHING POINT
The offensive players should only make one or two passes to try to score.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Four-Quarter Shooting (10 minutes)


This is a three-player drill using two balls. Two players have a ball. One player with
a ball shoots her ball, rebounds, and passes the ball to the player who does not
have a ball. The other player with the ball shoots her ball immediately after the first
player, gets the rebound, and passes to the player who now does not have a ball
(the first shooter). After the shot, each player repositions for the pass from the next
shooter. Play for four minutes, keeping track of made baskets.
COACHING POINT
The shooter must get a rebound, pass the ball, and then immediately look for the
pass from the next shooter.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

203
13 Practices for
Ages 11 and 12

Players in this age group will start to see a lot of improvement in skill
development, and they will be anxious to work on team drills along with improving
their individual skills. In each practice, the coach should try to include drills that
work on several skills at the same time. Though the emphasis in these drills may be
on one or two skills, the players are also working on other skills during the drill. The
coach should emphasize the skill that needs the most work.
For players at this age, competitive drills are effective for keeping the players’ interest
as well as enhancing their skill development. Competition may come in the form of
player versus player or time and score. Competition during drills will allow players
to become acclimated to gamelike conditions and work on performing skills under
the same pressure found in game situations.
Particularly with this age group, the coach should remember the six guidelines
for shaping skills, as described on page 50 of part II. The coach will now start to use
more offensive strategies to attack defenses. Out-of-bounds plays and other special
situations should be worked on in practice; the players play more games throughout
the season, so they need to practice these situations.
Coaches should start to help players develop leadership qualities. Some ideas
for developing leadership qualities in players include asking individual players to
demonstrate a new drill, asking individual players to verbalize either strategy or how
to perform a drill to the rest of the team, and asking individual players to organize
drills themselves.

204
Practices for Ages 11 and 12 205

Considerations When Coaching Females


Annie Byrne, Marian Catholic High School girls’ basketball coach
Ages 11 and 12 can be an awkward time for girls because their bodies are grow-
ing and changing. Coordination and balance may be a bit of a challenge for some
taller girls who are having a difficult time getting their body to do what their brain
wants it to do. Encouragement is a key ingredient at this time. At this point, the
girls have likely been participating in basketball to some extent through school
basketball, camps, skills clinics, and so on. To determine where to start with a par-
ticular group, the coach should evaluate their ability to perform basic skills such as
correct footwork and the mechanics of shooting. The coach can also evaluate the
players’ understanding of defensive concepts (man-to-man and zone), rules of the
game, and positions (guards, forwards, posts).
Having these girls do ladder work (exercises in which players jump into and out
of a rope ladder placed on the floor) and jump rope is a good idea because this
helps them with balance and coordination. When incorporating sprints into practice,
an effective method is to have the players sprint to half-court and then turn and
backpedal to the baseline. This enables the players to work on changing direction
and speed while keeping balance and increasing foot speed. Other drills to con-
sider are ones that will increase ability while raising confidence. Some suggestions
are three-line passing, one-on-one defensive slides, shell drills, box-out drills, and
transition drills (three-on-two, two-on-one).

11-12 years old

Early-Season Practices
Early-season practice sessions should always begin with a review of fundamental
skills. Not only is this a good refresher for the players, but it also helps the coach to
evaluate the skill levels of his players and plan for future practice sessions.

Early-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
11-12 years old

COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Pair Passing, Two-Hand Chest (10 minutes)


Players pair up, and each pair stands about 6 to 8 feet (183 to 244 cm) from each
other. On command, the player with the ball passes to his partner using a two-hand
chest pass. Both hands and arms should be used to make the pass; the elbows
should be close to the body, and the thumbs should be down with palms out after
the pass. The partner then passes the ball back, and so on.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should step toward the target as they pass the ball.
• Receivers should have their hands up ready for the catch.

Two-Line Passing: Chest, Bounce, Overhead, and Baseball


(10 minutes)
Divide the squad into two lines facing each other; the lines should be at least lane-
width apart depending on player ability. The first person in one line should have a
basketball. This player passes the ball using a chest pass to the first person in the
opposite line. The passer follows his pass and goes to the end of the opposite line.
The drill continues as the players pass the ball and follow it. Once players have
practiced the chest pass, they should perform the same drill using the bounce pass,
overhead pass, and baseball pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should step as they pass the ball, making the pass more direct.
• To help communication, players should call out the name of the player they
are passing to.

Four-Line Dribbling, Crossover (10 minutes)


Players are in four lines on each sideline, facing each other. The first player in each
line starts with a right-handed dribble, dribbling to midcourt, where each player
crosses over to the left hand and continues to the opposite line. Each player makes
a jump stop and passes to the next player in the opposite line. The drill continues
back and forth with players performing the crossover dribble.
COACHING POINTS
• Players must keep their head and chin up on the crossover in order to avoid a
collision with the player coming from the opposite direction.
• The crossover dribble should be low, below the knees.

206
11-12 years old

Form Shooting (10 minutes)


Players stand two to three feet from a basket, placing the ball in one hand. Players
bend the knees and shoot the ball one handed to the basket. This drill helps the
players develop the proper fundamentals of shooting.
COACHING POINTS
• The elbow of the shooting arm should be at shoulder level and should not
drop lower when executing the one-hand shot.
• Players must be careful not to grip the ball like a baseball or softball; the ball
should rest on the hand.

Three-Line Passing Full Court, Staying in Lanes (10 minutes)


Players form three lines on one baseline; the players in the middle line should have a
ball. On command, the middle player passes to one of the wing players as all three
players are running toward the opposite baseline. The wing player catches the ball
and passes back to the middle player, who then passes to the opposite wing player,
and so on. Players on the wing should stay wide throughout. All three players end
up on the opposite baseline as the next group of three proceeds down the court
in the same manner.
COACHING POINTS
• While running the court, players should pass the ball across their body as they
run forward.
• Players need to keep their hands in and up to call for the ball as they are
running.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left and from front to back, keeping the knees bent
and the hands above the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

207
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

11-12 years old

Defensive Mirror (10 minutes)


Ask players to pair up, with one player on each side of a line on the court (such as
the free-throw line or baseline). One player is designated as the offensive player;
this player will move in a quick manner back and forth on her side of the line. The
other player is the defender and must slide her feet and try to stay with the offensive
player as she moves. The offensive player should remain in a 6- to 8-foot space as
she moves back and forth.
COACHING POINT
Tell defenders to keep their eyes on the waist of their offensive player as they move
to stay with her. Also teach defenders to avoid crossing their legs.

Seven-Spot Shooting, Two Made Shots From Each Spot


(10 minutes)
Pick out seven spots on the floor, marking these spots with tape. Players pair up,
and each pair has a ball. The first player shoots the ball at the first spot, gets her
own rebound, and passes back to her partner, who shoots at the same spot. After
two shots total are made from that spot the players move to the next spot. Players
must make two shots from each spot before they are done with the drill.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize that shooters must be ready and must have their feet and hands in
good position to shoot when they catch the pass.
• This drill can be changed to require players to make any number of shots
before moving to the next spot or require them to make a certain number in
a row before moving to the next spot.

Two-on-One Fast Break Half Court (10 minutes)


Players form three lines at the baseline. On command, the first three players run to
half-court. The middle player then runs back and gets in position to be a defender.
The coach passes the ball to one of the players at half-court, and these players attack
the basket in a two-on-one situation.
COACHING POINTS
• Offensive players should try to get a good shot with no more than one pass.
• Most of the time, a bounce pass should be thrown in a two-on-one situation.

Three-on-Two Fast Break Half Court (10 minutes)


Players form five lines at the baseline. On command, the first five players run to
half-court. The middle player and the two outside players in line will be the offensive
players, and the other two players will move back as defenders. The coach passes
the ball to the middle player at the half-court line, and the offensive players attack
the defenders in a three-on-two situation.

208

www.Ebook777.com
11-12 years old

COACHING POINTS
• The offensive team should try to score with only two passes.
• After the middle player passes to one of the wings, this player should go to
the side of the pass at the free-throw line elbow for a possible return pass.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Midseason Practices
At this level, midseason practices will become more competitive and include more
team drills. However, players still need to work on the basic skills of passing, shoot-
ing, rebounding, and dribbling during these practice sessions.

Midseason Practice Plan 1


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Dribble–Pivot–Pass (10 minutes)


Players line up on the sideline with no more than three players per line. The first
player takes three right-handed dribbles out and comes to a stop. He then executes
a reverse pivot (a front pivot may also be used) and makes a chest pass to the next
player in line. The passer goes to the end of the line after the pass, and the next
player (the one who caught the pass) dribbles out and makes the pivot and pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should execute the pivot with the knees bent
to make the pass.
• Depending on ability, players may instead use bounce passes or one-hand
push passes in the drill.

Full-Court Layups, Right-Handed, 30 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the right side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and

209
11-12 years old

shoots a right-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without
a ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 30 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 30 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

Form Shooting (10 minutes)


Players stand two to three feet from a basket, placing the ball in one hand. Players
bend the knees and shoot the ball one handed to the basket. This drill helps the
players develop the proper fundamentals of shooting.
COACHING POINTS
• The elbow of the shooting arm should be at shoulder level and should not
drop lower when executing the one-hand shot.
• Players must be careful not to grip the ball like a baseball or softball; the ball
should rest on the hand.

Two-Line Passing: Chest, Bounce, Overhead, and Baseball


(10 minutes)
Divide the squad into two lines facing each other; the lines should be at least lane-
width apart depending on player ability. The first person in one line should have a
basketball. This player passes the ball using a chest pass to the first person in the
opposite line. The passer follows his pass and goes to the end of the opposite line.
The drill continues as the players pass the ball and follow it. Once players have
practiced the chest pass, they should perform the same drill using the bounce pass,
overhead pass, and baseball pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should step as they pass the ball, making the pass more direct.
• To help communication, players should call out the name of the player they
are passing to.

Five-on-Zero Fast Break From Rebound (10 minutes)


Five players are positioned in the lane. The coach shoots the ball, and the players
rebound the ball and then move down the court for a five-on-zero fast break on
the opposite end. The rebounder makes an outlet pass to a guard; the wings run in
both outside lanes, the post runs in the middle lane, and the forward is the trailer,
stopping at the free-throw line.

210
11-12 years old

COACHING POINT
The outlet should be to the side of the rebounder, outside the lane.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left, keeping the knees bent and the hands above
the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

Two-on-Two Defensive Help (10 minutes)


Players form two lines, one at each wing outside the three-point line. One defensive
player is guarding each offensive player in a two-on-two situation. The wing who
starts with the ball skip passes it to his teammate on the opposite wing. The first
wing’s defender moves from guarding the player with the ball to the help-side rim
line (the imaginary line running from rim to rim in the center of the floor) as the ball is
skipped across to the opposite wing, while his teammate shifts to on-the-ball defense.
After a specified amount of time, the next two players in line move to offense, the
offensive players move to defense, and the defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• The first defender must sprint to the rim line in good defensive position so he
can see the ball and his player.
• The second defender must sprint to the offensive player catching the ball; the
defender’s hands should be up as he closes out on the shot.

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell (10 minutes)


Four players are on offense, and four on defense. The offense is spaced out with
one guard above each free-throw lane outside the three-point line and one player
at each wing. A defender is guarding each offensive player; the rest of the team
is divided into four lines at half-court. One of the guards starts with the ball and
passes it to a wing. As the coach observes, the defenders must adjust to each pass
so they are in good help position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense
continues to pass the ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders adjust
their position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the next four players
in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the defenders
move to the end of each line.

211
11-12 years old

COACHING POINTS
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.
• Defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so
the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Three-on-Two, Two-on-One Full Court (10 minutes)


Start with three lines at one end of the court. Two players set up at the opposite end
of the court in a defensive position, one player at the free-throw line and one player
in the middle of the lane. The first three players in line try to score against the two
defenders (three-on-two); the middle player dribbles the ball down the floor and
makes a pass to one wing. After the shot, the two defenders become the offensive
players, moving to the opposite end of the court with the middle offensive player
transitioning to defense (two-on-one). The two wings remain as the defenders in the
lane for the next group of three offensive players.
COACHING POINTS
• The three offensive players should work to get a shot after three or fewer
passes against the two defenders.
• The two offensive players should work to get a shot after two or fewer passes
against the one defender.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

212
11-12 years old

Midseason Practice Plan 2


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Dribble–Pivot–Pass (10 minutes)


Players line up on the sideline with no more than three players per line. The first
player takes three right-handed dribbles out and comes to a stop. He then executes
a reverse pivot (a front pivot may also be used) and makes a chest pass to the next
player in line. The passer goes to the end of the line after the pass, and the next
player (the one who caught the pass) dribbles out and makes the pivot and pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should execute the pivot with the knees bent
to make the pass.
• Depending on ability, players may instead use bounce passes or one-hand
push passes in the drill.

Full-Court Layups, Left-Handed, 30 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the left side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a left-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without a
ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 30 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 30 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

213
11-12 years old

Four-Corner Passing and Jump Shots (10 minutes)


Begin this drill with one line of players in each corner of the court, with two balls
in opposite corners (four balls total). The first player in each line with a ball (the
shooting lines) takes a few dribbles forward, then passes the ball to the first player
in line at the other end of the court (the passing lines). The passer follows the pass,
receives a return pass, and takes a shot. He then moves to the end of the same line
at this end (the passing line), while the player who made the return pass rebounds
the ball, passes it to the opposite corner at the same end, and moves to the end of
that line (the shooting line).
COACHING POINTS
• Shooters need to have their feet in the proper position for shooting when
they catch the ball.
• Rebounders should look to make good outlet passes.

Two-Line Fast Break With Layup (10 minutes)


The team is arranged in two lines, with one line in the lane facing the opposite basket
and the other line at the wing position (players in this line are ready to catch the ball).
The first player in the lane line starts with the ball and passes to the player at the
wing. The wing player dribbles the ball to the opposite free-throw line and makes
a good stop without traveling. The passer runs to the other end in the outside lane
to receive a return pass from the wing. After receiving the return pass, this player
dribbles in for a layup. These two players stay at this end, switching positions, as
the next two players in line take their turn. After all the players have completed the
drill going to one basket, they switch positions and complete the drill going back
to the original basket.
COACHING POINTS
• Make sure the passer runs wide; to stress this, the coach can place cones on
the court and specify that the player must run outside the cones.
• The drill can also be performed with the players executing jump shots off the
glass, power shots, or a pass back to the middle player at the free-throw line
for a shot.

Five-on-Zero Fast Break From Rebound (10 minutes)


Five players are positioned in the lane. The coach shoots the ball, and the players
rebound the ball and then move down the court for a five-on-zero fast break on
the opposite end. The rebounder makes an outlet pass to a guard; the wings run in
both outside lanes, the post runs in the middle lane, and the forward is the trailer,
stopping at the free-throw line.
COACHING POINT
The outlet should be to the side of the rebounder, outside the lane.

214
11-12 years old

Two-on-Two Defensive Help (5 minutes)


Players form two lines, one at each wing outside the three-point line. One defensive
player is guarding each offensive player in a two-on-two situation. The wing who
starts with the ball skip passes it to his teammate on the opposite wing. The first
wing’s defender moves from guarding the player with the ball to the help-side rim
line (the imaginary line running from rim to rim in the center of the floor) as the ball is
skipped across to the opposite wing, while his teammate shifts to on-the-ball defense.
After a specified amount of time, the next two players in line move to offense, the
offensive players move to defense, and the defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• The first defender must sprint to the rim line in good defensive position so he
can see the ball and his player.
• The second defender must sprint to the offensive player catching the ball; the
defender’s hands should be up as he closes out on the shot.

Three-on-Three Defensive Help (10 minutes)


In this three-on-three drill, the defense works on defending dribble penetration
by the offensive players, who are trying to get to the basket. The defender who is
guarding the player closest to the dribbler must help stop the dribbler, recovering
back to his own player once the ball has been passed back out.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders need to stay in a good defensive stance.
• Defenders need to watch the dribbler as well as the player they are guarding
so they can be in a position to help.

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell (10 minutes)


Four players are on offense, and four on defense. The offense is spaced out with
one guard above each free-throw lane outside the three-point line and one player
at each wing. A defender is guarding each offensive player; the rest of the team
is divided into four lines at half-court. One of the guards starts with the ball and
passes it to a wing. As the coach observes, the defenders must adjust to each pass
so they are in good help position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense
continues to pass the ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders adjust
their position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the next four players
in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the defenders
move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.

215
11-12 years old

• Defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so
the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Three-on-Two, Two-on-One Full Court (10 minutes)


Start with three lines at one end of the court. Two players set up at the opposite end
of the court in a defensive position, one player at the free-throw line and one player
in the middle of the lane. The first three players in line try to score against the two
defenders (three-on-two); the middle player dribbles the ball down the floor and
makes a pass to one wing. After the shot, the two defenders become the offensive
players, moving to the opposite end of the court with the middle offensive player
transitioning to defense (two-on-one). The two wings remain as the defenders in the
lane for the next group of three offensive players.
COACHING POINTS
• The three offensive players should work to get a shot after three or fewer
passes against the two defenders.
• The two offensive players should work to get a shot after two or fewer passes
against the one defender.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

216
11-12 years old

Midseason Practice Plan 3


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Full-Court Layups, Right-Handed, 40 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the right side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a right-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without
a ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 40 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 40 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

Five-Ball Shooting, Layup With Two Jumpers (10 minutes)


Players are in four lines, one line in each corner. One end will include a player at the
middle of the baseline with a ball. This player and the first player in each line at that
end make two passes as they move to the opposite end for a layup. As the layup is
made by the third player, the two passers (including the middle player) each receive
a ball from the two lines at the opposite end for a jump shot. The player who has
taken the layup rebounds her own shot and turns, making an outlet pass and moving
in the opposite direction with the first two players in line (who have just passed for
jumpers). These players again make two passes for a layup, followed by two jump
shots, and the drill continues. The goal is to make 15 baskets in one minute.
COACHING POINT
At this age, players may need to take several dribbles before passing from one wing
to the other for the layup.

217
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

11-12 years old

Four-Corner Passing and Jump Shots (10 minutes)


Begin this drill with one line of players in each corner of the court, with two balls in
opposite corners (four balls total). The first player in each line with a ball (the shooting
lines) takes a few dribbles forward, then passes the ball to the first player in line at
the other end of the court (the passing lines). The passer follows the pass, receives
a return pass, and takes a shot. He then moves to the end of the same line at this
end (the passing line), while the player who made the return pass rebounds the ball,
passes it to the opposite corner at the same end, and moves to the end of that line
(the shooting line). The goal is to make 10 jump shots in one minute.
COACHING POINTS
• Shooters need to have their feet in the proper position for shooting when
they catch the ball.
• Rebounders should look to make good outlet passes.

Cutthroat, Four-on-Four (10 minutes)


Divide the team into four lines on the baseline; the first players in each line are on
offense, and the second players in each line are on defense. The offensive players
are facing the basket on the court. The coach starts the drill by passing the ball to
one of the offensive players. The defenders run from the baseline to close out on the
offense in defensive position. As a rule, the offensive players must face the basket
in triple-threat position, must move after they pass, and must thank the passer on a
pass that results in a basket. If the offense fails to follow one of the rules, the whistle
blows, and the offensive players must go to the end of the line. The defense moves
to offense, and a new set of three players comes in on defense. Play for a specified
period of time or until one team reaches a specified number of points. Each basket
counts as a point.
COACHING POINTS
• Players must perform the action specified by each rule immediately; if not,
the team is out.
• Other rules can be added, such as limiting the offense to two dribbles or not
allowing the offense to shoot until a ball screen has occurred or all players
have touched the ball.

11-Player Fast Break (10 minutes)


A line of players is set up at each of the four wing areas in the full court. Two defenders
are positioned at the free-throw line and lane on both sides of the court, and three
offensive players are at half-court with the ball. The drill begins with the offensive
players going against two of the defenders. Once the shot is taken by the offense,
the defenders rebound the ball either on a make or a miss. Two of the three offensive
players remain on the court as defenders, and the other goes to the end of one of
the wing lines. The defender who gets the rebound makes an outlet pass to one of
the first players in line at the wings. With the other wing and the defender, this wing

218

www.Ebook777.com
11-12 years old

dribbles down to the opposite court for a three-on-two situation. The drill continues
in this fashion for a set amount of time.
COACHING POINTS
• Make sure that outlet players are very vocal in calling for the ball.
• The defender who makes the outlet pass should follow wide to the side, filling
the wing on the fast break.

10-Basket Shooting Contest (5 minutes)


The squad is divided into groups of no more than three per team. The coach des-
ignates a shooting spot where the team of players will shoot one shot each until
that team makes 10 baskets. Each player rebounds his own shot and passes the ball
back to the next person in line.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should have their feet and hands ready to
shoot before the ball is passed.
• The coach can change the specified number of made shots and the shooting
spots depending on the players’ ability.

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell (10 minutes)


Four players are on offense, and four on defense. The offense is spaced out with
one guard above each free-throw lane outside the three-point line and one player
at each wing. A defender is guarding each offensive player; the rest of the team
is divided into four lines at half-court. One of the guards starts with the ball and
passes it to a wing. As the coach observes, the defenders must adjust to each pass
so they are in good help position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense
continues to pass the ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders adjust
their position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the next four players
in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the defenders
move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.
• Defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so
the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Five-on-Four Fast Break With Defensive Trailer (10 minutes)


Divide the team into five lines across the baseline, with five players facing them at
the free-throw line. The coach begins the drill by throwing the ball to one of the

219
11-12 years old

first players in line at the baseline. The player opposite the pass at the free-throw
line runs to touch the baseline while the rest of the players move down the court in
a five-on-four situation. The player who touches the baseline is the trailer, catching
up to make the drill a five-on-five.
COACHING POINTS
• The offense should attack the four defenders, trying to get a fast break basket
before the fifth defender comes into play.
• The defense needs to stop the ball first, slowing the offensive team down
until the fifth defender catches up.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Five-on-Five Scrimmage, Controlled (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two teams of five for a scrimmage that involves using the
skills and tactics that the players have learned so far in practices. Have the players
go five-on-five half court and transition into a full-court scrimmage after a made or
missed basket. They should stop at the other end, then again go five-on-five into a
full-court scrimmage. Sub players as necessary.
COACHING POINTS
• The coach should stop play when necessary to explain areas on both offense
and defense that need work.
• Offensive players need to sprint back on a change of possession in order to
stop the ball first.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

220
11-12 years old

Late-Season Practices
Late-season practices will be geared more toward team drills, but as always, players
will continue to work on skills. The coach should attempt to keep the practice ses-
sions fresh by adding new drills that keep the players interested and enthused about
coming to practice. Repetition is the key to skill development.

Late-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Four-Corner Passing and Jump Shots (10 minutes)


Begin this drill with one line of players in each corner of the court, with two balls in
opposite corners (four balls total). The first player in each line with a ball (the shooting
lines) takes a few dribbles forward, then passes the ball to the first player in line at
the other end of the court (the passing lines). The passer follows the pass, receives
a return pass, and takes a shot. He then moves to the end of the same line at this
end (the passing line), while the player who made the return pass rebounds the ball,
passes it to the opposite corner at the same end, and moves to the end of that line
(the shooting line). The goal is to make 15 jump shots in one minute.
COACHING POINTS
• Shooters need to have their feet in the proper position for shooting when
they catch the ball.
• Rebounders should look to make good outlet passes.

Full-Court Layups, Left-Handed, 40 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the left side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a left-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without a
ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 40 by the time a minute has elapsed.

221
11-12 years old

COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 40 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

Defensive Slides, One-on-Zero and One-on-One (10 minutes)


Divide the players into three lines on the baseline. The first player in each line per-
forms defensive slides to the other baseline, making a drop step after every three
slides. Once players get the hang of the drill, divide the players into pairs. One
partner now dribbles a basketball, using V-cuts and crossover dribbles to change
direction, from one baseline to the other; the other partner is the defensive player.
The defensive player should slide to stay in front of the dribbler, executing a drop
step each time the offensive player changes direction.
COACHING POINTS
• The offensive players should go slowly so the defense can work on footwork.
• Defensive players should remain one arm’s length away from the dribbler,
keeping their eyes on the dribbler’s waist.

Cutthroat, Four-on-Four (10 minutes)


Divide the team into four lines on the baseline; the first players in each line are on
offense, and the second players in each line are on defense. The offensive players
are facing the basket on the court. The coach starts the drill by passing the ball to
one of the offensive players. The defenders run from the baseline to close out on the
offense in defensive position. As a rule, the offensive players must face the basket
in triple-threat position, must move after they pass, and must thank the passer on a
pass that results in a basket. If the offense fails to follow one of the rules, the whistle
blows, and the offensive players must go to the end of the line. The defense moves
to offense, and a new set of three players comes in on defense. Play for a specified
period of time or until one team reaches a specified number of points. Each basket
counts as a point.
COACHING POINTS
• Players must perform the action specified by each rule immediately; if not,
the team is out.
• Other rules can be added, such as limiting the offense to two dribbles or not
allowing the offense to shoot until a ball screen has occurred or all players
have touched the ball.

222
11-12 years old

Five-on-Five Scrimmage, Controlled (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two teams of five for a scrimmage that involves using the
skills and tactics that the players have learned so far in practices. Have the players
go five-on-five half court and transition into a full-court scrimmage after a made or
missed basket. They should stop at the other end, then again go five-on-five into a
full-court scrimmage. Sub players as necessary.
COACHING POINTS
• The coach should stop play when necessary to explain areas on both offense
and defense that need work.
• Offensive players need to sprint back on a change of possession in order to
stop the ball first.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (5 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.

Pair Shooting (10 minutes)


Players are divided into pairs with one ball per pair. One player shoots the ball,
rebounds her shot, and passes the ball back to the other player for a shot. Pairs
continue in this manner for a specified amount of time.
COACHING POINTS
• The shooter should work to catch the ball in proper shooting position; the
knees should be bent, and the player should catch the ball at waist level.
• After the shot, the shooter should run to get the rebound before the ball hits
the floor.

Out-of-Bounds Plays, Review (10 minutes)


Divide your team into groups of five; one group begins on the court. Have every
group of players run your out-of-bounds plays without a defense. Then practice the
out-of-bounds plays in a five-on-five situation, against a defense.
COACHING POINTS
• Most out-of-bounds plays will begin in a box set, with one player in each
corner of the lane. Coaches should have the same set for all out-of-bounds
plays.
• Teams should practice these plays against both a zone defense and a man-
to-man defense.

223
11-12 years old

Three-on-Two, Two-on-One Full Court (10 minutes)


Start with three lines at one end of the court. Two players set up at the opposite end
of the court in a defensive position, one player at the free-throw line and one player
in the middle of the lane. The first three players in line try to score against the two
defenders (three-on-two); the middle player dribbles the ball down the floor and
makes a pass to one wing. After the shot, the two defenders become the offensive
players, moving to the opposite end of the court with the middle offensive player
transitioning to defense (two-on-one). The two wings remain as the defenders in the
lane for the next group of three offensive players.
COACHING POINTS
• The three offensive players should work to get a shot after three or fewer
passes against the two defenders.
• The two offensive players should work to get a shot after two or fewer passes
against the one defender.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Four-Quarter Shooting (10 minutes)


This is a three-player drill using two balls. Two players have a ball. One player with
a ball shoots her ball, rebounds, and passes the ball to the player who does not
have a ball. The other player with the ball shoots her ball immediately after the first
player, gets the rebound, and passes to the player who now does not have a ball
(the first shooter). After the shot, each player repositions for the pass from the next
shooter. Play for four minutes, keeping track of made baskets.
COACHING POINT
The shooter must get a rebound, pass the ball, and then immediately look for the
pass from the next shooter.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

224
Practices for
14
Ages 13 and 14

Players in this age group will obviously have the most experience, but
sometimes coaches make the mistake of forgetting about skill development. Coaches
should always keep in mind that repetition is key for skill development. Drills per-
formed in practices are the essence of skill and team development.
Following are some points to consider when preparing and executing practice ses-
sions for 13- and 14-year-olds:
• Make sure every drill has more than one purpose.
• Combine as many fundamentals as possible into each drill, even though the
emphasis may be on one skill only.
• Express your expectations for each drill at the start; set the tone and don’t
compromise your standards.
• Perform drills at the full-court level, three-quarter-court level, and half-court
level.
• Stress to players the importance of transferring the correct execution of drills
to game situations.
• Create competition—against clock, against opponent, or against self—in each
drill.
• Be demanding—demand correct execution of basic skills.
• Hold each player to your highest performance standards.

225
226 Coaching Youth Basketball

Considerations When Coaching Females


Annie Byrne, Marian Catholic High School girls’ basketball coach
Girls who are 13 or 14 years old are at the age right before they enter high school.
Ideally, this would be a good time to pick up the pace of the game. After this year,
the players will be expected to compete at a high school level. A key word to
explore during this time is versatility. If a kid is always in the paint, she should come
out to the perimeter and experience play facing the basket. If a kid is always on
the perimeter, she should experience play in the paint. Guards need to know how
to post up, and posts need to be able to face the basket. At this age, girls should
be encouraged to step out of their comfort zone because they may be asked to
change positions at the next level (depending on surrounding personnel and how
they develop individually).
A good drill with multiple purposes for this age group would be a five-on-five,
controlled half court, with a third team ready at all times on the baseline. As players
begin to understand how to match up, communicate defensively, and play multiple
positions, you can move this to a full-court game with the third team on the sideline.
Other things that a coach should teach these players include how to set a screen,
how to set up a screener and receive the screen, and how to understand options
off a screen (e.g., curling, flaring, or a simple catch and shoot) based on how the
defense reacts. These concepts should raise the average 14-year-old’s basketball
IQ, pick up the pace of the game, and increase versatility.

13-14 years old

Early-Season Practices
Early-season practices should involve reviewing the skills that the coach believes are
important. Early-season practice sessions will give you an idea of the skill level of
your team and what you need to work on in upcoming practice sessions. Take notes
during practice to help prepare for the next practice session.

Early-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
13-14 years old

COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Dribble–Pivot–Pass (10 minutes)


Players line up on the sideline with no more than three players per line. The first
player takes three right-handed dribbles out and comes to a stop. He then executes
a reverse pivot (a front pivot may also be used) and makes a chest pass to the next
player in line. The passer goes to the end of the line after the pass, and the next
player (the one who caught the pass) dribbles out and makes the pivot and pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should execute the pivot with the knees bent
to make the pass.
• Depending on ability, players may instead use bounce passes or one-hand
push passes in the drill.

Two-Line Passing: Chest, Bounce, Overhead, and Baseball


(10 minutes)
Divide the squad into two lines facing each other; the lines should be at least lane-
width apart depending on player ability. The first person in one line should have a
basketball. This player passes the ball using a chest pass to the first person in the
opposite line. The passer follows his pass and goes to the end of the opposite line.
The drill continues as the players pass the ball and follow it. Once players have
practiced the chest pass, they should perform the same drill using the bounce pass,
overhead pass, and baseball pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should step as they pass the ball, making the pass more direct.
• To help communication, players should call out the name of the player they
are passing to.

Form Shooting (10 minutes)


Players stand two to three feet from a basket, placing the ball in one hand. Players
bend the knees and shoot the ball one handed to the basket. This drill helps the
players develop the proper fundamentals of shooting.
COACHING POINTS
• The elbow of the shooting arm should be at shoulder level and should not
drop lower when executing the one-hand shot.
• Players must be careful not to grip the ball like a baseball or softball; the ball
should rest on the hand.

227
13-14 years old

Offensive Wing Moves (10 minutes)


Two lines of players begin on the blocks under the basket; the players are facing
the coach, who is at the top of the key with a ball. On command, the first player
in one line steps into the lane, performing a V-cut against an imaginary player to
get open at the wing position. The coach passes the ball to the outside hand of
the player. On the catch, the player squares up to the basket with his nonshooting
foot as his pivot foot (for a right-handed shooter, the left foot should be the pivot
foot). After squaring up, the player makes a move to the basket, taking one or two
dribbles and then a shot. He gets his own rebound and passes the ball out to the
coach; the player then goes to the end of the opposite line so that he works on
both sides of the court.
COACHING POINTS
• The pivot foot should always be the same.
• A third line of players can replace the coach as the passer.

Three-on-Zero Fast Break (10 minutes)


Players form three lines under the basket. The first player in the middle line has a
ball. This player throws the ball off the backboard to begin the drill; she rebounds
the ball and makes an outlet to either side of the court. She then moves behind the
outlet player, who dribbles to the middle of the floor as the opposite wing runs down
the opposite lane for a three-player fast break situation. The dribbler passes to either
wing for a layup. Players should rotate lines so that all players play each position.
COACHING POINT
The last pass should be a bounce pass outside the lane area to the wing. This allows
for an easier catch and layup.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left and from front to back, keeping the knees bent
and the hands above the waist.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

228
13-14 years old

Two-on-Two Defensive Help (10 minutes)


Players form two lines, one at each wing outside the three-point line. One defensive
player is guarding each offensive player in a two-on-two situation. The wing who
starts with the ball skip passes it to his teammate on the opposite wing. The first
wing’s defender moves from guarding the player with the ball to the help-side rim
line (the imaginary line running from rim to rim in the center of the floor) as the ball is
skipped across to the opposite wing, while his teammate shifts to on-the-ball defense.
After a specified amount of time, the next two players in line move to offense, the
offensive players move to defense, and the defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• The first defender must sprint to the rim line in good defensive position so he
can see the ball and his player.
• The second defender must sprint to the offensive player catching the ball; the
defender’s hands should be up as he closes out on the shot.

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell (10 minutes)


Four players are on offense, and four on defense. The offense is spaced out with
one guard above each free-throw lane outside the three-point line and one player
at each wing. A defender is guarding each offensive player; the rest of the team
is divided into four lines at half-court. One of the guards starts with the ball and
passes it to a wing. As the coach observes, the defenders must adjust to each pass
so they are in good help position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense
continues to pass the ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders adjust
their position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the next four players
in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the defenders
move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.
• Defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so
the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Two-on-One Fast Break Half Court (10 minutes)


Players form three lines at the baseline. On command, the first three players run to
half-court. The middle player then runs back and gets in position to be a defender.
The coach passes the ball to one of the players at half-court, and these players attack
the basket in a two-on-one situation.

229
13-14 years old

COACHING POINTS
• Offensive players should try to get a good shot with no more than one pass.
• Most of the time, a bounce pass should be thrown in a two-on-one situation.

Three-on-Two Fast Break Half Court (10 minutes)


Players form five lines at the baseline. On command, the first five players run to
half-court. The middle player and the two outside players in line will be the offensive
players, and the other two players will move back as defenders. The coach passes
the ball to the middle player at the half-court line, and the offensive players attack
the defenders in a three-on-two situation.
COACHING POINTS
• The offensive team should try to score with only two passes.
• After the middle player passes to one of the wings, this player should go to
the side of the pass at the free-throw line elbow for a possible return pass.

Seven-Spot Shooting, Two Made Shots From Each Spot


(10 minutes)
Pick out seven spots on the floor, marking these spots with tape. Players pair up,
and each pair has a ball. The first player shoots the ball at the first spot, gets her
own rebound, and passes back to her partner, who shoots at the same spot. After
two shots total are made from that spot, the players move to the next spot. Players
must make two shots from each spot before they are done with the drill.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize that shooters must be ready and must have their feet and hands in
good position to shoot when they catch the pass.
• This drill can be changed to require players to make any number of shots
before moving to the next spot or require them to make a certain number in
a row before moving to the next spot.
• A time limit can also be enforced; in this case, the players try to make as many
shots as possible in a certain period of time.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Midseason Practices
Midseason practice sessions are a continuation of early-season practice sessions, but
the drills become more competitive. More team drills are added for working on team
play as well. At this point, the coach may also add more offensive plays for the team,
and the players will need practice time to perfect those plays.

230
13-14 years old

Midseason Practice Plan 1


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Dribble–Pivot–Pass (10 minutes)


Players line up on the sideline with no more than three players per line. The first
player takes three right-handed dribbles out and comes to a stop. He then executes
a reverse pivot (a front pivot may also be used) and makes a chest pass to the next
player in line. The passer goes to the end of the line after the pass, and the next
player (the one who caught the pass) dribbles out and makes the pivot and pass.
COACHING POINTS
• Emphasize to players that they should execute the pivot with the knees bent
to make the pass.
• Depending on ability, players may instead use bounce passes or one-hand
push passes in the drill.

Full-Court Layups, Right-Handed, 50 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the right side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a right-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without
a ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 50 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 50 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

231
13-14 years old

Pair Shooting (10 minutes)


Players are divided into pairs with one ball per pair. One player shoots the ball,
rebounds her shot, and passes the ball back to the other player for a shot. Pairs
continue in this manner for a specified amount of time.
COACHING POINTS
• The shooter should work to catch the ball in proper shooting position; the
knees should be bent, and the player should catch the ball at waist level.
• After the shot, the shooter should run to get the rebound before the ball hits
the floor.

Offensive Wing Moves (10 minutes)


Two lines of players begin on the blocks under the basket; the players are facing
the coach, who is at the top of the key with a ball. On command, the first player
in one line steps into the lane, performing a V-cut against an imaginary player to
get open at the wing position. The coach passes the ball to the outside hand of
the player. On the catch, the player squares up to the basket with his nonshooting
foot as his pivot foot (for a right-handed shooter, the left foot should be the pivot
foot). After squaring up, the player makes a move to the basket, taking one or two
dribbles and then a shot. He gets his own rebound and passes the ball out to the
coach; the player then goes to the end of the opposite line so that he works on
both sides of the court.
COACHING POINTS
• The pivot foot should always be the same.
• A third line of players can replace the coach as the passer.

Five-on-Zero Fast Break From Rebound (10 minutes)


Five players are positioned in the lane. The coach shoots the ball, and the players
rebound the ball and then move down the court for a five-on-zero fast break on
the opposite end. The rebounder makes an outlet pass to a guard; the wings run in
both outside lanes, the post runs in the middle lane, and the forward is the trailer,
stopping at the free-throw line.
COACHING POINT
The outlet should be to the side of the rebounder, outside the lane.

Mass Defensive Slide (5 minutes)


All players set up in a scattered formation around the coach, who is in position for
all the players to see. On command or by following the coach, players move in a
defensive slide to the right and left, keeping the knees bent and the hands above
the waist.

232
13-14 years old

COACHING POINTS
• This is a good time to play follow the leader. Have one player positioned in
front of the group to lead the other players in the defensive slide drill.
• The coach should make sure that players’ feet do not cross or come together
during the slide; players should instead use a step and push action with the
legs and feet.

Two-on-Two Defensive Help (10 minutes)


Players form two lines, one at each wing outside the three-point line. One defensive
player is guarding each offensive player in a two-on-two situation. The wing who
starts with the ball skip passes it to his teammate on the opposite wing. The first
wing’s defender moves from guarding the player with the ball to the help-side rim
line (the imaginary line running from rim to rim in the center of the floor) as the ball is
skipped across to the opposite wing, while his teammate shifts to on-the-ball defense.
After a specified amount of time, the next two players in line move to offense, the
offensive players move to defense, and the defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• The first defender must sprint to the rim line in good defensive position so he
can see the ball and his player.
• The second defender must sprint to the offensive player catching the ball; the
defender’s hands should be up as he closes out on the shot.

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell (10 minutes)


Four players are on offense, and four on defense. The offense is spaced out with
one guard above each free-throw lane outside the three-point line and one player
at each wing. A defender is guarding each offensive player; the rest of the team
is divided into four lines at half-court. One of the guards starts with the ball and
passes it to a wing. As the coach observes, the defenders must adjust to each pass
so they are in good help position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense
continues to pass the ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders adjust
their position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the next four players
in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the defenders
move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.
• Defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so
the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

233
13-14 years old

Three-on-Two, Two-on-One Full Court (10 minutes)


Start with three lines at one end of the court. Two players set up at the opposite end
of the court in a defensive position, one player at the free-throw line and one player
in the middle of the lane. The first three players in line try to score against the two
defenders (three-on-two); the middle player dribbles the ball down the floor and
makes a pass to one wing. After the shot, the two defenders become the offensive
players, moving to the opposite end of the court with the middle offensive player
transitioning to defense (two-on-one). The two wings remain as the defenders in the
lane for the next group of three offensive players.
COACHING POINTS
• The three offensive players should work to get a shot after three or fewer
passes against the two defender
• The two offensive players should work to get a shot after two or fewer passes
against the one defender.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Midseason Practice Plan 2


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
234
13-14 years old

COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Two-Ball Dribbling (10 minutes)


Players pair up along one sideline. The first player in each pair has two basketballs;
this player dribbles both balls simultaneously from one sideline to the other and
back. She then hands off the balls to her partner, who continues the drill.
COACHING POINTS
• Players need to keep their head up while dribbling both balls; they should not
look at the basketballs.
• After players dribble both balls simultaneously, they can repeat the drill, this
time alternating bounces while dribbling both balls. They may also perform
low dribbles, perform high dribbles, perform one high and one low dribble,
and switch hands.

Full-Court Layups, Left-Handed, 50 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the left side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a
basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a left-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without a
ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 50 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 50 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

Weak-Hand Development (10 minutes)


Players divide into pairs along the court. Each pair passes the ball back and forth
using the weak hand only. Players should keep their strong hand behind their back.
COACHING POINT
Players should vary the types of passes, using chest, bounce, and baseball passes.

Box With Pivot (10 minutes)


Players begin along the baseline with a ball. On command, the first person in each
line spins the ball out to the free-throw line, passing the ball to herself and then
performing one of the following moves:

235
13-14 years old

• Drop-step layup: flash, two-foot jump stop, drop step, one-dribble layup.
• Inside pivot and jump shot: flash, two-foot jump stop, fake, drop step and
pivot on inside foot, jump shot.
• Inside pivot to fake jump shot and crossover: flash, two-foot jump stop, fake,
drop step and pivot on inside foot, fake jump shot, crossover with one dribble.
• Reverse pivot and jump shot: flash, two-foot jump stop, reverse pivot, jump
shot.
• Reverse pivot and outside pivot foot rip (moving the ball quickly from one
side of the body to the other) to outside: flash, two-foot jump stop, reverse
pivot on outside foot, rip to outside.
• Reverse pivot and outside pivot foot fake rip to crossover: flash, two-foot
jump stop, reverse pivot on outside foot, fake, rip to crossover.
After each move, players should rebound their own shots and move to the end of
the line.
COACHING POINTS
• Players should always perform a jump stop when stopping.
• Players need to stay low and in balance on all pivots.

Five-on-Zero Fast Break From Rebound (10 minutes)


Five players are positioned in the lane. The coach shoots the ball, and the players
rebound the ball and then move down the court for a five-on-zero fast break on
the opposite end. The rebounder makes an outlet pass to a guard; the wings run in
both outside lanes, the post runs in the middle lane, and the forward is the trailer,
stopping at the free-throw line.
COACHING POINT
The outlet should be to the side of the rebounder, outside the lane.

Defensive Slides, One-on-One (5 minutes)


Divide players into pairs in three lines on the baseline. One player in each pair is
on defense, and the other is on offense. The offensive player dribbles a basketball,
using V-cuts and crossovers to change direction, from one baseline to the other
against the defensive player. The defensive player should slide to stay in front of the
dribbler, executing a drop step each time the offensive player changes direction.
COACHING POINTS
• The defender should keep his head below the offensive player’s shoulders
and should keep his knees bent to move quickly.
• Defenders should remain one arm’s length away from the dribbler, keeping
their arms out wide from the body and keeping their eyes on the dribbler’s
waist.

236
13-14 years old

Three-on-Two Fast Break With Defensive Trailer (10 minutes)


Divide the team into three lines across the baseline, with three players facing them
at the free-throw line. The coach begins the drill by throwing the ball to one of the
first players in line at the baseline. The player opposite the pass at the free-throw
line runs to touch the baseline while the rest of the players move down the court in
a three-on-two situation. The player who touches the baseline is the trailer, catching
up to make the drill a three-on-three.
COACHING POINTS
• Before the third defender makes it to the ball, the other two defenders must
communicate regarding who is defending the ball.
• The offense should try to score while they have the three-on-two advantage.

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell (10 minutes)


Four players are on offense, and four on defense. The offense is spaced out with
one guard above each free-throw lane outside the three-point line and one player
at each wing. A defender is guarding each offensive player; the rest of the team
is divided into four lines at half-court. One of the guards starts with the ball and
passes it to a wing. As the coach observes, the defenders must adjust to each pass
so they are in good help position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense
continues to pass the ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders adjust
their position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the next four players
in line move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and the defenders
move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.
• Defenders must move as the ball is in the air so they are in correct defensive
position when the ball is caught. The coach may need to yell out “Pass!” so
the defense can adjust to each pass correctly.

Three-on-Two, Two-on-One Full Court (10 minutes)


Start with three lines at one end of the court. Two players set up at the opposite end
of the court in a defensive position, one player at the free-throw line and one player
in the middle of the lane. The first three players in line try to score against the two
defenders (three-on-two); the middle player dribbles the ball down the floor and
makes a pass to one wing. After the shot, the two defenders become the offensive
players, moving to the opposite end of the court with the middle offensive player
transitioning to defense (two-on-one). The two wings remain as the defenders in the
lane for the next group of three offensive players.

237
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

13-14 years old

COACHING POINTS
• The three offensive players should work to get a shot after three or fewer
passes against the two defenders.
• The two offensive players should work to get a shot after two or fewer passes
against the one defender.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Midseason Practice Plan 3


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Full-Court Layups, Right-Handed, 50 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the right side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a

238

www.Ebook777.com
13-14 years old

basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a right-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without
a ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 50 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 50 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

Four-Corner Passing and Jump Shots (10 minutes)


Begin this drill with one line of players in each corner of the court, with two balls in
opposite corners (four balls total). The first player in each line with a ball (the shooting
lines) takes a few dribbles forward, then passes the ball to the first player in line at
the other end of the court (the passing lines). The passer follows the pass, receives
a return pass, and takes a shot. He then moves to the end of the same line at this
end (the passing line), while the player who made the return pass rebounds the ball,
passes it to the opposite corner at the same end, and moves to the end of that line
(the shooting line). The goal is to make 15 jump shots in one minute.
COACHING POINTS
• Shooters need to have their feet in the proper position for shooting when
they catch the ball.
• Rebounders should look to make good outlet passes.

Five-Ball Shooting, Layup With Two Jumpers (10 minutes)


Players are in four lines, one line in each corner. One end will include a player at the
middle of the baseline with a ball. This player and the first player in each line at that
end make two passes as they move to the opposite end for a layup. As the layup is
made by the third player, the two passers (including the middle player) each receive
a ball from the two lines at the opposite end for a jump shot. The player who has
taken the layup rebounds her own shot and turns, making an outlet pass and moving
in the opposite direction with the first two players in line (who have just passed for
jumpers). These players again make two passes for a layup, followed by two jump
shots, and the drill continues. The goal is to make 22 baskets in one minute.
COACHING POINTS
• The outlet pass needs to be a good, quick pass to start the drill.
• Jump shots should be eight-foot jumpers outside the lane.
• The goal can be adjusted according to players’ skill level.

239
13-14 years old

Perfect Layups (10 minutes)


Begin with three lines of players along the baseline. The first player in the left line
should have a ball (alternatively, the line on the right can begin with the ball). The
first three players make passes while moving down the court. The player on the left
passes to the player in the middle, who passes back to the player on the left; then, the
player on the left once more passes to the player in the middle, who this time makes
a bounce pass to the player on the right for a layup. The player on the left rebounds
the ball and makes a two-hand overhead outlet pass to the middle player, who has
moved to the side of the player making the layup. This player continues the other
way, making a baseball pass back to the next person in the left line, who continues
the drill. The goal is to make 25 points in one minute; players earn 2 points for a
perfect layup, meaning the ball does not touch the rim, and 1 point for a made layup.
COACHING POINTS
• Passing must be crisp and on target.
• The goal of 25 points can be adjusted depending on skill level.

Two-Line Rebounding (10 minutes)


Players are lined up in two lines at the elbows of the free-throw line. The coach
shoots the ball, and the first two players go for the rebound. The player who gets
the rebound then tries to make a shot with the other player defending him.
COACHING POINT
The coach should not call fouls unless they are flagrant; the players need to rebound
and shoot with pressure.

One-on-One-on-One Rebounding (5 minutes)


Players form one line on the baseline. The coach begins the drill by shooting the
ball, and three players go for the rebound. Whoever gets the rebound tries to score.
This follow-up shot will be treated as if it were a miss regardless of whether the shot
is made. Once again, the three players go for the ball and for a score. Once one
player gets three scores, he moves to the end of the line at the baseline, and the first
player in the line rotates in. The drill keeps going until all players get three scores.
COACHING POINTS
• Players must go up strong to shoot the ball with pressure from the other two
players.
• If the ball hits the floor or goes outside the lane, the ball is dead, and the
coach will reshoot.

Five-on-Four Fast Break With Defensive Trailer (10 minutes)


Divide the team into five lines across the baseline, with five players facing them at
the free-throw line. The coach begins the drill by throwing the ball to one of the
first players in line at the baseline. The player opposite the pass at the free-throw

240
13-14 years old

line runs to touch the baseline while the rest of the players move down the court in
a five-on-four situation. The player who touches the baseline is the trailer, catching
up to make the drill a five-on-five.
COACHING POINTS
• The offense should attack the four defenders, trying to get a fast break basket
before the fifth defender comes into play.
• The defense needs to stop the ball first, slowing the offensive team down
until the fifth defender catches up.

Four-on-Four With Transition (10 minutes)


Begin this drill with eight players in a half-court four-on-four situation. Three lines of
players are set up at the baseline on each end of the court. On a rebound or made
shot, the defender who gets the ball along with the first three players in line at the
baseline execute a fast break to the opposite end, while the four offensive players
transition to defense. The other three defenders go to the end of each line along
the baseline. The drill continues in this manner for a designated amount of time.
COACHING POINTS
• Players moving from offense to defense must sprint back in defensive
transition, communicating who has the ball and help side.
• Offensive players should fill lanes on the fast break to the opposite end.

Five-on-Five Controlled Half Court (10 minutes)


Players play a five-on-five controlled half-court scrimmage. The offense should work
on team offensive sets. Sub players accordingly.
COACHING POINTS
• This drill can transition into the five-on-five scrimmage so the team can work
on transitioning from offense to defense, and vice versa.
• The coach can use this drill to make teaching points about the offense.

Five-Possession Five-on-Five (10 minutes)


This is a full-court five-on-five drill in which each team has five possessions. Score is
kept; at the end of five possessions, the winning team stays on the court, and the
losing team rotates out.
COACHING POINTS
• Start with a jump ball so the players have practice with jump ball situations.
• This drill allows players to practice in gamelike conditions and situations.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (10 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.

241
13-14 years old

COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________

Late-Season Practices
Late-season practices for this age group again need to be skill improvement sessions
that include team drills. Team offense and team defense should be a major part of the
practice sessions, which should include three-, four-, or five-player drills. Competi-
tive drills are also good for late-season practice sessions for players in this age group.

Late-Season Practice Plan


Date: ______ Time: ______ Practice number: ______

Warm-Up (10 minutes)


Players line up on the baseline in four lines. On command, the players run down the
court to the opposite baseline. Players work on running, stops, pivots, V-cuts, and
jumping during their trips up and down the court.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the skills used in the warm-up based on the ability level of your players.

Four-Corner Passing and Jump Shots (10 minutes)


Begin this drill with one line of players in each corner of the court, with two balls in
opposite corners (four balls total). The first player in each line with a ball (the shooting
lines) takes a few dribbles forward, then passes the ball to the first player in line at
the other end of the court (the passing lines). The passer follows the pass, receives
a return pass, and takes a shot. He then moves to the end of the same line at this
end (the passing line), while the player who made the return pass rebounds the ball,
passes it to the opposite corner at the same end, and moves to the end of that line
(the shooting line). The goal is to make 15 jump shots in one minute.
COACHING POINTS
• Shooters need to have their feet in the proper position for shooting when
they catch the ball.
• Rebounders should look to make good outlet passes.

Full-Court Layups, Left-Handed, 50 per Minute (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two groups, forming one line at the baseline under each basket
(on the left side of the baseline). The first three players in each line should have a

242
13-14 years old

basketball. On command, the first player in each line dribbles to the other end and
shoots a left-handed layup. After each layup is shot, the first player in line without a
ball rebounds the shot taken as the shooter goes to the end of the line. Each time
a player reaches half-court, the next player in line follows. Ask players to count the
number of made layups; the goal is to make 50 by the time a minute has elapsed.
COACHING POINTS
• This is a speed dribbling drill, so the players should dribble the ball out in
front of them; always encourage players to keep their head up while dribbling
so they can see the court.
• You may need to adjust the goal of 50 made baskets in one minute, depending
on your team’s skill level.

Cutthroat, Four-on-Four (10 minutes)


Divide the team into four lines on the baseline; the first players in each line are on
offense, and the second players in each line are on defense. The offensive players
are facing the basket on the court. The coach starts the drill by passing the ball to
one of the offensive players. The defenders run from the baseline to close out on the
offense in defensive position. As a rule, the offensive players must face the basket
in triple-threat position, must move after they pass, and must thank the passer on a
pass that results in a basket. If the offense fails to follow one of the rules, the whistle
blows, and the offensive players must go to the end of the line. The defense moves
to offense, and a new set of three players comes in on defense. Play for a specified
period of time or until one team reaches a specified number of points. Each basket
counts as a point.
COACHING POINTS
• Players must perform the action specified by each rule immediately; if not,
the team is out.
• Other rules can be added, such as limiting the offense to two dribbles or not
allowing the offense to shoot until a ball screen has occurred or all players
have touched the ball.

Five-on-Five Full-Court Press (10 minutes)


This is a controlled five-on-five drill that enables players to work on press defense.
The defense is set up in a press defense that the team uses during games. The
defenders apply this press against the offense, and the offense works to break the
press for a score. Once the press is attacked by the offense and a shot is taken, the
drill begins again with the same 10 players. After four or five repetitions, teams are
rotated so that all players have a chance to work on the press defense.
COACHING POINT
Between repetitions, the coach can provide specific feedback and teaching points
to players.

243
13-14 years old

Five-on-Five Scrimmage, Controlled (10 minutes)


Divide the team into two teams of five for a scrimmage that involves using the
skills and tactics that the players have learned so far in practices. Have the players
go five-on-five half court and transition into a full-court scrimmage after a made or
missed basket. They should stop at the other end, then again go five-on-five into a
full-court scrimmage. Sub players as necessary.
COACHING POINTS
• The coach should stop play when necessary to explain areas on both offense
and defense that need work.
• Offensive players need to sprint back on a change of possession in order to
stop the ball first.

Free Throws, Two in a Row (5 minutes)


Pair up players at each free-throw line. Partners take turns shooting one free throw
until the pair makes two in a row.
COACHING POINT
Adjust the number of consecutive free throws made based on the skill level of your
players.

Four-on-Four Defensive Shell With Rotation (10 minutes)


Four players are on offense, and four on defense. The offense is spaced out with one
guard above each free-throw lane outside the three-point line and one player at each
wing. A defender is guarding each offensive player; the rest of the team is divided
into four lines at half-court. One of the guards starts with the ball and passes it to
a wing. As the coach observes, the defenders must adjust to each pass so they are
in good help position or on-the-ball position. On command, the offense continues
to pass the ball from one wing to the other wing, and the defenders adjust their
position on each pass. After a specified amount of time, the offensive team drives to
the baseline on the dribble. The defender opposite the drive should be in position
to rotate from the lane area to help stop the dribbler on the baseline. The next four
players in line will then move to offense, the offensive players move to defense, and
the defenders move to the end of each line.
COACHING POINTS
• Defenders need to stay in a good defensive stance with their knees bent so
they can move quickly to the ball.
• Defenders should be in help position when the ball is on the opposite side
of the court. They should point one hand at the ball and one hand at the
offensive player they are guarding so that they never lose sight of either.

Out-of-Bounds Plays, Review (10 minutes)


Divide your team into groups of five; one group begins on the court. Have every
group of players run your out-of-bounds plays without a defense. Then practice the
out-of-bounds plays in a five-on-five situation, against a defense.
244
13-14 years old

COACHING POINTS
• Teams should practice these plays against both a zone defense and a man-
to-man defense.
• Teams should practice out-of-bounds plays under both sides of the basket, as
well as on the sidelines.

Three-on-Two, Two-on-One Full Court (10 minutes)


Start with three lines at one end of the court. Two players set up at the opposite end
of the court in a defensive position, one player at the free-throw line and one player
in the middle of the lane. The first three players in line try to score against the two
defenders (three-on-two); the middle player dribbles the ball down the floor and
makes a pass to one wing. After the shot, the two defenders become the offensive
players, moving to the opposite end of the court with the middle offensive player
transitioning to defense (two-on-one). The two wings remain as the defenders in the
lane for the next group of three offensive players.
COACHING POINTS
• The three offensive players should work to get a shot after three or fewer
passes against the two defenders.
• The two offensive players should work to get a shot after two or fewer passes
against the one defender.

Five-on-Zero Offense (10 minutes)


Arrange the players in offensive positions based on the offensive set you want to
teach. For example, this can be a 1-2-2 set with a point guard, two wings, and two
post players or a 2-1-2 set with two guards, a high-post player, and two baseline or
post players. In this drill, teach players how they can try to score in the set (including
cuts, screens, and so on).
COACHING POINTS
• Teach players proper spacing and how to refill positions after a pass and cut.
• Emphasize that each player should square up to the basket after every catch.

Four-Quarter Shooting (10 minutes)


This is a three-player drill using two balls. Two players have a ball. One player with
a ball shoots her ball, rebounds, and passes the ball to the player who does not
have a ball. The other player with the ball shoots her ball immediately after the first
player, gets the rebound, and passes to the player who now does not have a ball
(the first shooter). After the shot, each player repositions for the pass from the next
shooter. Play for four minutes, keeping track of made baskets.
COACHING POINT
The shooter must get a rebound, pass the ball, and then immediately look for the
pass from the next shooter.
Announcements: ______________________________________________________
245
Appendix
Checklists and Forms

This appendix contains checklists and forms. You may reproduce and use
the checklists and forms indicated as needed for your basketball program; these
materials may also be found at the following website: www.HumanKinetics.com/
CoachingYouthBasketball5E-Forms. They are indicated by this symbol in the outside
margin of the text:

Please note that all forms and checklists should be reviewed on an annual basis. All
legal forms should be evaluated by your legal counsel and insurance agent to ensure
that they properly reflect your program and relevant state and local laws.

246
Facilities and Equipment Checklist
❑ The stairs and corridors leading to the gym are well lit.
❑ The stairs and corridors are free of obstruction.
❑ The stairs and corridors are in good repair.
❑ Exits are well marked and illuminated.
❑ Exits are free of obstruction.
❑ Uprights and other projections are padded, including the basket standards or
poles.
❑ Walls are free of projections.
❑ Windows are located high on the walls.
❑ Wall plugs and light switches are insulated and protected.
❑ Lights are shielded.
❑ Lighting is sufficient to illuminate the playing area well.
❑ The heating and cooling system for the gym is working properly and is mon-
itored regularly.
❑ Ducts, radiators, pipes, and so on are shielded or designed to withstand high
impact.
❑ Tamper-free thermostats are housed in impact-resistant covers.
❑ If there is an overhanging track, it has secure railings with a minimum height
of 3 feet, 6 inches.
❑ The track has direction signs posted.
❑ The track is free of obstructions.
❑ Rules for the track are posted.
❑ Projections on the track are padded or illuminated.
❑ Gym equipment is inspected before and during each use.
❑ The gym is adequately supervised.
❑ Galleries and viewing areas have been designed to protect small children by
blocking their access to the playing area.
❑ The gym (floor, roof, walls, light fixtures, and so on) is inspected on an
annual basis for safety and structural deficiencies.
❑ Fire alarms are in good working order.
❑ Fire extinguishers are up to date, with note of last inspection.
❑ Directions are posted for evacuating the gym in case of fire.

From American Sport Education Program, 2012, Coaching youth basketball, 5th ed. (Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics).

247
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

Informed Consent Form


I hereby give my permission for __________________________ to participate in
___________________ during the athletic season beginning on __________________.
Further, I authorize the school or club to provide emergency treatment of any injury
or illness my child may experience if qualified medical personnel consider treatment
necessary and perform the treatment. This authorization is granted only if I cannot
be reached after a reasonable effort to do so.

Parent or guardian: _______________________________________________________


Address: ____________________________________ Phone: ( )_______________
Cell phone: ( )_________________________________________________________
Other person to contact in case of emergency: _________________________________
Relationship to person: ________________________ Phone: ( )_______________
Family physician: _____________________________ Phone: ( )_______________
Medical conditions (e.g., allergies, chronic illness): ____________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________

My child and I are aware that participating in _______________________ is a poten-


tially hazardous activity. We assume all risks associated with participation in this
sport, including but not limited to falls, contact with other participants, the effects of
weather and traffic, and other reasonable conditions of risk associated with the sport.
All such risks to my child are known and appreciated by my child and me.
We understand this informed consent form and agree to its conditions.

Child’s signature: ____________________________________ Date: _______________

Parent’s or guardian’s signature: ________________________ Date: _______________

From American Sport Education Program, 2012, Coaching youth basketball, 5th ed. (Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics). Adapted,
by permission, from M. Flegel, 2008, Sport first aid, 4th ed. (Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics), 15.
248

www.Ebook777.com
Injury Report Form
Date: __________________________ Time: _______________________ a.m. p.m.

Location: ________________________________________________________________

Player’s name: ________________________ Age:_______ Date of birth: ____________

Type of injury: ___________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Anatomical area involved: ___________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Cause of injury: __________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Extent of injury: __________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Person administering first aid (name): _______________________________________

First aid administered: _____________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

Other treatment administered: ______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Referral action: ___________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Signature of person administering first aid: ___________________________________

Date: _______________________

From American Sport Education Program, 2012, Coaching youth basketball, 5th ed. (Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics).

249
Emergency Information Card
Player’s name: _____________________________ Sport: _____________ Age: _________
Address: _________________________________________________________________
Phone: ( )_____________________________________________________________

Provide information for parent or guardian


and one additional contact in case of emergency:
Parent’s or guardian’s name: ________________________________________________
Address: _________________________________________________________________
Phone: ( )______________________ Other phone: ( )______________________
Additional contact’s name: _________________________________________________
Relationship to player: _____________________________________________________
Address: _________________________________________________________________
Phone: ( )________________________ Other phone: ( )____________________

Insurance Information
Name of insurance company: _______________________________________________
Policy name and number: __________________________________________________

Medical Information
Physician’s name: ___________________________ Phone: ( )__________________
Is your child allergic to any drugs? Yes No
If so, what? ______________________________________________________________
Does your child have any other allergies (e.g., bee stings, dust)? _________________
Does your child have any of the following? Asthma Diabetes Epilepsy
Is your child currently taking medication? Yes No
If so, what? ______________________________________________________________
Does your child wear contact lenses? Yes No
Is there additional information we should
know about your child’s health or
physical condition? Yes No
If yes, please explain: ______________________________________________________
Parent’s or guardian’s signature: __________________________ Date: _____________

From American Sport Education Program, 2012, Coaching youth basketball, 5th ed. (Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics).

250
Emergency Response Card
Be prepared to give the following information to an EMS dispatcher.

Caller’s name: ____________________________________________________________

Telephone number from which the call is being made: ( )____________________

Reason for call: ___________________________________________________________

How many people are injured: ______________________________________________

Condition of victim(s): _____________________________________________________

First aid being given: ______________________________________________________

Location: ________________________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________________________

City: ____________________________________________________________________

Directions (e.g., cross streets, landmarks, entrance access): __________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Note: Do not hang up first. Let the EMS dispatcher hang up first.

From American Sport Education Program, 2012, Coaching youth basketball, 5th ed. (Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics).

251
Free ebooks ==> www.Ebook777.com

About the Authors

The fifth edition of Coaching Youth Basketball


was written by the American Sport Education Pro-
gram (ASEP) in conjunction with USA Basketball’s
Don Showalter.
Showalter has coached the USA Basketball Men’s
Developmental National Team for four years,
leading them to gold medals at the 2009 and 2011
FIBA Americas U16 Championship and the 2010
FIBA U17 World Championship. He was named
the USA Basketball Junior Developmental Coach
of the Year in 2009 and 2010 and National Coach
of the Year by the National High School Athletic
Coaches Association in 2009 and coached in the
prestigious McDonald’s All-American Game in
1999. Showalter was the head boys’ basketball
coach and activities director at Mid-Prairie High
School in Wellman, Iowa, from 1984 to 2012 before accepting the head coaching
position at City High School in Iowa City. His winning percentage is .669 (557-275),
and he has been named Iowa Basketball Coaches Association Coach of the Year nine
times. Showalter has directed basketball camps all over the world, including Russia,
Mexico, Switzerland, Italy, Belgium, England, and Scotland.
ASEP has been developing and delivering coaching education courses since 1981.
As the nation’s leading coaching education program, ASEP works with national, state,
and local sport organizations to develop educational programs for coaches, officials,
administrators, and parents. These programs incorporate ASEP’s philosophy of “Ath-
letes first, winning second.”

252

www.Ebook777.com

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy